Kodak PACS LINK 100, 200 Medical Image Manager, PACS LINK 25 Print Server SERVICE MANUAL
Reklaam
Reklaam
{ServiceManual}{FinalDraft}{HealthImaging}{Internal}
Publication No. 8E8820
03NOV03
SERVICE MANUAL for the
Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100
Service Codes: 3433, 4223 - 1.2 GHz
Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200
Service Codes: 1539, 4224 - 1.2 GHz and the
Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER
Service Code: 3754
Restricted Information
© Eastman Kodak Company, 2003
PLEASE NOTE
The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Eastman Kodak Company prior to publication.
No patent license is granted by this information.
Eastman Kodak Company reserves the right to change this information without notice, and makes no warranty, express or implied, with respect to this information. Kodak shall not be liable for any loss or damage, including consequential or special damages, resulting from any use of this information, even if loss or damage is caused by Kodak’s negligence or other fault.
This equipment includes parts and assemblies sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge. Use caution to prevent damage during all service procedures.
2
Table of Contents
Description Page
System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
How to Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Overview of MIM Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Printers Used with MIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Input Data Formats Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Maximum Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
HIPPA Privacy Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
“MIM Service Application” Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Service Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
MIM 200 and 25 Print Server: Patient Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Tools - Hardware and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Software Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Installing the “Service LAPTOP COMPUTER Software for MIM-Based Products” . . 2-3
Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98 . . . . 2-9
Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 . . 2-15
Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows NT . . . 2-17
Installing “SecureLink” Client Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Installing pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Creating a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Connection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Starting and Using “SecureLink” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a SERIAL CABLE - for LAPTOP
COMPUTERS with Windows 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a SERIAL CABLE - for LAPTOP
COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 or Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM with a VPN Connection . . . . . . . . 2-30
Quitting the Service Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Starting pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Buttons and Hot Keys for pcAnywhere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Installing the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Unpacking System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Installing the 25 PS on an 8100 or 8200 LASER IMAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Installing the 25 PS on a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Installing the 25 PS on a Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Connecting a Telephone Line to an INTERNAL MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
NOV 2003 – 8E8820
8E8820 – NOV 2003
Installing an EXTERNALMODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Installing a FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT (FOPCIL) BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Installing a COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL) BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Network Isolation for MIM 200: 667 MHz, 1 MHz, 1.2 GHz, 2.4 MHz - European . . . . . . . 3-42
Primary Ethernet Isolation Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Secondary Ethernet Isolation Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Patient Environment Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Connecting the KEYPAD to the MODALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Preparing to Apply Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
De-energizing the MIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Energizing the MIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Upgrading MIM Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Saving and Restoring the System Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Saving and Restoring from a PRINT or DISPLAY KEYPAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Backing up from the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 200 - 667 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
Setting Up the BIOS for the 25 PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
Loading New MIM Application Software (Ghosting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Installing MIM DEVICE DRIVERS and FIRMWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
MIM Privacy Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Accessing the Security Administrator Console from a Remote COMPUTER . . . . . . . . 4-15
Enabling or Disabling the Privacy Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Setting up a PRINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Kodak DryView 8700/8500 and 969 HQ LASER IMAGERS and
Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Creating Network Profiles Using the “MIM Service Application” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
Setting Up the KEYPAD for Correct Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Completing Configuration of the Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
Setting Up the Input for a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Using Auto Setup to Set up the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Cable Compensation Adjustment for VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARDS . 7-33
Checking Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Using Advanced Leveling to Define Black and White Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Adjusting Gain and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Notes on Adjusting Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Checking the HIS/RIS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Troubleshooting the HIS/RIS Gateway Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Disabling the HIS/RIS GATEWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Using the BAR CODE READER with HIS/RIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
Using the BAR CODE READER without HIS/RIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
Obtaining Optimum Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
Using the KEYPAD to Create Optimum Images for the SCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Setting Up Print Server for True Size Printing - Cropping of Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Setting Up the SCU for Cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Text Box Relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Selecting TFT Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
TFT Set Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
ULUT Set Selections for the 8300 LASER IMAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
ULUT Set Selections for the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
3
SERVICE MANUAL
Final Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Training the Security Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Providing Service Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Replacing the MIM HARD DRIVE, CD ROM DRIVE, or FLOPPY DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Connecting to a MIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Finding an Unknown MIM IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Tools for Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Running a Network “Ping” Test from the “MIM Service Application” . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Running a Network “DICOM Echo” Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Running Diagnostics of the INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Changing Level of a Log for Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Retrieving the Activity History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Interpreting the Activity History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Interpreting the Error History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Retrieving the Error Frequency Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Clearing the Error Frequency Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Viewing Printing Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Troubleshooting with pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Transferring Files Using pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . 11-51
Using Windows TASK MANAGER from pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE
11-53
Using NT Event Viewer from pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE . . . . 11-55
Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57
Illustrated Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Illustrated Parts Breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
MIM 100 and MIM 200 1.2 GHz Field Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Safety, Regulatory, EMC and CE Marking Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200
(MIM 200) Safety Requirements Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Compliancy with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Setup Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Non-Compliancy with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
System Description
Section 1: System Description
Introduction
This manual provides instructions for installation and maintenance of Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGERS
(MIMs) with V_6.1 and higher software. These systems include the:
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)
• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)
Note
The name “MIM,” as used in this manual, applies to all of the above devices.
Note
How to Use this Manual
This manual includes 14 sections:
provides a general description of MIMs.
• Section 2 describes the hardware and software used as tools for installation and service.
• Sections 3 through 9 provide instructions for installing and setting up MIM SYSTEMS. The Field Engineer (FE) will not need all of these sections for every MIM. The sections cover “types” of MIM: PRINT SERVER, MODALITY SERVER or COMBINATION BOX. See Figure
. For example, to install a MODALITY SERVER, reference to Sections 5 and 6 is not necessary.
• Section 10 includes procedures for changing MIM configurations.
• Section 11 includes procedures for troubleshooting a MIM.
• Section 12 provides parts information for V_6.1 and higher software.
• Section 13 provides additional information.
• Section 14 provides Warnings and Cautions
8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-1
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 1–1 Installing and Setting Up a MIM
1-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
System Description
Overview of MIM Types
MIMs operate as MODALITY SERVERS, PRINT SERVERS, or both. See Table
Table 1–1 MIM Primary Functions
MIM 200
MIM 100
25 PS
Device MODALITY SERVER PRINT SERVER
x x x x
• MODALITY SERVERS capture images from digital or video MODALITIES. They have the ability to add annotation to the images and develop STUDIES that include patient demographic data. The STUDIES are converted to DICOM 3.0 and
sent to WORKSTATIONS, ARCHIVES, and PRINTERS or PRINT SERVERS on the network. See Figure 1–2
.
• PRINT SERVERS receive DICOM 3.0 print-class images from remote users on a DICOM/Ethernet NETWORK, convert these images to the protocol required by a local PRINTER, and send the images to the PRINTER.
Note
The MIM 200 can operate as both a MODALITY SERVER and PRINT SERVER. When it is set up to do so, it is identified as a COMBINATION BOX. The MIM 200 1.2 GHz only functions as either a MODALITY SERVER or a PRINT SERVER, but not a COMBINATION BOX.
A COMPUTER using Windows 2000 and application software from Kodak controls and processes the functions of the MIM.
Special purpose INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS are added to the COMPUTER for external communication.
The MIM does not include a MONITOR, KEYBOARD or MOUSE. For access to the MIM for service, the FE must connect:
• A LAPTOP COMPUTER, or
• A MONITOR KIT that includes a MONITOR, KEYBOARD, and MOUSE.
Figure 1–2 Example MIM 200 667 MHz, 1.4 GHz, and 2.4 GHz Setup
Keypads or
Host Control Consoles
Digital or Video Modalities
(Non-DICOM)
Keypad or
Host Control
Console Modality
Server
Fiber Optic or Copper
DICOM Net
MODALITY SERVER
DICOM 3.0 Print
Class
9410-01L
8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-3
SERVICE MANUAL
Printers Used with MIMs
The software version listed in the table indicates the minimum software version required for each product.
Table 1–2 PRINTER from PRINT SERVER Cross-Reference Chart
PRINTER
Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER
Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER
Kodak Ektascan 160 LASER IMAGER
Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER
Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER
Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER /
STANDARD
Kodak DryView 8600 LASER IMAGER
Type
Laser
Output Data Format
Laser Optical Interface
Print Request
Laser Optical Interface
Print Request
Laser Ethernet HOSTCOM
Laser 952/COPCIL
Laser DICOM
Interface
CABLES
Fiber Optic
Fiber Optic
Ethernet
Copper
Ethernet
Kodak DryView 8300 LASER IMAGER Laser 952/COPCIL Copper
Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / PLUS Laser Superset or 952/ FOPCIL Fiber Optic
Laser Superset or 952/COPCIL Copper
Superset or 952/COPCIL Copper
MIM 200
3.2
3.2
3.2
5.0
4.0, 4.1
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.2
25 PS
5.0
5.0
5.2
5.0
5.0
5.2
Kodak DryView 8610 LASER IMAGER Laser Superset or 952/COPCIL Copper
Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / PLUS Laser Superset or 952/ FOPCIL Fiber Optic
Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER /
STANDARD
Laser Superset or 952/
COPCIL
Copper
Laser Superset or 952/ FOPCIL Fiber Optic Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI-INPUT
MANAGER
Kodak DryView 969 HQ LASER IMAGER
Kodak DryView 969 HQT LASER IMAGER
Laser Superset or 952/FOPCIL Fiber Optic
Laser Superset or 952/
COPCIL
Copper
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.2
5.0
5.0
1-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
System Description
Input Options
MIMs use the following interfaces for input of images:
Video Input: A VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD is necessary.
Digital Input: A DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD which receives 8-bit Grayscale images is necessary.
Input from Network: An Ethernet 10/100baseT circuit in the MIM connects to an Ethernet 10baseT or 100baseT
NETWORK. The network connection is used for image input when the MIM is set up as a PRINT
SERVER. Images received from the network must conform to DICOM 3.0 print-class protocol.
Input Data Formats Allowed
• Point-to-Point Grayscale Video
• Point-to-Point Color Video
• Point-to-Point Grayscale Digital
• KEYPAD Study Management Requests
• Autofilming: KCL, Siemens, 952/831, Hitachi, Toshiba, YMS
• DICOM Print Request: Grayscale or Color
• DICOM Part 10 File
• Patient Demographics: KEYPAD, KEYBOARD, HIS/RIS Broker
• DICOM MODALITY Worklist Management SCU: TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD
• 3M
Output Options
Network Output: A NETWORK INTERFACE PORT on the MIM provides the connection for an Ethernet
10baseT or 100baseT NETWORK. A MIM can be set up to send images to as many as 25 print or store destinations on the network.
Local PRINTER Output: The following options are available for output to a local PRINTER. Only one output BOARD can be included in a MIM.
Fiber Optic Output:
Copper Output:
Ethernet Output:
A FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT BOARD (FOPCIL) is used to drive LASER IMAGERS from
Kodak with fiber optic inputs. The FOPCIL provides a digital output interface to match the digital input interface in LASER IMAGERS from Kodak. Both image and COM outputs are fiber optic. 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS require a single FIBER OPTIC CABLE, and are driven by an OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD.
A COPPER OUTPUT BOARD (COPCIL) is used to drive LASER IMAGERS from Kodak with copper image and COM inputs. The COPCIL provides a digital output interface to match the digital input interface in these LASER IMAGERS.
An Ethernet BOARD and CROSSOVER CABLE are used to drive the 8200 LASER IMAGER, the 160 LASER IMAGER, and the 3600 DMI.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-5
SERVICE MANUAL
Output Data Formats Allowed
• DICOM Basic Grayscale Print Management SCU: TOUCHSCREEN and PRINT KEYPAD
• DICOM Color Print Management SCU: TOUCHSCREEN and PRINT KEYPAD
• DICOM Secondary Capture Grayscale and Color Image Store SCU: TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD
• MIM Optical Interface Print Request: 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTER
• 10/100baseT Ethernet HOSTCOM Print: 160 LASER IMAGER
• 10/100baseT Ethernet DICOM Print: 8200 LASER IMAGER
• COPCIL: 8700 and 8500 LASER IMAGERS/STANDARD; and 8600, 8610, 8300, and 8100 LASER IMAGERS
• FOPCIL: 8700 and 8500 IMAGERS/PLUS, 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER, and 969 HQ LASER IMAGER
Maximum Inputs and Outputs
Maximum inputs and outputs allowed for MIMs are described in Table
Table 1–3 Maximum Inputs and Outputs for MIMs
MIM
200
Function
MODALITY SERVER (SCU), PRINT
SERVER (SCP), OR COMBINATION
200 1.2 GHz MODALITY SERVER (SCU) or PRINT
SERVER (SCP)
100 MODALITY SERVER (SCU)
100 1.2 GHz MODALITY SERVER (SCU)
25 PS PRINT SERVER (SCP)
Maximum Inputs
2 direct - Video or Digital.
1 network - DICOM
2 direct - Video or Digital.
1 network - DICOM
1 direct- Video or Digital
2 direct- Video or Digital
1 network- DICOM
Maximum Outputs
1 - Fiber, Copper, or Ethernet output
1 - Fiber, Copper, or Ethernet output
1 - DICOM
1 - DICOM
1 - Fiber, Copper, or Ethernet output
1-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
System Description
INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS
The INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS used in MIMS are identified in Table
.
Table 1–4 INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS
Type of BOARD
Input
PRIMARY Ethernet 10/100base T
NETWORK ISOLATION (EEC countries)
VIDEO 60 INTERFACE
VIDEO 150LC INTERFACE
VIDEO 150 INTERFACE
DIGITAL INTERFACE
Output
SECONDARY Ethernet 10/100base T
FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT (FOPCIL)
COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL)
MIM OPTICAL INTERFACE
MIM 200
2.4 GHz
* x x x x x x
MIM 200
1 GHz
* x x x x x x x x
MIM 200
1.2 GHz
* x x x x
x x x
MIM 200
667 MHz
x x x x x x x x
MIM 100
433 MHz
* x x x
Communication
RS422 SERIAL I/F, 8-Channel
POWER/RS422 DIST., 2-Channel
RS-422, 1-Channel x x x x x
MODEM*** x x x x
* PRIMARY Ethernet connection is on the MOTHERBOARD of the COMPUTER.
*** An EXTERNAL MODEM is an option on the MIM 200 - all, 25PS, and MIM 100 1.2 GHz.
x
MIM 100
1.2 GHz
* x x x x
25 PS
* x x x x x
Note
For MIM’s with software V_6.1 and higher, the boards must be installed in the correct slots in order for the system to boot. See
“MIM 200, 1.2 GHz - BOARDS” on Page 12–6 and “MIM 100, 1.2 GHz - BOARDS” on Page 12–7 .
8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-7
SERVICE MANUAL
MODEM for Remote Service Access
To provide FEs with remote access, an optional MODEM can be included in MIMs. For MIMs manufactured with V_6.1 software, an external MODEM is used. An external MODEM is used on the MIM 100 when installed outside the U.S. or Canada.
An internal MODEM BOARD is used in the MIM 100 within the U.S. and Canada.
If 2 or more MIMS are connected on an Ethernet NETWORK, a MODEM is necessary for only one of the MIMs. To connect to a MIM without a MODEM, the FE makes a call to the MIM with the MODEM. The call can then be routed to any other MIM on the network.
User Control
Operators use either a KEYPAD or a host control CONSOLE to acquire images, select output destinations, and print the images.
There is a separate KEYPAD or host control CONSOLE for each directly-connected MODALITY.
MIMs can use 3 types of KEYPADS:
• TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD - Used to control STUDY creation from a directly-connected MODALITY. This KEYPAD provides a number of features, including patient demographic acquisition for STUDY delivery to WORKSTATIONS and
ARCHIVES. Only this KEYPAD can be used to send STUDIES to DICOM store destinations.
• PRINT KEYPAD - Used to control STUDY creation from a directly-connected MODALITY for delivery to print-only destinations such as LASER PRINTERS and LASER IMAGERS.
• DISPLAY KEYPAD - Used only for setup and STUDY management for a MIM operating as a PRINT SERVER, for which there is only a DICOM interface for STUDY acquisition.
For more information on user control, see the User’s Guides for the MIMs.
HIPPA Privacy Feature
V_6.1 MIM software, includes a privacy feature that allows MIM users to comply with requirements of the Health Insurance
Portability and Accountability Act (HIPPA). When the privacy feature is enabled, keypad operators must log in with a username and password to use keypad functions that provide access to patient protected health information. The privacy features are controlled from a “security console” web page that is resident on each MIM. A customer security administrator, working on a computer connected to the same local area network as the MIM, can access the “security console” web page to setup username/ password accounts for each MIM keypad operato r.
“MIM Service Application” Software
The “MIM Service Application” can be used by FEs to:
• Enter parameters for configuration of a MIM during installation.
• Do system management functions, such as backup and restore of configuration parameters.
• Do diagnostics such as viewing logs, running tests, and monitoring operation of the system.
The “MIM Service Application” is stored on the LAPTOP COMPUTER as well as in the MIM. For more information on this and other tools for service, refer to Section 2, Tools - Hardware and Software.
Service Access
The MIM does not include a MONITOR, KEYBOARD or MOUSE. For access to the MIM for service, the FE must:
• Connect a LAPTOP COMPUTER, or
• Connect a MONITOR KIT that includes a MONITOR, KEYBOARD, and MOUSE.
The MONITOR KIT connects directly to PORTS on the MIM. The LAPTOP COMPUTER can connect to the MIM:
• Over a dial-up serial line connection.
• Over an Ethernet network. The LAPTOP COMPUTER must contain an Ethernet interface for this connection.
• Over a dial-up telephone line using a MODEM.
1-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
System Description
When the LAPTOP COMPUTER is connected to a MIM, the FE can use it to run the “MIM Service Application.” Also, via
pcANYWHERE, the FE can use Windows FEATURES such as Windows EXPLORER, Windows EVENT VIEWER, and
Windows TASK MANAGER on the target MIM.
Note
The MONITOR KIT can also be used for service access:
• The “MIM Service Application” can be run with the MONITOR KIT because the service software is stored on the MIM as well as on the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
• The MONITOR KIT can be used to watch the boot process and access the BIOS on the MIM.
When a MONITOR KIT is used, a LAPTOP COMPUTER with “SecureLink” is also required to unlock the Windows
DESKTOP.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-9
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up the MIMs
The following figures provide examples of systems using MIMs.
Figure 1–3 MIMs and other Devices on the Network
Imaging
Device
Digital
Data
DICOM over Ethernet
HIS/RIS
DICOM
ARCHIVE
DEVICE
DICOM
Imaging
Device
Color or
Grayscale
Video
Autofilming
Link
MIM 100
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
DICOM
WORKSTATION
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
DICOM
MIM 200
8500 or 8700
LASER IMAGER
25 Print Server
8120 LASER IMAGER
Imaging
Device
Digital
Data
Autofilming
Link
Imaging
Device
Color or
Grayscale
Video
Autofilming
Link
MIM 200
DICOM
DICOM
CROSSOVER
ETHERNET
CABLE
MIM 200
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
8200 LASER IMAGER
RS-422
COPPER
CABLE
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
8300 or 8610
LASER IMAGER
MIM 200
H180_3003ECA
H180_3003EC
1-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
System Description
Figure 1–4 MODALITY SERVERS
Imaging
Device
KEYPAD
Digital Data
Digital Data
Imaging
Device
KEYPAD
MIM 200
Imaging
Device
KEYPAD
Imaging
Device
Digital Data
Autofilming
Link
Color or
Grayscale
Video
Autofilming
Link
MIM 200
Keypad
TOUCHSCREEN
KEYPAD
FORMAT= 24
END
EXAM
COPIES= 1
MAIN
MENU
Imaging
Device
Imaging
Device
Digital Data
Autofilming
Link
Color or
Grayscale
Video
Autofilming
Link
MIM 200
TOUCHSCREEN
KEYPAD
FORMAT= 24
END
EXAM
COPIES= 1
MAIN
MENU
DICOM over Ethernet
DICOM
DICOM
DICOM
H180_3004EC
8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-11
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 1–5 MODALITY SERVER, PRINT SERVER, and COMBINATION BOXES
DICOM over
Ethernet
KEYPAD
Imaging
Device
Grayscale
Video
Imaging
Device
Grayscale
Video
P A C S Link
M E D I C A L I M A G E M A N A G E R 2 0 0
MIM 200
DICOM
PA S Link
M E D I C A L I M A G E M A N A G E R 2 0 0
TOUCHSCREEN
KEYPAD
FORMAT= 24
END
EXAM
COPIES= 1
MAIN
MENU
Imaging
Device
Grayscale
Video
MIM 200
KEYPAD
DICOM
Imaging
Device
Grayscale
Video
PAC Link
M E D I C A L I M A G E M A N A G E R 2 0 0
MIM 200
RS-422
COPPER
CABLE
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
8100 LASER IMAGER
Ethernet
CABLE
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
160 LASER IMAGER
KEYPAD
Imaging
Device
KEYPAD
Grayscale
Video
DICOM
Imaging
Device
Grayscale
Video
PA C S Link
M E D I C A L I M A G E M A N A G E R 2 0 0
MIM 200
RS-422
COPPER
CABLE
Display
Keypad
8100 LASER IMAGER
KEYPAD
H180_0082EC
1-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
System Description
MIM 200 and 25 Print Server: Patient Environment
Figure 1–6
Minimum Distance between the MIM 200 or
25 Print Server and the Patient Contact Equipment
1.83 m
(6 ft)
2.5 m
(8 ft)
Warning
The following installation requirements must be met
worldwide for the MIM 200 and the 25 Print Server and their accessories; e.g., keypads, footswitches, keyboards. Refer to the illustration at the left, which identifies the patient environment.
• Minimum distance from device or accessory to Patient
Contact Equipment; e.g., Ultrasound:
– Horizontal: 1.83 m (6 ft)
– Vertical: 2.5 m (8 ft) above the floor under the patient
• Contact of patient and device or accessory simultaneously by caregiver is not allowed.
• Direct electrical connection between device or accessory and Patient Contact Equipment is not allowed.
Note
The requirements are based on the EN60601-1 Standard.
1.83 m
(6 ft)
H174_0043GC
1.83 m
(6 ft)
Important
The MIM 100 can be installed within the patient environment.
MIM 200 product placement in the European Economic
Community (EEC), see “Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL
IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200) Safety Requirements
Change” on Page 14–4 .
8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-13
SERVICE MANUAL
History of Software
Table 1–5 Versions of Software for the MIM
Version
V_1.x
V_2.x
V_3.x
V_3.2
V_4.x
V_5.0
Features of Software
Original version, for MIM 100 only. Developed for the SPOOLER for DICOM PRINTERS market. Used the CP
DICOM Input Package to connect with the XLP, 1120, and 2180 LASER PRINTERS over the network. Used
DICOM to connect to MLP 190. Features included:
• Grayscale video image acquisition, 8-bit, 1-150 MHz
• Digital image acquisition, 8-bit
• DICOM Basic Grayscale Print Management SCU
• Autofilming control: 952, P831, KCL, Hitachi, YMS, Toshiba, and Siemens
• Image delivery to a single destination chosen from a list of all available destinations
• 10baseT-twisted pair, 10base2-thinnet, 10base5-thicknet using TCP/IP
For MIM 100 only. Developed for the Image Distribution for Diagnosis and Review market. Added:
• 12-bit digital image acquisition
• DICOM Store SCU for Study Delivery to WORKSTATIONS and ARCHIVES
• DICOM Worklist SCU for HIS/RIS Gateway access to retrieve patient demographics
• Manual patient demographics entry via TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD or full KEYBOARD
• Automated patient demographics entry via HIS/RIS Gateway connection
• Delivery to multiple destinations chosen from a list of all available destinations
• Study re-delivery to any available destination
• Native 100baseT support
• Software licensing ability
Introduced MIM 50 and DPS. Developed for the DMI market and the DICOM SPOOLER for CP-Based
PRINTERS application. Supported connection to the 3600 DMI and 1200 DMI. Added:
• DICOM Basic Grayscale and Color Print SCP for receiving DICOM print jobs
• DICOM Basic Annotation Box SCP for receiving text
• Low Cost Color/Grayscale VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD
• Output to CP-Based PRINTERS via high-speed fiber connection
Introduced MIM 200. Developed for the LSI, DMI, and PACS (Cemax-ICON) business applications. Added:
• Multiple direct connect inputs with or without DICOM input
• Ability to acquire a mix of color and monochrome images on a single page
• 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM MS emulation for 952 Autofilming Superset support
• Connection database to provide user with ability to set image processing preferences within the spooler, source by source
• Ability to create separate image series within a “study” for delivery to AutoRad WORKSTATIONS
• DICOM Presentation PLUT support for interoperability with 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM
Added the ability to operate as a DPS for the 8200 LASER IMAGER, and features that can:
• Support standard multi-up page formats used by the Kodak Directview CR 800 SYSTEM for DICOM delivery.
• Rasterize page annotation tests, using a clear, sharp, true-size font onto a predefined location centered on the bottom of the page.
• Use the “MIM Service Application” for configuration of an 8200 LASER IMAGER and a networked PRINT
SERVER/8200 LASER IMAGER destination.
Adds to MIMs the features of the 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM and the 9405 PRINT SERVER, allowing a
MIM to be a replacement for these in systems that connect to Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS. This release allows connection to the 8700, 8500, 8610, 8300, 8200, and 8100 LASER IMAGERS as well as the 8800
MULTI-INPUT MANAGER, 160 LASER IMAGER and 969 HQ LASER IMAGER.
1-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
V_6.1
System Description
Version
V_5.2
V_6.0
Features of Software
Adds the features of cropping CR and DR images from Kodak and other manufacturer’s systems including FUJI
CR to provide true size printing using the MIM Print Servers.
The MIM Print Servers have expanded Kodak DryView printer destinations including the 8300, 8600, and 8610 for the 25 Print Server and 8600 for the MIM 200 Print Server.
A bar code reader option is supported on the modality servers, MIM 100 and MIM 200, to improve workflow for patient demographics.
A network isolation board has been added to the MIM 200 for the European region.
Adds Privacy-Enable features to the MIMs for those customers desiring this feature. Expected usage is in DICOM
Store and DICOM Worklist management applications. Also, the privacy feature may be used for the reprint capability of DICOM print applications. The privacy feature is optional and can be disabled.
Incorporates SecureLink authentication and encryption for service connections to the MIM.
Changes operating system on MIMs from Windows NT to Windows 2000.
V_6.0 supports only the following MIM platforms:
• MIM 100 - 433 MHz
• MIM 200 - 667 MHz
• MIM 200 1.0 GHz
• MIM 200 2.4 GHz
• Kodak PACS Link 25 Print Sever
With V_6.0, the following items no longer supported:
• MIM 50
• DPS (DICOM Print Server)
• Kodak 3600 DESKTOP MEDICAL IMAGER
• Kodak 1200 DESKTOP MEDICAL IMAGER
Supports VPN remote access.
Film border default setting = Image Dmax for 2180, 8900 and 160 applications.
Date annotation format is configurable according to international requirements.
Printing of patient demographics in the quotation box, at the bottom of the film, if DICOM Store is enabled.
HISRIS enhancements:
- Polling interval can be configured
- Record retention window can be configured
- Enable/disable scheduled procedure step start time
- Enable/disable Study Description
• Adds support for embedded enclosure
• Improves workflow for bar code reader by allowing use from Acquisition screen.
• Uses image capture time in DICOM study date/time and page annotation date/time.
• Supports underscore character in AE Title
8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-15
SERVICE MANUAL
Specifications
For machine specifications, see the SITE SPECIFICATIONS document for the MIM.
Documentation
Publication
SITE
SPECIFICATIONS
QUICK REFERENCE
SERVICE MANUAL
USER GUIDES
Product
Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE
MANAGER 100 and 200, and Kodak PACS LINK
25 PRINT SERVER
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE for the KODAK
PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE
MANAGER with DISPLAY KEYPAD
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE for the KODAK
PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE
MANAGER 200 with PRINT KEYPAD
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE for the KODAK
PACS Link 25 PRINT SERVER
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE for the KODAK
PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE
MANAGER TOUCH SCREEN KEYPAD
Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE
MANAGER 100/200, Kodak PACS LINK 25
PRINT SERVER
Introduction to the Kodak PACS LINK
PRODUCTS
USER’S GUIDE for the DISPLAY KEYPAD - for use with KODAK PACS LINK MEDICAL
IMAGE MANAGER 200 and KODAK PACS
LINK 25 Print Server
USER’S GUIDE for the PRINT KEYPAD - for use with the KODAK PACS LINK MEDICAL
IMAGE MANAGER 20
USER’S GUIDE for the TOUCH SCREEN
KEYPAD - for use with the KODAK PACS LINK
MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 and 200
Security and Privacy Features - for use with the
KODAK PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE
MANAGER and 25 Print Server
Security Policy, Customer Security Obligations and Best Practices
USER’S GUIDE ADDENDUM for SOFTWARE
VERSION 6.1 - for
KODAK PACS LINK
MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 and 200
Pub. No.
8E9891
NOV03
8E8681
JUL03
8E8682
JUL03
8E8684
JUL03
8E8683
JUL03
8E8820
NOV03
8E8676
JUL03
8E8678
JUL03
8E8679
JUL03
8E8680
JUL03
8E9002
JUL03
8E9122
JUL03
8E9892
NOV03
Notes
LAMINATED CARD
CD for systems with V_6.1 application software.
1-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
System Description
Glossary
10/100baseT
ANSI
ASL
AUI
A CSMA/CD Ethernet LAN using Twisted Pair Wire with a baseband of either 10 Mbps or
100 Mbps. The IEEE standard for 24-gauge UTP for Ethernet.
American National Standards Institute
Adaptive Speed Leveling: ASL keeps the MODEM on-line, operating at the highest possible speed and constantly checking data integrity.
Attachment Unit Interface: A 15-pin CONNECTOR, usually with a transceiver, used with Ethernet connection.
AWG
CP
CPOI
CSMA/CD
American Wire Gauge
Common Protocol
Common Protocol Optical Interface
Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Detection
DICOM
DMI
EEC
EIA
Ethernet
The Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine imaging standard.
DESKTOP MEDICAL IMAGER
European Economic Community
Electrical Industries Association
A passive COAXIAL CABLE that sends digital signals for a network in which the interconnections contain active elements. A LAN standard that uses a BUS topology with CSMA/CD access control. A LAN that can bridge operating systems and ignore inherent differences in data and file structures to promote reliable interconnections.
Hospital Information System / Radiology Information System
HIS/RIS
HUB
A central point or concentrator in a star topology where connections meet. Network communications flow through the HUB.
Internet Protocol
IP
LAN
LUT
MIM
MODALITY
MODEM
Local Area Network: A combination of COMPUTER hardware and software that connects several
COMPUTERS and peripherals to provide communication and access to shared data.
Lookup Table
Medical Image Manager
An Imaging Device.
Modulator / Demodulator: A device that your COMPUTER uses to send data over TELEPHONE WIRES.
Mbps
Megabits per second
NEMA PLUG
The National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association standard 3-pronged PLUG.
OI
PACS
PLUT
Pre-staged
Optical Interface
Picture Archiving & Communication Systems
Presentation Lookup Table
Equipment that was shipped with the MODALITY parameters installed and tested.
Protocol
Set of rules and procedures allowing COMPUTERS and peripherals to communicate.
Qualified Input The MODALITY has been field tested with correct parameters. The database in the Service Software for the MIM might also include this MODALITY in the Qualified list.
RJ-11
RJ-45
4-WIRE MODULAR CONNECTORS for phone lines.
8-WIRE MODULAR CONNECTORS for Ethernet twisted-pair wiring.
RS-232, RS-422 EIA standards for physical and electrical specifications of a serial interface between a COMPUTER and a peripheral, for example, a MODEM.
RS-485
SCU
SCP
EIA standard for digital data connections between devices.
DICOM Service Class User.
DICOM Service Class Provider.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-17
SERVICE MANUAL
TCP/IP
TFT
TSC
TSK
Twisted Pair
ULUT
Unqualified
Input
UTP
WAN
Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol: Set of communication protocols developed for the
Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) to connect dissimilar systems. The TCP controls the transfer of the data, and the IP provides the routing mechanism.
Transfer Function Table
Technical Support Center
TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD - Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen.
Wiring used in telephone systems and many networks, consisting of a pair of COPPER WIRES twisted around each other to counteract the effects of noise. Commonly used instead of coaxial Ethernet cable in network applications. Usually unshielded; however, the more expensive shielded version supports greater distance with less risk of electrical interference.
User Lookup Table
The MODALITY has not been field tested.
Unshielded Twisted Pair
Wide Area Network
1-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Section 2: Tools - Hardware and Software
Introduction
This section provides information about the tools used for installation and service of the:
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)
• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)
The information in this section includes:
Lists of hardware and software tools
Procedures for configuring the LAPTOP COMPUTER
Procedure for installing new MIM Service Application software
Procedure for installing “SecureLink” authentication software
Procedure for installing pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE
Procedures for connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM
Description of “MIM Service Application” functions
Procedures for starting the “MIM Service Application”
Using pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE
Procedure for using a MONITOR KIT
Tools - Hardware and Software
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-1
SERVICE MANUAL
Tools and Accessories
Hardware Tools
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.
2.
3.
4.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Item
LAPTOP COMPUTER - Must have Windows 98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT.
SERIAL CABLE - Use to connect LAPTOP COMPUTER to MIM SERIAL PORT
10bT/100bT Ethernet BOARD - Installed in LAPTOP COMPUTER
NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE
10 baseT CABLE
Ethernet HUB: 10bT/100bT
MONITOR KIT - A MONITOR, KEYBOARD and MOUSE
Part Number
TL-5224
78-9998-2934-0
96-0000-3918-8
96-9998-2936-5
78-9998-2935-7
8E2480
ADAPTER - Used to connect MONITOR CABLE to the MIM 200, 667 MHz version. 3H9543
Y CABLE - Used to connect KEYBOARD and MOUSE of MONITOR KIT to 25 PS or MIM 100.
8E2284, TL-5371
EXTERNAL CD ROM DRIVE - Used to upgrade new software for MIM 100.
EXTENDER POWER CONNECTOR - Used with EXTERNAL CD ROM DRIVE for
MIM 100.
RIBBON CABLE - Used with EXTERNAL CD ROM DRIVE for MIM 100.
TELEPHONE CORD
TL-5651
TL-5652
5E2908
None
LAPTOP COMPUTER
This primary service tool includes Windows 98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT SOFTWARE, an Ethernet
BOARD, and a MODEM. The LAPTOP COMPUTER can connect to the MIM with a SERIAL CABLE, a
MODEM or a local area network. It is used to run the “MIM Service Application,” which is used to configure the
MIM, run diagnostics, view the logs, and do other functions.
MONITOR KIT
The MONITOR, KEYBOARD, and MOUSE in this KIT connect to the MIM, and can directly access the
Windows 2000 DESKTOP and the MIM files, including the logs. The MONITOR KIT is used to configure the
MIM BIOS and to diagnose MIM database or hardware/Windows 2000 problems that the “MIM Service
Application” cannot diagnose. Because the “MIM Service Application” is stored in the MIM as well as on the
LAPTOP COMPUTER, the Service Application can be accessed directly in the MIM with the MONITOR KIT.
Software Tools
For MIM service, the following software tools must be installed on your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Item
“Service LAPTOP Software for MIM-Based Products”
“MIM Service Application” Software, V_6.1 - installed on LAPTOP COMPUTER
Includes SecureLink V_1.1 Software Part Number 8E9820
pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE - installed on LAPTOP
COMPUTER and on MIM
“SecureLink V_1.0 Client” CD
5.
FLOPPY BIOS FLASH DISK 2.0
Part Number
7E6051
8E9823
78-9998-2937-3
8E8814
7F3185
2-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Setting Up the LAPTOP COMPUTER
Setup Tasks
To prepare your laptop computer for MIM service, you must do the software installation and setup tasks listed in the following table on your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
Normally you will do these procedures during training or they will be part of the TCO or Field LAPTOP COMPUTER image.
You will not have to repeat them unless you change the operating system on your COMPUTER or new MIM-related software is released.
Table 2–1 LAPTOP COMPUTER Setup Tasks
1
4
5
2
3
6
7
8
Task
Install Service LAPTOP Software for MIM-Based Products
Install TCP/IP
Configuring Direct Cable Connection - for
LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98
Install Dial-Up Networking
Install “Serial Cable to NT” and Set Up the SERIAL PORT
Install “Communications cable between two computers” and Set Up the SERIAL PORT.
Create a “Dial-Up Networking” Icon for the
SERIAL PORT
Create “Dial-Up Networking” Icons for MODEM
Connections
Procedure
For LAPTOP
COMPUTER with
Windows 98
Not applicable
Procedure
For LAPTOP
COMPUTER with
Windows 2000
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Procedure
For LAPTOP
COMPUTER with
Windows NT
Not applicable
Not applicable
9 Install “SecureLink” Client software
10 Request and Install a Digital Certificate for
“SecureLink”
See SecureLink documentation on Service Apps CD.
See SecureLink documentation on Service Apps CD.
11 Install latest MIM Service Application Software
12 Install pcAnywhere
13 Create a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere
Note
LAPTOP COMPUTERS with an official Kodak image will have items 1, 2 and 4 through 7 completed. Steps 9 through 11 will not be part of the image until after August 2003.
Installing the “Service LAPTOP COMPUTER Software for MIM-Based Products”
This procedure applies to LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT.
For this procedure you will need the CD 7E6051. The table on
lists the software components on this CD that you will install.
To install this CD, do the procedure that starts after the table on
Important
See the table on Page 2–4 for the correct order for installing the software
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-3
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 2–2 Loading the Service Laptop Software for MIM-Based Products on the LAPTOP COMPUTER
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Insert CD into CD-ROM DRIVE
Install LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC
SOFTWARE V_2.0
Install DATA ACCESS OBJECTS (DAO)
FILES V_3.0
Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_A1.8
Install LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC
SOFTWARE V_3.0
Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_2.1
Folder Containing the
SOFTWARE on CD
-
LapBasic
Notes
--
DAO V_3.00 files, Data
Link Library (DLL) Files, and
MODEM Files
See above.
Part of Laptop Basic
Software V_2.0
S_sw_a18
Laptop30
MODALITY Database, Help
Files
DAO V_3.5 files.
S_sw_2_1 MODALITY Database, Help
Files
7
8
Install LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC
SOFTWARE V_3.5
Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.0
Laptop35
S_sw_3_0 MODALITY Database, Help
Files
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.1
Install LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC
SOFTWARE V_3.6
Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.2
Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.2.1
Install KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE
V_1.0.4
S_sw_3_1 mim laptop basic 3.6
mimservice3.2
mimservice3.2.1
Key_104
Install KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE
V_1.0.5
Install KEYPAD DIRMWARE UPDATE
V_1.0.7
Key_105
Key_107
Install MIM DIGITAL FIRMWARE V_2.2
Mim_Dig
Mim_100 MIM 100 APPLICATION SOFTWARE
V_6.0
MIM 100 APPLICATION SOFTWARE
V_6.1
Install VIDEO 150 BOARD FIRMWARE
V_1.3
Mim_100
V150_1_3
Installation Procedure:
[1] Insert the CD into the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
The contents of the CD displays automatically.
[2] Install the LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC SOFTWARE V_2.0 on the LAPTOP COMPUTER:
(a) Double-click [Laptop Basic].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Next] in each of the 4 screens that display.
(d) Click [Finish].
2-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Important
In Step [3] (i), if the LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the message “Missing DLL,” click [OK] to complete the installation. This message does not indicate a malfunction.
[3] Install the DATA ACCESS OBJECTS (DAO) FILES V_3.0:
(a) Select Start>Settings>Control Panel.
(b) Open “Add/Remove Programs.”
(c) Click:
• [Install]
• [Next]
• [Browse]
(d) At the “C:\” prompt, double-click the [C:\] prompt and then open the folder “Program Files.”
(e) Open:
1. “KHID”
2. “DAO”
(f) Double-click [Setup.exe].
(g) Check that the “Run Installation Program” window displays “C:\Program Files\KHID\DAO\Setup.exe.”
(h) Click:
• [Finish]
• [Next]
(i) At the message “DAO Setup Complete,” click [OK].
(j) To check your work, select Start>Settings>Control Panel>Add/Remove Program.
Note
The screen displays “Data Access Objects (DAO) 3.0” if the software is correctly installed.
[4] Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_A1.8:
(a) Double-click [S_sw_a1.8].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[5] Install the LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC SOFTWARE V_3.0 on the LAPTOP COMPUTER:
(a) Double-click [Laptop30].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Next].
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-5
SERVICE MANUAL
(d) Select Jet 3.5.
(e) Click [Next].
Important
In
, all boxes must be unchecked.
(f) Check that all boxes are unchecked.
(g) Click [Next].
(h) Click [OK].
2-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
[6] Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_2.1:
(a) Double-click [S_sw_2.1].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
Important
Depending on what software is on the LAPTOP COMPUTER, you might have to click [Yes] 1 or more times in
Step [7] (d).
[7] Install the LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC SOFTWARE V_3.5:
(a) Double-click [Laptop35].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Next].
(d) Click [Yes] each time the screen asks if you want to overwrite an existing file.
(e) Click [Finish].
[8] Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.0:
(a) Double-click [S_sw_3_0].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[9] Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.1:
(a) Double-click [S_sw_3_1].
(b) Double-click Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[10] Install the LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC SOFTWARE V_3.6:
(a) Double-click [MIM Laptop Basic 3.6].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[11] Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.2:
(a) Double-click [MIM Service 3.2].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[12] Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.2.1:
(a) Double-click [MIM Service 3.2.1].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-7
SERVICE MANUAL
[13] Install the KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE V_1.04:
(a) Double-click [key_10].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[14] Install the KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE V_1.05:
(a) Double-click [key_105].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[15] Install the KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE V_1.07:
(a) Double-click [key_107].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[16] Install the DIGITAL FIRMWARE V_2.2:
(a) Double-click [Mim_Dig].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[17] Install the MIM 100 APPLICATION SOFTWARE V_6.1:
(a) Double-click [Mim_100].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[18] Install the VIDEO 150 BOARD FIRMWARE V_1.3:
(a) Double-click [V150_1_3].
(b) Double-click [Setup].
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[19] Remove the CD from the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[20] What operating system is on your LAPTOP COMPUTER?
Windows 98
Continue with “Installing TCP/IP -
Windows 2000
Advance to
Windows NT
“Installing TCP/IP - Windows NT” on Page 2–17
2-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98
Installing TCP/IP - Windows 98
[1] On the LAPTOP COMPUTER, select Start>Control Panel.
[2] Open Network.
[3] Check the “network components installed” list in the “Configuration” window:
• If TCP/IP is installed, check that “Client for Microsoft Networks” is selected in the “Primary Network Logon” window. Advance to the procedure
“Configuring Direct Cable Connection - for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with
• If TCP/IP is not installed, advance to
[4] Click [Add].
[5] At the “Select Network Component Type” window, select Protocol.
[6] Click [Add].
[7] At the “Select Network Protocol” window, select:
• Manufacturer: Microsoft
• Network Protocol: TCP/IP
[8] Click [OK].
[9] At the “Select Device” window, click [OK].
[10] At the restart prompt, click [Yes].
[11] Continue with the next procedure.
Configuring Direct Cable Connection - for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98
[1] Right-click “My Computer”.
[2] Select “Properties”
[3] Select Device Manager>Modem>Serial Cable on COM1.
[4] Select “Properties” for “COM1”.
[5] Select “Modem”.
[6] Set “maximum speed” to 115200 and select [OK].
[7] Select Device Manager>Ports>COM1.
[8] Select “Properties” for “COM1”.
[9] Select “Port Settings”.
[10] Set “Bits/second” to 115200.
[11] Set “Flow Control” to “none”.
[12] Select [OK] twice to escape.
[13] Shut down the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
Note
You must select a full “Shut down”, not “Restart”.
[14] Continue with the next procedure.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-9
SERVICE MANUAL
Installing Dial-Up Networking - Windows 98
Note
TCP/IP must be installed in “Dial-Up Networking” for communication between the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM.
[1] At the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications.
[2] Check the “Communications” folder for Windows 98:
• If “Dial-Up Networking” is not installed, advance to Step 3 .
• If “Dial-Up Networking” is installed, advance to
“Installing “Serial Cable to NT” and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT
[3] If “Control Panel” is not open, select Start>Control Panel.
[4] Select Add>Remove Programs.
[5] Select Windows Setup>Communications.
[6] Check that Communications has a checkmark next to it.
[7] Click [Details].
Important
In the next step, the field for “Dial-Up Networking” must be checked.
[8] Check that the field for the “Dial-Up Networking” is selected, click [OK].
[9] Click [OK].
[10] Follow the directions the screen displays for restarting the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[11] Continue with the next procedure.
2-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Installing “Serial Cable to NT” and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT - Windows 98
[1] Open Modems in the “Control Panel” Window.
[2] At the “Modems Properties” window under “General,” click [Add].
[3] Select “Other” and click [Next].
[4] Check “Don’t Detect my Modem” and click [Next].
[5] Click:
• [Have Disk]
• [Browse]
Important
In the following step, you might have to change the directory level from “C:\Windows” to the directory indicated.
[6] At the “Open” window, select C:\ProgamFiles\KHID\Modem.
[7] At the “Open” window, Select “mdhayes.inf” and click [OK] twice.
[8] Select the 2 nd
listing for manufacturer: “Generic Modem Drivers” and “Serial Cable to Windows NT.”
[9] Click [Next].
[10] Select “Communications Port (COM 1)” for the 9-Pin SERIAL PORT of the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[11] Click [Next].
[12] When the LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the message “Your modem has been set up successfully,” click:
• [Finish]
• [Close]
[13] Close the “Control Panel.”
[14] Continue with the next procedure.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-11
SERVICE MANUAL
Creating a “Dial-Up Networking” Icon for the SERIAL PORT - Windows 98
[1] At the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Dial-Up Networking.
[2] At the “Dial-Up Networking” window, double-click [Make New Connection].
[3] At the “Make a New Connection” window, type: Connect to MIM products or some other title you choose.
[4] At the “Select a Device” menu for , click [Serial Cable to Windows NT].
[5] Click [Configure].
[6] Check that the settings are correct in each of the following tabs:
• General:
– Communication Port (COM1)
– Max Speed = 115,200 baud
• Connection:
– Data bits = 8
– Parity = None
– Stop bits = 1
• Options: Display modem status
[7] Click:
• [Connection]
• [Advanced]
[8] Check both “Use Flow Control” and “Hardware (RTS/CTS)”.
[9] Click:
• [OK] twice
• [Next]
Important
• You must enter a telephone number before you can exit the “Make New Connection” window.
• The Dial-Up Networking “Connect to” window does not use this telephone number.
• Use “Tab” to advance to the next field in the menu.
[10] Type:
• 111 for the area code
• Type: 111-1111 for the telephone number
[11] Click:
• [Next]
• [Finish]
[12] Make a shortcut for “Connect to” (see the title assigned in Step
(a) Right-click the MOUSE to select “Connect to.”
(b) Click [Create Shortcut].
(c) Click [Yes] to place the shortcut on the desktop
[13] Close the “Dial-Up Networking” window.
[14] Continue with the next procedure.
2-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Creating Dial-Up Networking Icons for MODEM Connections - Windows 98
You should create a dial-up networking icon for each of the MIMs that you expect to access with a dial-up telephone connection.
The following procedure sets up one dial-up modem connection. Repeat this procedure for each MIM that has a MODEM.
[1] At the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Dial-Up Networking.
[2] In the “Dial-Up Networking” window, double-click [Make New Connection].
[3] Enter a name for the MIM or RAS Server to which you want to connect.
[4] Click [Configure] and accept the default values for the MODEM configuration.
[5] Click [Next].
[6] Enter the telephone number of the target MIM or RAS Server.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-13
SERVICE MANUAL
[7] Click [Next].
[8] Click [Finish].
An icon with the name of the connection you entered in
will now appear in your Dial-Up Networking folder. You can connect to the target MIM by double-clicking on the icon.
Repeat this procedure for each of the MIMs you expect to access through a MODEM. You can add icons for additional MODEM connections later.
[9] When you are done creating dial-up icons, advance to
“Installing “SecureLink” Client Software” on Page 2–19 .
2-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 2000
Installing TCP/IP - Windows 2000
[1] On the LAPTOP COMPUTER, select Start>Settings>Control Panel>Network and Dial-up Connections>Local Area
Connection.
[2] Click [Properties].
[3] Scroll to “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”.
[4] Is “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” checked?
No Yes
Up the SERIAL PORT - for Windows 2000” on Page 2–15
[5] Click [Install].
[6] Select “Client”.
[7] Click [Add].
[8] Follow the instructions to install TCP/IP.
[9] Continue with the next procedure.
Installing “Communications cable between two computers” and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT - for Windows 2000
[1] From the task bar: Start>Settings>Control Panel>Phone and Modem Options.
[2] Select the “Modem” tab.
[3] Click [Add].
[4] Check “Don’t Detect my modem; I will select it from list”.
[5] Click [Next].
[6] From the list, select “Communications cable between two computers”.
[7] Click [Next].
[8] Select “Selected ports”.
[9] Select “COM1”.
[10] Click [Next].
[11] Click [Finish].
[12] Select “Communications cable between two computers”.
[13] Click [Properties].
[14] Set “Maximum Port Speed” to “115200”.
[15] Click [OK].
[16] Click [OK] again to close the “Phone and Modem Options” window.
[17] Continue with the next procedure.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-15
SERVICE MANUAL
Creating a “Dial-Up Networking” Icon for the SERIAL PORT - Windows 2000
[1] At the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Network and Dial-Up Communications.
[2] Click [Make New Connection].
The Network Connection Wizard starts.
[3] Click [Next].
[4] Select “Connect directly to another computer” and click [Next].
[5] Select “Guest” and click [Next].
[6] Select “Communications cable between two computers (COM1)” and click [Next].
[7] Select “Only for myself” and click [Next].
[8] Enter the name Connect to MIM products or some other title you choose.
[9] Click [Finish].
An icon now appears in the “Networking and Dial-Up Connections” window with the name you entered.
[10] Make a desktop shortcut for connection you just created.
(a) Right-click the MOUSE on the icon you just created.
(b) Click [Create Shortcut].
(c) Click [Yes] to place the shortcut on the desktop.
[11] Close the “Networking and Dial-up Connections” window.
[12] Continue with the next procedure.
Creating “Dial-Up Networking” Icons for MODEM Connections - Windows 2000
You should create a dial-up networking icon for each of the MIMs that you expect to access with a dial-up telephone connection.
The following procedure sets up one dial-up modem connection. Repeat this procedure for each MIM that has a MODEM.
[1] At the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Network and Dial-Up Communications.
[2] Click [Make New Connection].
The Network Connection Wizard starts.
[3] Click [Next].
[4] Select “Dial-up to private network” and click [Next].
[5] Select “Guest” and click [Next].
[6] Select the modem you have installed in your LAPTOP COMPUTER and click [Next].
Note
If there is only one dial-up device in your LAPTOP COMUTER, this step may not appear.
[7] Enter the telephone number of the target MIM or RAS Server.
[8] Select “Only for myself” and click [Next].
[9] Enter a name for this connection.
[10] Click [Finish].
An icon now appears in the “Networking and Dial-Up Connections” window with the name you entered.
[11] Close the “Networking and Dial-up Connections” window.
An icon with the name of the connection you entered in
will now appear in your Dial-Up Networking folder. You can connect to the target MIM by double-clicking on the icon.
Repeat this procedure for each of the MIMs you expect to access through a MODEM. You can create additional icons for
MODEM connections later.
[12] When you are done creating dial-up icons, continue with
“Installing “SecureLink” Client Software” on Page 2–19
.
2-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows NT
Installing TCP/IP - Windows NT
[1] On the LAPTOP COMPUTER, select Start>Settings>Control Panel>Network and Dial-up Connections>Local Area
Connection.
[2] Click [Properties].
[3] Scroll to “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”.
[4] Is “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” checked?
No Yes
Continue with Step 5 . Advance to
“Installing Dial-Up Networking - Windows NT” on Page 2–17
[5] Click [Install].
[6] Select “Client”.
[7] Click [Add].
[8] Follow the instructions to install TCP/IP.
[9] Continue with the next procedure.
Installing Dial-Up Networking - Windows NT
[1] At the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Dial-Up Networking.
[2] Click [Install].
[3] Continue with the next procedure.
Installing “Dial-Up Networking cable between two PCs” and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT - for
Windows NT
[1] From the task bar: Start>Settings>Control Panel
[2] Open the “Modem” icon.
[3] Click [Add].
[4] Check “Don’t Detect my modem; I will select it from list”.
[5] Click [Next].
[6] From the list, select “Dial-Up Networking Cable between 2 PCs”.
[7] Click [Next].
[8] Select “Selected ports”.
[9] Select “COM1”.
[10] Click [Next].
[11] Click [Finish].
[12] Select “Dial-Up Networking Cable between 2 PCs”.
[13] Click [Properties].
[14] Set “Maximum Port Speed” to “115200”.
[15] Click [OK].
[16] Click [Close] to close the “Modems Properties” window.
[17] Continue with the next procedure.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-17
SERVICE MANUAL
Creating a “Dial-Up Networking” Icon for the SERIAL PORT - Windows NT
[1] On the desktop, open “My Computer” and then open “Dial-Up Networking”.
[2] Select [New].
The Network Connection Wizard starts.
[3] In the “New Phone Book Entry” window:
• Enter the name Connect to MIM Products or some other name you select.
• Select “Dial-Up Networking Serial Cable Between 2 PCs.”
[4] Click [Next].
[5] At the “Server” window, select “Send my plain text password if that’s the only way to connect.”
[6] Click [Next].
[7] At the “Phone Number” window, click [Next].
[8] Click [Finish].
Your entry now appears in the “Networking and Dial-Up Connections” window with the name you entered.
[9] Close the “Networking and Dial-up Connections” window.
[10] Make a desktop shortcut for connection you just created.
(a) Right-click the MOUSE on the icon you just created.
(b) Click [Create Shortcut].
(c) Click [Yes] to place the shortcut on the desktop.
[11] Continue with the next procedure.
Creating “Dial-Up Networking” Entries for MODEM Connections - Windows NT
You should create a dial-up networking entry for each of the MIMs that you expect to access with a dial-up telephone connection.
The following procedure sets up one dial-up modem connection.
[1] On the desktop, open “My Computer” and then open “Dial-Up Networking.”
[2] Select [New].
The Network Connection Wizard starts.
[3] In the “New Phone Book Entry” window:
• Enter a name for this connection.
• Select the MODEM that is installed in your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[4] Click [Next].
[5] At the “Server” window, select “Send my plain text password if that’s the only way to connect.”
[6] Click [Next].
[7] At the “Phone Number” window, enter the telephone number for the target MIM and click [Next].
[8] Click [Finish].
Your entry now appears in a pull-down list of dial-up connection entries.
[9] Close the “Networking and Dial-up Connections” window.
Repeat this procedure for each of the MIMs you expect to access through a MODEM. You can create additional entries for
MODEM connections later.
When you are done creating dial-up entries, continue with
“Installing “SecureLink” Client Software” on Page 2–19 .
2-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Installing “SecureLink” Client Software
For information about installing the SecureLink software, see the SecureLink documentation on the Service Apps CD.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-19
SERVICE MANUAL
Installing the MIM Service Application on your LAPTOP COMPUTER
[1] Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[2] Insert the CD-ROM for the “MIM Service Application” software into the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
Note
The name and level of the Service Application and the Software License Agreement will display.
[3] Read the Licensing Agreement and click [Yes]. The software will begin loading.
[4] When the icon displays, click:
• [File]
• [Close]
[5] When the “Setup Complete” screen displays, click [Finish]. The new MIM Service Application version will now display on the Start>Programs list of the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[6] Advance to “Installing pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE” on Page 2–21 .
2-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Installing pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE
pcAnywhere software and installation instructions are provided on CD-ROM.
[1] Insert the CD into your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[2] Follow the installation instructions included in the package.
When installed, pcAnywhere will appear in the Windows programs list as “Symantec pcAnywhere.”
[3] Continue with the next procedure.
Creating a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere
A pcAnywhere remote connection item is a file of the information needed to make a pcAnywhere connection from your LAPTOP
COMPUTER to a target MIM. The remote connection item appears as an icon in the pcAnywhere Manager window on your
LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[1] From the task bar: Select Start>Programs>Symantec pcAnywhere
[2] Click “Add Remote.”
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-21
SERVICE MANUAL
[3] On the “Connect Info” select “TCP\IP.”
[4] On the “Settings” tab, enter:
• IP Address: 127.0.0.1
• Login name: PLMIMService
• Password: NetServer
[5] Click [OK]
New remote connection item
[6] Change the name of the new remote connection item to “Connect MIM 6.1.”
[7] Close the pcAnywhere Manager window.
This completes Installation and setup of software on your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
2-22 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Connecting Your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM
There are several methods of connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM.
Connection Methods
Method
Connecting to MIM using a SERIAL CABLE - for LAPTOP
COMPUTERS with Windows 98.
Connecting to MIM using a SERIAL CABLE - for LAPTOP
COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 or Windows NT.
Connecting to a MIM using a MODEM connection
Connecting to a MIM with a network connection
Connecting to a MIM with a NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE
VPN (Virtual Private Network) Internet connection
Page number
Note
Before you can connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM by any of the above methods, you must complete the LAPTOP
COMPUTER setup tasks listed on
.
Important
For all of these connection methods, you must know the IP Address of the MIM you wish to access.
The IP Address of the MIM is recorded in:
• A pouch on the side of the MIM.
• The “View Service Information” screen of the KEYPAD. Select Service Menu>Configuration Menu> Network
Setup>IP Address.
• For V_6.0 and above, the IP Address for a newly ghosted MIM 100, MIM 200 or PS 25 is 123.123.123.10
• The default RAS Pool IP Address is 123.123.123.200
Starting and Using “SecureLink”
As a part of each of the MIM connection methods, you must use “SecureLink” to authenticate the connection. The general procedure for connecting to a MIM from your LAPTOP COMPUTER with “SecureLink” is:
[2] Start the “SecureLink” client application: Start>Programs>Kodak>SecureLink.
[3] Enter your “SecureLink” Password.
Note
You created this password when you requested your “SecureLink” digital certificate.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-23
SERVICE MANUAL
IP Address of the target MIM
Must be 443
Before you connect
[4] Enter the IP Address of the target MIM.
Connector Symbol - Red
Important
If the Ethernet cable at the MIM is disconnected or if an IP Address conflict exists, Windows 2000 disables the Ethernet port on the MIM. “SecureLink” will then only connect using a serial cable and the RAS Pool IP Address.
[5] Verify that the Port value is 443.
Note
It is not necessary to enter a name in the Server field.
[6] Click [Connect].
If the connection is successful:
• The 2 parts of the connector symbol close and the color changes to green.
• The [Connect] button changes to [Disconnect].
2-24 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
local
199 122
Connector Symbol - Green
After you connect
This completes the “SecureLink” authentication procedure. You can now use the MIM Service Application or pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER to access the target MIM.
For more detailed connection instructions, refer to the following procedures.
Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a SERIAL CABLE - for LAPTOP
COMPUTERS with Windows 98
You can use this procedure:
• To access the MIM that you physically connected with the serial cable.
• To establish a pass-through connection to any other MIM on the same local area network as the first MIM.
Note
your LAPTOP COMPUTER. Normally, you will set up these items during MIM training.
[1] De-energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM.
[2] Is there an external MODEM connected to this MIM?
Yes
Continue with Step 3 Advance to
No
[3] De-energize the MODEM.
[4] Disconnect the MODEM cable from the MIM SERIAL PORT.
[5] Connect the SERIAL CABLE (TL-5224) between the SERIAL PORT of the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the
COM 1 (Service) PORT of the MIM.
[6] Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM.
[7] Log on to your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[8] From the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Direct Cable Connection.
[9] Set “Connection” to “Guest.”
[10] Select “Connect.”
[11] When a connection is made, cancel the window that prompts you to share files.
A pop-up window will show that the connection is established.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-25
SERVICE MANUAL
[12] Authenticate the connection with “SecureLink.”
(a) From the task bar: Start >Programs>Kodak>SecureLink.
(b) Enter your “SecureLink” Password.
(c) Enter the IP Address of the target MIM:
• To access the MIM connected by the serial cable, enter the RAS address or IP Address of this MIM.
• For a pass-through connection to another MIM on the same local area network, enter the IP address of the target
MIM.
(d) Make sure the Port value is 443
(e) Click [Connect].
The connection is complete when the “SecureLink” connection symbol closes and changes from red to green.
You can then use the MIM Service Application:
• Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM.
• Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM.
2-26 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a SERIAL CABLE - for LAPTOP
COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 or Windows NT
This procedure enables a Remote Access Service (RAS) connection to a MIM over a serial line. This is the normal mode of connection to the MIM.
You can use this procedure:
• To access the MIM that you physically connected with the serial cable.
• To establish a pass-through connection to any other MIM on the same local area network as the first MIM.
Note
your LAPTOP COMPUTER. Normally, you will set up these items during MIM training.
[1] De-energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM.
[2] Is there an external MODEM connected to this MIM?
Yes
No
[3] De-energize the MODEM.
[4] Disconnect the MODEM cable from the MIM SERIAL PORT.
[5] Connect the SERIAL CABLE (TL-5224) between the SERIAL PORT of the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the
COM 1 (Service) PORT of the MIM.
[6] Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM.
[7] Log on to your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[8] From the desktop on the LAPTOP COMPUTER, click the shortcut to “Connect to MIM Products.”
Note
This shortcut was created when you LAPTOP COMPUTER was set up for a direct serial port connection.
[9] At the “Connect to” window, type Service for the user name.
[10] Click [Accept] in the “Network Protocol Connection Result” screen.
[11] Type Service for the password.
[12] Click [Connect]. The LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the “Connection Complete” screen.
[13] Authenticate the connection with “SecureLink.”
(a) From the task bar: Start >Programs>Kodak>SecureLink.
(b) Enter your “SecureLink” Password.
(c) Enter the IP Address of the target MIM:
• To access the MIM connected by the serial cable, enter the RAS Address or IP Address of this MIM.
• For a pass-through connection to another MIM on the same local area network, enter the IP Address of the target
MIM.
(d) Make sure the Port value is 443
(e) Click [Connect].
The connection is complete when the “SecureLink” connection symbol closes and changes from red to green.
You can then use the MIM Service Application:
• Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM.
• Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-27
SERVICE MANUAL
Connecting to a MIM through a MODEM Connection
Use this method to connect to a MIM over the dial-up telephone network. You will need access to a wall jack for an analog telephone line. The MIM that you call must have an optional MODEM installed.
You can use this procedure:
• To access the MIM that has a MODEM.
• To establish a pass-through connection to any other MIM on the same local area network as the MIM with the MODEM.
Note
COMPUTER. Normally, you will set up these items during MIM training.
Important
If the target MIM has an EXTERNAL MODEM, the POWER SWITCH on the MIM must have been cycled OFF and then ON after the MODEM was INSTALLED. If this has not been done, the MIM will not respond to a call from your LAPTOP
COMPUTER through the MODEM.
[1] De-energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[2] Connect a telephone cable from the MODEM PORT on your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a telephone wall jack.
[3] Energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[4] At the taskbar, select:
• For Windows 98: Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Dial-Up Networking.
• For Windows 2000 and Windows NT: Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Networking and Dial-up
Connections
[5] In the networking folder, double-click the icon for the MIM that you want to access.
Note
To use this procedure you must have previously set up a connection icon in your networking folder for the MIM you wish to access through a MODEM.
[6] At the “Connect to” window, type PLMIMService for the user name.
[7] Type NetServer for the password.
[8] Click [Connect]. The LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the “Connected to MIM” message.
[9] Authenticate the connection with “SecureLink.”
(a) From the task bar select: Start >Programs>Kodak>SecureLink.
(b) Enter your “SecureLink” Password.
(c) Enter the IP Address of the target MIM
• To access the MIM with the MODEM, enter the IP Address of this MIM.
• For a pass-through connection to another MIM on the same local area network, enter the IP Address of the target
MIM.
(d) Make sure the Port value is 443
(e) Click [Connect].
If the connection is successful, the connector symbol in the display closes and turns green. You can then:
• Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM.
• Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM.
2-28 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Connecting to a MIM with a Network Connection
Use this method to connect to a MIM over the customer’s Ethernet network. You will need access to a RJ-45 jack on the network.
[1] Assign an IP Address to your LAPTOP COMPUTER that is on the same subnet as the MIM you want to access.
[2] De-energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[3] Connect a NETWORK CABLE from the NETWORK PORT on the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the customer network.
[4] Energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[5] Authenticate the connection with “SecureLink.”
(a) From the task bar: Start >Programs>Kodak>SecureLink.
(b) Enter your “SecureLink” Password.
(c) Enter the IP Address of the target MIM.
(d) Make sure the Port value is 443
Note
It is not necessary to enter a name in the Server field.
(e) Click [Connect].
If the connection is successful, the connector symbol in the display closes and turns green. You can then:
• Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM.
• Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-29
SERVICE MANUAL
Connecting to a MIM with a NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE
Use this method to connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE.
[1] Assign an IP Address to your LAPTOP COMPUTER that is on the same subnet as the MIM you want to access.
[2] De-energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[3] Connect a NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE from the NETWORK PORT on your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the
NETWORK PORT on the MIM.
[4] Energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[5] Authenticate the connection with “SecureLink”.
(a) From the task bar: Start >Programs>Kodak>SecureLink.
(b) Enter your “SecureLink” Password.
(c) Enter the IP Address of the target MIM.
(d) Make sure the Port value is 443
Note
It is not necessary to enter a name in the Server field.
(e) Click [Connect].
If the connection is successful, the connector symbol in the display closes and turns green. You can then:
• Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM.
• Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM.
Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM with a VPN Connection
VPN is a secure method of accessing some MIM sites over the Internet.
If you require remote access to a site through the Kodak VPN, contact the Technical Support Center (TSC).
2-30 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Using the MIM Service Application
Service Application Functions
The “MIM Service Application” is the primary tool for installation and troubleshooting. It provides 5 main functions, which can be selected by tabs on the main screen. See the following table.
Table 2–3 “MIM Service Application” Main Functions
Function
Connect
Selections
Connect to MIM
Configure
Logs
Admin
Network Broadcasting
Disconnect
Exit
Service Tracking Information
Network
Input
Destination
HIS/RIS Gateway
Disk Management
Save Configuration
Restore Configuration
Network Profiles
SCP Services
Text Box Relocation
Logging Levels
Activity History
Error History
Error Frequency
Clear Error Frequency
Diagnostics System
Digital
Video
Delivery
Network
Change Password
Update Software
Clear Job Queues
Software Licenses
Shutdown MIM
View MODALITY Database
View Destination Database
Printing Statistics Database
Use To:
Links the MIM Service Application to the MIM to which your
LAPTOP COMPUTER is connected.
Used to enable/disable broadcast of MIM connection info. on the network. Connect/Local will not work if disabled.
Disconnect LAPTOP COMPUTER from MIM.
Exit from Service Application.
Check and, if necessary, correct service ID data for the MIM.
Set up the MIM to be a device on the network.
Set up inputs to MIM: network, digital or video.
Set up the PRINTER, storage device, or network destination.
Set up the storage WORKSTATION parameters.
Set high water mark (normally 75%) and low water mark (50%) for
MIM memory. At 75% full, MIM begins to delete oldest image files.
At 50% full MIM stops deleting. Do not change these values without consulting TSC.
Save the current MIM configuration to FLOPPY.
Restore the MIM to the last saved configuration.
Set up the network addresses for a “mobile” 25 PS.
Display connected SCUs, optimize image parameters.
Allows patient and exam information to be cut and placed back in a cropped image.
Select level of detail in logs.
Display log of MIM activity between specified dates/times.
Display log of all errors between specified dates/times.
Display list of all errors indicating numbers of each.
Clear the Error Frequency Log.
Print a test image or transfer the last stored image.
Test DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD.
Test VIDEO 150, 150LC or 60 INTERFACE BOARD.
Test OUTPUT BOARD: FOPCIL or COPCIL.
Test connection to an address on network using Ping or Echo.
Change password for entering “MIM Service Application.”
Update MIM software/firmware.
All print queues and studies will be removed from the MIM.
Display list of licensed and unlicensed destinations.
Shut down the MIM.
Display list of all qualified MODALITIES.
Display list of all qualified PRINTERS and storage devices.
Display print count per DICOM or direct MODALITY input.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-31
SERVICE MANUAL
Starting the “MIM Service Application”
Important
•
Only 1 user can connect to a MIM at a time.
Important
The beginning and end IP Address for the RAS must be set up for passthrough access.
• For a PRINT SERVER see “Setting up the Network Address of the PRINT SERVER” in Section 6.
• For a Modality Server see “Setting up the MODALITY SERVER for the NETWORK” in Section 7.
[2] At the Windows TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>MIM Service.
[3] Open the correct version of the “MIM Service Application.”
Note
If the application software for the MIM is V_6.1, the “MIM Service Application” will also be V_6.1.
[4] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Connect>Connect to MIM.
The “MIM Service Application” is now ready for use.
Quitting the Service Application
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Connect>Disconnect.
[2] Select Connect>Exit to quit the “MIM Service Application.”
Your LAPTOP COMPUTER remains connected to the MIM.
2-32 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Using pcAnywhere
The pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE allows your LAPTOP COMPUTER to take control of a connected MIM.
When pcAnywhere is connected to a target MIM, the Windows 2000 DESKTOP of the MIM displays on the LAPTOP
COMPUTER screen. You can then use the keyboard and mouse of the LAPTOP COMPUTER to control the MIM.
pcAnywhere allows direct access to the Windows 2000 DESKTOP and the files on the MIM, including the logs. pcAnywhere can be used to diagnose MIM database or hardware/Windows 2000 problems that the “MIM Service Application” cannot diagnose.
The “MIM Service Application” can also be used through pcAnywhere.
The pcAnywhere software must be installed on both the MIM and the LAPTOP COMPUTER. In the MIM, pcAnywhere is defaulted to “Host,” which means that the MIM is ready to take a call from the LAPTOP COMPUTER at any time. pcAnywhere is installed in all MIMs at the factory. You must install pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER as described on
To use pcAnywhere, first connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the target MIM using “SecureLink” and any of the connection methods described on
Page 2–23 . Then you can start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and make a pcAnywhere
connection to the target MIM.
Starting pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER
To use this procedure you must have created a pcAnywhere remote connection item on your LAPTOP COMPUTER. See
“Creating a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere” on Page 2–21 .
[1] Connect to the target MIM. Use any of the methods listed in
“Connection Methods” on Page 2–23
.
After you connect the “SecureLink” window will remain open on your desktop.
[2] From the TASKBAR: select Start->Programs->Symantec pcAnywhere. local
199 122
Remote connection item
SecureLink Window
[3] Click “Remotes.”
[4] Double-click “Connect MIM 6.1.”
Note
“Connect MIM” is the pcAnywhere remote connection item you created previously. See
See “Creating a Remote Connection
Item for pcAnywhere” on Page 2–21.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-33
SERVICE MANUAL
Note
Do not press Ctrl-Alt-Del on your keyboard.
Ctrl-Alt-Del Icon
[5] Click the Ctrl-Alt-Del icon.
[6] Type RNIServiceManager for the user name.
[7] Type NetServer for the password.
[8] Click [OK].
2-34 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Session ID
[9] Enter the “Session ID” from the “SecureLink Client” window.
Note
The “Session ID” is always displayed as 6 upper-case letters on the “SecureLink” screen.
[10] Click [OK].
The Windows 2000 DESKTOP of the target MIM displays in the pcAnywhere window.
Virtual KEYPAD
MIM Desktop
All KEYPADS connected to the MIM will be displayed as virtual KEYPADS on the MIM desktop. Icons on the lower
TASKBAR indicate the application software that is running: “MIMRoute,” “Remote Network Interface,” etc.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-35
SERVICE MANUAL
You can now use the KEYBOARD and MOUSE on your LAPTOP COMPUTER to control the MIM.
From your LAPTOP COMPUTER you can:
• View the MIM VIRTUAL KEYPADS on the MIM desktop.
• Examine the MIM logs.
• Run on the MIM any of the diagnostic tools that are part of Windows 2000.
• Use Windows EXPLORER on the MIM to locate files on the MIM.
• Run the MIM Service Application on the MIM.
Buttons and Hot Keys for pcAnywhere
1 2 3 4 5
Button
1. Full Screen
2. Scaling
3. File Transfer
4. C-A-D
5. Disconnect
2-36
Function
Not applicable for MIM functions. If you enter “full screen” mode, you can exit by pressing [Alt]
[Enter]
Allows the server’s TASKBAR to display, but may result in poor resolution.
Used to transfer MIM files to the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
Starts the Ctrl-Alt-Delete function at the MIM. Also must be selected before the pcAnywhere session is ended.
Used to disconnect and end a pcAnywhere remote control session.
NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
Important
• If the pcAnywhere screen is not set up correctly because of any of the following problems, you might have to disconnect and recall the “Host” Server:
– The pcAnywhere upper TASKBAR does not appear.
– The screen display appears to be out of sync.
– The desktop icons do not appear.
• For best results, check that the screen resolution for both the “Host” Server and Remote Server match.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-37
SERVICE MANUAL
Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM
A MONITOR KIT, Part No. 96-000-5311-4, is necessary for setting up the BIOS in a MIM. The MONITOR KIT can also be used to connect with the “MIM Service Application” stored in the MIM to do service functions.
Before you can log on to the MIM with the MONITOR KIT, you must establish a “SecureLink” connection to the MIM from your LAPTOP COMPUTER. This is a security measure to prevent unauthorized access to the MIM using the MONITOR KIT.
MIM 200 - 667 MHz
MIM 200 - 1 GHz
MIM 200 1.2 GHz
1 2 3 4 5 6
MOUSE
KEYPAD
1
2
MONITOR
MOUSE
KEYPAD
MONITOR
6
7
4
5
2
3
Slot
1
KEYPAD MOUSE
ADAPTER/
MONITOR
MIM 100 1.2 GHz
PACS LINK 25
MOUSE
KEYPAD
MONITOR
MONITOR
Y - CABLE to
MOUSE and KEYPAD
MIM 100 433 MHz
BACK
PANEL
Y - CABLE to MOUSE and KEYPAD
H180_3024ECA
H180_3024EC
MONITOR
TOP VIEW (COVER REMOVED)
2-38 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Tools - Hardware and Software
[1] Connect the MONITOR KIT to the MIM:
(a) Remove the COVER on the MIM, if necessary.
(b) Connect the CABLES from the MONITOR, KEYBOARD, and MOUSE to the MIM.
Note
To connect the CABLE of the MONITOR to the MIM 200, 667 MHz, use ADAPTER PLUG (3H9543). To connect the
KEYBOARD and MOUSE to the 25 PS and MIM 100, use Y CABLE (TL5371). The 25 PS and MIM 100 have a single
CONNECTOR for KEYBOARD and MOUSE.
[2] Energize the MIM and the MONITOR.
[3] Connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM using SecureLink.
Note
[4] At the MONITOR KIT KEYBOARD, press Ctrl-Alt-Del.
[5] Enter:
• Username: RNIServiceManager
• Password: NetServer
[6] Click [OK].
8E8820 – NOV 2003
MONITOR local
199 122
LAPTOP COMPUTER
2-39
SERVICE MANUAL
[7] Enter the “Session ID” from the “SecureLink Client” screen on your LAPTOP COMPUTER.
Note
The “Session ID” is always displayed as 6 upper-case letters on the “SecureLink” screen.
[8] Click [OK].
The MIM Windows DESKTOP will display on the monitor.
[9] Using the MONITOR KIT you now can:
(a) Start the MIM Service Application on the MIM.
(b) Open Windows EXPLORER to examine logs.
(c) Use Windows DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS.
[10] To start the “MIM Service Application:”
(a) On the MIM desktop, Double-click the Shortcut named mimdui
(b) At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Connect>Connect to MIM.
2-40 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Section 3: Installing the Hardware
Introduction
This section provides instructions for installing and setting up the following MIMs:
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)
• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)
The instructions include information for connecting MIM PRINT SERVERS to the following LASER IMAGERS:
• Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER
• Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER
• Kodak Ektascan 160 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8300 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / PLUS
• Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / STANDARD
• Kodak DryView 8600 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8610 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / PLUS
• Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / STANDARD
• Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER
• Kodak DryView 969 HQ LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 969 HQT LASER IMAGER
Installation of the hardware includes:
Unpacking
Installing a 25 PS
Connecting System CABLES
Terminating Video Inputs
Connecting a Telephone Line to an INTERNAL MODEM
Installing an EXTERNAL MODEM
Installing a FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT (FOPCIL) BOARD
Installing a COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL) BOARD
Network Isolation for the MIM 200 - European
MIM 200 System Setup Per IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 Requirements
Connecting the KEYPAD Directly to the MODALITY
Preparing for Application of Power
Energizing the MIM
De-energizing the MIM
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-1
SERVICE MANUAL
Important
The site must be prepared for installation of the MIM as described in the SITE SPECIFICATIONS for the MIM. Before installation of the MIM, the customer must provide IP and RAS Addresses for all equipment to be installed. Also, before the
MIM can be installed, the customer must install:
• All NETWORK CABLES
• All FIBER OPTIC CABLES
• All 42 m (138 ft.) and 45 m (148 ft.) CABLES
• Space on wall for installation of MIM, if necessary. This is optional for MIM 100 and PS 25.
• Analog telephone line for a MODEM
Unpacking System Components
[1] Check with the customer where to install the MIM and move the equipment to this area.
[2] Check the CARTON for damage.
Caution
The SHOCK DETECTOR on the carton for the MIM changes from clear to red if damage occurs during shipment.
[3] Check that:
• The SHOCK DETECTOR is clear.
• The PRODUCT LABEL on the CARTON indicates that the EQUIPMENT is correct for the site.
[4] Unpack the CARTON holding the MIM.
[5] Unpack the other CARTONS and check the contents. They should include:
• A LASER IMAGER, if the MIM will be used as a PRINT SERVER. See the LASER IMAGER SERVICE MANUAL for installation instructions.
• An UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS). See the installation instructions sent with the UPS.
(A UPS is optional with the MIM 100.)
See “Installing the 25 PS on an 8100 or 8200 LASER IMAGER.” for special
instructions for the 25 PS.
• CABLES for connecting the MIM to the MODALITY, KEYPAD, HOST CONTROLLER (if used), network and/or
PRINTER.
• CD-ROMS with the current version of the MIM Application Software.
• User Guides
3-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Installing the 25 PS
The 25 Print Server is the print server for new orders as it can be used in a hospital, clinic, or mobile unit and has a number of mounting options.
Note
When installing connect the following components:
UPS to the POWER STRIP
25 Print Server to the UPS
UPS COMMUNICATIONS CABLE to COM 2 on the 25 Print Server
In this configuration, the power switch on the power strip will be used to safely power up and down the 25 Print Server.
Important
If the 25 Print Server is installed without using the power strip or the UPS communications cable, it is necessary to exit the system software using the Display Keypad, before the 25 Print Server can be safely powered down.
Installing the 25 PS on an 8100 or 8200 LASER IMAGER
If the 25 PS will be used with an 8100 or 8200 LASER IMAGER, it should be installed on the back of the LASER IMAGER. If
Instructions for installing an 8100 LASER IMAGER in a MOBILE VAN are included in the MOBILE STRAP KIT
96-0000-4045-9. This KIT is used to fasten the LASER IMAGER to the wall of the MOBILE VAN. Before attaching the LASER
IMAGER, install the 25 PS on the BACK PANEL of the LASER IMAGER and install the UPS on the floor of the VAN as instructed in this procedure.
Figure 3–1 Installing a 25 PS on an 8100 LASER IMAGER
SCREW
Holes
25 PS
[1] Install the 25 PS on the 8100 LASER IMAGER using 5 mm SCREWS. The CONNECTORS of the 25 PS must be adjacent to the CONNECTORS of the LASER IMAGER.
Note
Installation on the 8200 LASER IMAGER is similar, except the 25 PS is installed below the FILTER on the BACK PANEL.
[2] Tighten the SCREWS.
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-3
SERVICE MANUAL
Installing the 25 PS on a Wall
Installation of the 25 PS on a wall is an option for any site. ANCHOR FASTENERS and SCREWS (4 each) for installation on
DRYWALL are included with the 25 PS. If the 25 PS will be installed on another type of wall, the customer must supply
FASTENERS.
Figure 3–2 Installing the 25 PS on a Wall
64.6 cm
(25.4 in.)
5 cm
(2 in.)
203.2 cm
(80 in.)
COMM
CABLE to UPS
15.2 cm
(6 in.)
15.2 cm
(6 in.)
1.63 m
(64 in.)
POWER
CORD to UPS
39.3 cm
(15.5 in.)
5 cm
(2 in.)
H180_0075HCA
H180_0075HC
[1] Drill pilot holes and install ANCHOR FASTENERS in the wall as shown in the figure.
[2] Fasten the 25 PS to the wall with No.5 SCREWS (4).
3-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the 25 PS on a Shelf
Depth
Height
Width
H180_0106ACA
H180_0106AC
Important
The side brackets should be removed to expose 4 rubber feet.
2 Side Brackets
Installing the Hardware
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-5
SERVICE MANUAL
Installing the UPS for the 25 PS
For installation in a MOBILE VAN, the UPS must be fastened to the floor of the VAN with the MOUNTING KIT sent with the
25 PS.
Use the instructions included with the UPS and this procedure. If the 25 PS will be installed in a MOBILE VAN, the UPS must be fastened to the floor of the VAN between the LASER IMAGER and the front wall of the VAN. A UPS HOLDDOWN KIT is available for this purpose.
Figure 3–3 Installing the UPS for the 25 PS on a Mobile Van Floor
Strap Ay end must be oriented as shown
3.8 cm
(1.5 in.)
Van Wall
15.2 cm
(6 in.)
UPS
LASER
IMAGER
16.5 cm
(6.5 in.)
1/4 inch
Lag Screw
Location (4)
Midpoint of
LASER IMAGER
H180_0071BCA
H180_0071BC
[1] Remove the 2 STRAP ASSEMBLIES from the UPS HOLDDOWN KIT.
[2] Mark positions for 4 holes to be drilled on the floor of the VAN. The front 2 holes must be 3.8 cm
(1.5 in.) from the front wall.
[3] Drill pilot holes in the floor to a depth of 3.8 cm (1.5 in.). 4 LAG SCREWS (1/4 - 1.5 in.) will be used to attach the STRAP
ASSEMBLIES to the floor.
[4] Open the LATCH on each STRAP ASSEMBLY and remove slack from the adjustment STRAP.
[5] Place the STRAP ASSEMBLIES, with the metal ends pointing in the same direction, before installing them. See the figure.
[6] Fasten the metal ends of the STRAP ASSEMBLIES to the floor with the 4 LAG SCREWS. Use a large and a small FLAT
WASHER with each LAG SCREW.
[7] Place the UPS in the STRAPS. Tighten and lock the STRAPS.
To install CABLES between the MIM and other components of the system:
• For CABLES for MODALITY SERVERS, see
• For CABLES for PRINT SERVERS, see
• For diagrams relating to video termination, RS-232/RS-422 conversion and other CABLE conversion, see
.
• To locate COM PORTS on all MIMS, see
Table 3–1 CABLES for MODALITY SERVERS
MODALITY SERVER/KEYPAD See Figure:
MIM 200, 2.4 GHz
MIM 200, 1.2 GHz
MIM 200, 1 GHz
MIM 200, 667 MHz
MIM 100
TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD
3-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Table 3–2 CABLES for PRINT SERVERS
PRINT SERVER
MIM 200
25 PS
Connection Type
Ethernet
LASER IMAGER
8200 and 160 LASER IMAGERS
Fiber Optic (FOPCIL) 8500 and 8700 LASER IMAGERS/PLUS, 8800 MULTI-
INPUT MANAGER, 969 HQ LASER IMAGER
Fiber Optic (CPOI)
Copper (COPCIL)
2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS
8100, 8300, 8600, and 8610 LASER IMAGERS, 8500 and
8700 LASER IMAGERS/STANDARD
MIM 200 1.2 GHz Ethernet 8200 and 160 LASER IMAGERS
Fiber Optic (FOPCIL) 8500 and 8700 LASER IMAGERS/PLUS, 8800 MULTI-
INPUT MANAGER, 969 HQ LASER IMAGER
Fiber Optic (CPOI) 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS
Copper (COPCIL) 8100, 8300, 8600, and 8610 LASER IMAGERS, 8500 and
8700 LASER IMAGERS/STANDARD
8200 LASER IMAGER
Ethernet
Fiber Optic (FOPCIL) 8500 and 8700 LASER IMAGERS/PLUS
Copper (COPCIL) 8100 LASER IMAGER, 8500 and 8700 LASER IMAGERS/
STANDARD
See Figure:
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-7
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 3–3 Other CABLES
CABLE Diagram
MODALITY SERVERS: KEYPAD CABLES for Video Mode
MODALITY SERVERS: Autofilming CABLES for Video Mode
MODALITY SERVERS: KEYPAD CABLES for Digital Mode
MODALITY SERVERS: Autofilming CABLES for Digital Mode - RS422 Serial Control
MODALITY SERVERS: Autofilming CABLES for Digital Mode - RS232 Converted to RS422 Serial
Control
Siemens Imaging Device: FIBER OPTIC CABLE with Hirschmann CONNECTORS
Siemens Imaging Device: FIBER OPTIC CABLE with Pritzel CONNECTORS
Terminating the Video Input for a MIM 200 with VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD
Video Imaging Device with 1 Video Output to the MONITOR (Non-terminating Passthrough)
See Figure:
Table 3–4 Functions of COM PORTS for MIMs
PORT Function
1
2
COM
Service
RS232
MIM 200
BACK PANEL
BACK PANEL
(Not Used)
MIM 200-1.2 GHz
BACK PANEL
BACK PANEL
(Not Used)
MIM 100
MIM 100-1.2 GHz
BACK PANEL BACK PANEL
BACK PANEL BACK PANEL
(Not Used)
25 PS
BACK PANEL
BACK PANEL
(UPS Comm.)
5
6
3
4
MODEM Slot 2
Autofilm SERIAL CABLE
N/A
N/A
KEYPAD SERIAL CABLE N/A
Autofilm SERIAL CABLE N/A
BACK PANEL N/A
BACK PANEL N/A
BACK PANEL N/A
Not Used N/A
7
8
9
10
11
KEYPAD SERIAL CABLE N/A Not Used
Autofilm 2 SERIAL CABLE SERIAL CABLE Not Used
KEYPAD 2 SERIAL CABLE SERIAL CABLE Not Used
Autofilm 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Not Used
KEYPAD 1 Slot 1
* For 25 PS, the MODEM PORT is COM 4.
Slot 1 Not Used
* Not used
* MODEM BD.
BACK PANEL
Not Used
N/A Not Used
SERIAL CABLE Not Used
SERIAL CABLE Not Used
Slot 2 Not Used
Slot 2 Not Used
3-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Figure 3–4 MIM 200, 667 MHz - MODALITY SERVER CABLES
AUTO- FILMING
CABLE
(See Note below.)
J8 Sync Out
J7 Blue Out
J6 Green Out
J5 Red Out
J4 Sync In
J3 Blue In
J2 Green In
J1 Red In
TOUCHSCREEN or
PRINT KEYPAD
Com 8
Com 9
Com 7
Com 6
Com 5
Com 4
COLOR VIDEO
CABLE
(8 m or 20 m)
COM PORT
ADAPTER CABLE
SWITCH
115/230 V
COLOR
VIDEO
INTERFACE
J8 Csync Out
J7 Csync In
J6 Video3 Out
J5 Video3 In
75 ohm
COAX
CABLE
(10 m or 45 m)
J4 Video2 Out
J3 Video2 In
J2 Video1 Out
J1 Video1 In
VIDEO
ADAPTER
CABLE
VIDEO
INTERFACE
RS - 485 DATA
CABLE (10 m or
45 m)
RS - 485
ADAPTER
CABLE
(1 m)
H180_0058ECA
H180_0058EC
DIGITAL
ADAPTER
CABLE
To UPS
1 2 3 4 5 6
CUSTOMER
NETWORK
COM 1
SERVICE and EXT.
MODEM
COM 2
(not used)
SLOT
3
4
5
6
1
2
BOARD
Ethernet
10/100 BASE T
INTERNAL MODEM
SERIAL INTERFACE
VIDEO INTERFACE (as needed)
DIGITAL INTERFACE (as needed)
BLANK
TELCO
(RJ-11)
PHONE
(optional)
SERVICE
Note
For information on Autofilming CABLES:
• See
for connections to a VIDEO MODALITY.
for connections to a DIGITAL MODALITY.
Note
For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see
“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-9
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–5 MIM 200, 1 GHz - MODALITY SERVER CABLES
TO DIGITAL MODALITY
TO VIDEO MODALITY
RS - 485 DATA
CABLE (10 m or
45 m)
75 ohm
COAX CABLE
(10 m or 45 m)
RS - 485
ADAPTER
CABLE
(1 m)
DIGITAL
ADAPTER
CABLE
VIDEO
INTERFACE
VIDEO
ADAPTER
CABLE
COLOR
VIDEO
INTERFACE
COLOR
VIDEO
CABLE
(8 m or 20 M)
TOUCHSCREEN or
PRINT KEYPAD
AUTOFILMING
To UPS
CABLE (See
Note below.)
COM 1
SERVICE and EXT.
MODEM
1
TELCO (RJ11)
PHONE (optional)
2
Ethernet
CABLE
COM 2
(not used)
COM PORT
ADAPTER
CABLE
CUSTOMER
NETWORK
5
6
3
4
Slot
1
2
H180_0057ECA
H180_0057EC-b
Note
For information on Autofilming CABLES:
• See
Figure 3–23 for connections to a VIDEO MODALITY.
for connections to a DIGITAL MODALITY.
SLOT
4
5
6
1
2
3
BOARD
VIDEO ADAPTER
INTERNAL MODEM
SERIAL INTERFACE
INPUT 1: DIGITAL or VIDEO
INPUT 2: DIGITAL or VIDEO
BLANK
Note
For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see
“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on
3-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Figure 3–6 MIM 200, 1.2 GHz MODALITY SERVER CABLES
TO DIGITAL MODALITY
TO VIDEO MODALITY
RS - 485 DATA
CABLE (10 m or
45 m)
75 ohm
COAX CABLE
(10 m or 45 m)
RS - 485
ADAPTER
CABLE
(1 m)
DIGITAL
ADAPTER
CABLE
VIDEO
INTERFACE
VIDEO
ADAPTER
CABLE
COLOR
VIDEO
INTERFACE
COLOR
VIDEO
CABLE
(2 m)
AUTO FILMING
INPUT 2 TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD
INPUT 2
To UPS
CABLE PORT
ADAPTER CABLE
COM 1
COM 2
COM 11 - TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD
INPUT 1
SLOT
1
2
3
4
COM 10 - AUTO FILMING
INPUT 1
BOARD
BRACKET - 422
BOARD - 422
INPUT 1: VIDEO or DIGITAL iNPUT 2: VIDEO or DIGITAL
CUSTOMER
NETWORK
MIM 200 - 1.2 GHz
H180_3025ECA
H180_3025EC
Note
For information on Autofilming CABLES:
• See
for connections to a VIDEO MODALITY.
for connections to a DIGITAL MODALITY.
Note
For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see
“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-11
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–7 MIM 200, 2.4 GHz - MODALITY SERVER CABLES
TO DIGITAL MODALITY
RS - 485 DATA
CABLE (10 m or
45 m)
RS - 485
ADAPTER
CABLE
(1 m)
DIGITAL
ADAPTER
CABLE
VIDEO
INTERFACE
TO VIDEO MODALITY
75 ohm
COAX CABLE
(10 m or 45 m)
VIDEO
ADAPTER
CABLE
COLOR
VIDEO
INTERFACE
COLOR
VIDEO
CABLE
(8 m or 20 M)
AUTO FILMING
INPUT 2
TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD
INPUT 2
To UPS
COM 1
SERVICE and
EXT. MODEM
COM 2
(not used)
COM PORT
ADAPTER
CABLE
1
2
H180_0114ECA
H180_0114EC-b
Ethernet
CABLE
TELCO (RJ11)
PHONE (optional)
CUSTOMER
NETWORK
Slot
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM 10 - AUTO FILMING INPUT 1
COM 11
TOUCHSCREEN or
PRINT KEYPAD
INPUT 1
SLOT
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
BOARD
CABLE, COM 10, 11
INTERNAL MODEM or NETWORK ISOLATION
SERIAL INTERFACE
INPUT 1: DIGITAL or VIDEO
VGA PORT
INPUT 2: DIGITAL or VIDEO
BLANK
3-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Figure 3–8 MIM 100 - MODALITY SERVER CABLES
SLOT
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
TO DIGITAL MODALITY
To UPS
(optional)
RS-485
KEYPAD AUTO FILM or
IN OUT
VIDEO
C/H SYNC V SYNC
KEYPAD AUTO FILM
MODEM/
SERVICE COM 2
TO VIDEO MODALITY
UTP
MODEM
Label: Serial Number and Service Code
LP FIBER
CUSTOMER
NETWORK
ON/OFF
SWITCH
BOARD
3.3 VDC REGULATOR
SERIAL INTERFACE
BLANK
DIGITAL or VIDEO
BLANK
BLANK
VGA ADAPTER
ISOLATION/INTERNAL MODEM blue green
AUTOFILMING CABLE
MIM 100 NR (433 MHz)
with
MICRO INDUSTRIES CPU
TOUCHSCREEN or
PRINT KEYPAD
H180_0088DCA
H180_0088DC
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-13
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–9 MIM 100 1.2 GHz WITH 2 MODALITY CONNECTIONS
COM 10 AUTO FILMING
INPUT 1
COM 11
TOUCHSCREEN or
PRINT KEYPAD
COM 2
To UPS
CUSTOMER
NETWORK
COM 1
1
AUTO FILMING
INPUT 2
2 3 4
TOUCHSCREEN
OR PRINT KEYPAD
INPUT 2
SLOT
1
2
3
4
BOARD
ISOLATION
BOARD - 422
INPUT 1: VIDEO or DIGITAL
INPUT 2: VIDEO or DIGITAL
COM PORT
ADAPTER
CABLE
H180_3026DCA
H180_3026DC
3-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Figure 3–10 TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD - CABLES
FORMAT=
COPIES=
24
END
EXAM
1
MAIN
MENU
Cable
Barcode Reader
Mini-Keypad
Keyboard
Footswitch
Installing the Hardware
H180_0117HCA
H180_0117HC
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-15
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–11 MIM 200 - PRINT SERVER, Ethernet OUTPUT CABLE
CUSTOMER NETWORK
Ethernet CABLE
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
Com 9
POWER
SWITCH
To UPS
Slot
1 2 3 4 5 6
SLOT
3
4
5
6
1
2
BOARD
Ethernet 10/100 BASE T
INTERNAL MODEM
SERIAL INTERFACE
BLANK
BLANK
Ethernet
10/100 BASE T
Ethernet
CROSSOVER
CABLE - 3 m
8200 or 160
LASER IMAGER or 3600 DMI
(10 m available)
TELCO
(RJ11)
COM 1
SERVICE and EXT.
MODEM
COM 2
(not used)
MIM 200 - 667 MHz
PHONE
(optional)
CUSTOMER NETWORK
To UPS
Ethernet CABLE COM 1 SERVICE and EXT. MODEM
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
COM 2
(not used)
1
TELCO
(RJ11)
2
5
6
2
3
Slot
1
4
MIM 200 - 1 GHz
SLOT
1
2
3
4
5
6
BOARD
VIDEO ADAPTER
INTERNAL MODEM
SERIAL INTERFACE
INPUT 1: DIGITAL or VIDEO
INPUT 2: DIGITAL or VIDEO
Ethernet
10/100 BASE T
PHONE
(optional)
8200 or 160
LASER IMAGER
Ethernet
CROSSOVER
CABLE - 3 m (10 m available)
H180_0061ECA
H180_0061EC-b
Note
For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see
“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on
3-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Figure 3–12 MIM 200, 1.2 GHz - PRINT SERVER, Ethernet OUTPUT CABLE
Installing the Hardware
Ethernet
CABLE
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
COM 1
Com 8
Com 9
Com 7
Com 6
Com 5
Com 4
COM 2
CUSTOMER NETWORK
To UPS
MIM 200 - 1.2 GHz
COM 10 - AUTO FILMING
INPUT 1
COM 11 - TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD
INPUT 1
SLOT
1
2
3
4
BOARD
BRACKET - 422
BOARD - 422
EMPTY
Ethernet
10/100 BASE T
Ethernet
8200 or 160
LASER IMAGER or 3600 DMI
CROSSOVER
CABLE - 3 m (10 m available)
H180_3027HCA
H180_3027HC
Note
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-17
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–13 MIM 200 X205, 2.4 GHz - COMBO BOX, Dual Input, Ethernet OUTPUT CABLE
CUSTOMER NETWORK
To UPS
COM 1 SERVICE and EXT. MODEM
AUTO FILMING INPUT 1
Ethernet
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
H180_0108HCA
H180_0108HC-b
CABLE
COM 10
COM 11
TOUCH SCREEN or
PRINT KEYPAD INPUT 1
COM 2
(not used)
AUTO
FILMING
INPUT 2
1
SLOT
BOARD
2
TOUCH SCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD
INPUT 2
TELCO
(RJ11)
Slot
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
PHONE
(optional)
MIM 200 - X205, 2.4 GHz
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CABLE, COM 10, 11
INTERNAL MODEM or NETWORK ISOLATION
SERIAL INTERFACE
INPUT 1: DIGITAL or VIDEO
VGA PORT
INPUT 2 DIGITAL OR VIDEO
Ethernet 10/100 BASE T
Ethernet
8200 or 160
LASER IMAGER
CROSSOVER
CABLE - 3 m (10 m available)
Note
For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see
“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on
3-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Figure 3–14 MIM 200, X200, 1 GHz - PRINT SERVER, FIBER OPTIC (FOPCIL) OUTPUT CABLES
Ethernet CABLE
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
Com 9
POWER
CUSTOMER NETWORK
SWITCH
Slot
1
To UPS
2 3 4 5 6
SLOT
1
2
3
4
5
6
BOARD
Ethernet
10/100 BASE T
INTERNAL MODEM
SERIAL INTERFACE
BLANK
BLANK
FOPCIL
IMAGE
8500/8700
LASER IMAGER/
PLUS, 969 HQ
CONTROL
LASER IMAGER or 8800 MULTI-
FIBER
OPTIC
INPUT MANAGER
CABLES - 3 m (10, 30, 60 m available)
PHONE
(optional)
TELCO
(RJ11)
COM 1
SERVICE and EXT.
MODEM
COM 2
(not used)
CUSTOMER
NETWORK
Ethernet CABLE
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
MIM 200 - 667 MHz
To UPS
COM 1
SERVICE and
EXT. MODEM
COM 2
(not used)
TELCO
(RJ11)
PHONE
(optional)
SLOT BOARD
1
2
4
5
6
1
2
3
VIDEO ADAPTER
INTERNAL MODEM
SERIAL INTERFACE
BLANK
BLANK
FOPCIL
5
6
2
3
Slot
1
4
MIM 200 - 1 GHz
8500/8700
IMAGE
LASER IMAGER/
PLUS, 969 HQ
LASER IMAGER
CONTROL or 8800 MULTI-
FIBER
OPTIC
INPUT MANAGER
CABLES - 3 m (10, 30, 60 m available)
H180_0062ECA
H180_0062EC-b
Note
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-19
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–15 MIM 200, 1.2 GHz - PRINT SERVER, FIBER OPTIC (FOPCIL) OUTPUT CABLES
H180_3028DCA
H180_3028DC
Ethernet CABLE
CUSTOMER NETWORK
To UPS
MIM 200 - 1.2 GHz
COM 1
COM 2
COM 10
COM 11
SLOT
3
4
1
2
BOARD
BRACKET - 422
BOARD - 422
EMPTY
FOPCIL
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
IMAGE
CONTROL
8500/8700
LASER IMAGER/
PLUS, 969 HQ
LASER IMAGER or 8800 MULTI-
INPUT MANAGER
Note
For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see
“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on
3-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Figure 3–16 MIM 200 - PRINT SERVER, FIBER OPTIC (CPOI) OUTPUT CABLE
Ethernet
CABLE
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
POWER
SWITCH
CUSTOMER NETWORK
To UPS
SLOT
1
2
3
4
5
6
BOARD
Ethernet 10/100 BASE T
INTERNAL MODEM
SERIAL INTERFACE
BLANK
BLANK
OPTICAL INTERFACE
Com 9
Slot
1 2 3 4 5
6
2180 or 1120
LASER PRINTER
FIBER
OPTIC
CABLE - 8 m
TELCO
(RJ11)
CP0I OPTICAL
INTERFACE BOARD
COM 1
SERVICE and
EXT. MODEM
COM 2
(not used)
CUSTOMER
NETWORK
MIM 200 - 667 MHz
To UPS
PHONE
(optional)
COM 1
SERVICE and
EXT. MODEM
Ethernet CABLE
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
COM 2
(not used)
TELCO
(RJ11)
1
2
MIM 200 - 1 GHz
SLOT
3
4
1
2
5
6
5
6
3
4
Slot
1
2
PHONE
(optional)
FIBER
OPTIC
CABLE - 8 m
BOARD
VIDEO ADAPTER
INTERNAL MODEM
SERIAL INTERFACE
BLANK
BLANK
OPTICAL INTERFACE
2180 or 1120
LASER PRINTER
CP0I OPTICAL
INTERFACE BOARD
H180_0063ECA
H180_0063EC-b
Note
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-21
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–17 MIM 200 1.2 GHz - PRINT SERVER, FIBER OPTIC (CPOI) OUTPUT CABLE
Ethernet CABLE
To UPS
CUSTOMER NETWORK
COM 1
COM 2
H180_3029HCA
H180_3029HC
COM 10
COM11 - DISPLAY
KEYPAD
MIM 200 - 1.2 GHz
SLOT
1
2
3
4
FIBER
OPTIC
CABLE - 8 m
BOARD
BRACKET - 422
BOARD - 422
EMPTY
OPTICAL INTERFACE
2180 or 1120
LASER PRINTER
CP0I OPTICAL
INTERFACE BOARD
Note
For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see
“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on
3-22 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Figure 3–18 MIM 200 - PRINT SERVER, COPPER (COPCIL) OUTPUT CABLE
Ethernet CABLE
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
Com 9
POWER
SWITCH
CUSTOMER NETWORK
To UPS
Slot
1 2 3 4 5 6
SLOT
4
5
6
1
2
3
BOARD
Ethernet 10/100 BASE T
INTERNAL MODEM
SERIAL INTERFACE
NONE
NONE
COPCIL
*
3 m
COPPER
Y
CABLE
IMAGE PORT
8100, 8300, 8610
LASER IMAGER or
8500/8700 LASER
IMAGER/STANDARD
TELCO
(RJ11)
COM 1
SERVICE and
EXT. MODEM
COM 2
(not used)
CUSTOMER
NETWORK
MIM 200 - 667 MHz
COM PORT
PHONE
(optional)
*
Extensions of 10, 30 or
60 m COPPER CABLE are available.
To UPS
COM 1
SERVICE and
EXT. MODEM
Ethernet CABLE
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
COM 2
(not used)
TELCO
(RJ11)
PHONE
(optional)
1
2
SLOT
3
4
1
2
5
6
BOARD
VIDEO ADAPTER
INTERNAL MODEM
SERIAL INTERFACE
BLANK
BLANK
COPCIL
2
3
4
Slot
1
IMAGE PORT
*
3 m
COPPER
Y CABLE
5
6
MIM 200 - 1 GHz
COM PORT
*
Extensions of 10, 30 or
60 m COPPER CABLE are available.
8100, 8300, 8610
LASER IMAGER or
8500/8700 LASER
IMAGER/STANDARD
H180_0064ECA
H180_0064EC-b
Note
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-23
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–19 MIM 200 1.2 GHz - PRINT SERVER, COPPER (COPCIL) OUTPUT CABLE
Ethernet
CABLE
To UPS
CUSTOMER NETWORK
COM 10
COM 11
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
COM 1
COM 2
SLOT
3
4
1
2
BOARD
BRACKET - 422
BOARD - 422
EMPTY
COPCIL
H180_3030DCA
H180_3030DC
MIM 200 - 1.2 GHz
IMAGE PORT
*
3 m
COPPER
Y CABLE
8100, 8300, 8610
LASER IMAGER or
8500/8700 LASER
IMAGER/STANDARD
COM PORT
*
Extensions of 10, 30 or
60 m COPPER CABLE are available.
Note
For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see
“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on
3-24 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Figure 3–20 MIM 200 X205, 2.4 GHz - PRINT SERVER, COPPER (COPCIL) OUTPUT CABLE
To UPS
COM 1
SERVICE and
EXT. MODEM
CUSTOMER
NETWORK
COM 10
COM 11
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
Ethernet CABLE
SLOT BOARD
H180_0111HCA
H180_0111HC-b
COM 2
(not used)
1
2
Slot
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
*
3 m
COPPER
Y CABLE
CABLE COM 10, 11
INTERNAL MODEM or NETWORK ISOLATION
SERIAL INTERFACE
BLANK
VGA PORT
BLANK
COPCIL
IMAGE PORT
8100, 8300, 8600, 8610
LASER IMAGER or
8500/8700 LASER
IMAGER/STANDARD
MIM 200 - X205, 2.4 GHz
*
COM PORT
Extensions of 10, 30 or
60 m COPPER CABLE are available.
Note
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-25
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–21 CABLES for 25 PS
TO DIGITAL MODALITY
RS - 485 DATA
CABLE (10 m or
45 m)
RS - 485
ADAPTER
CABLE
(1 m)
DIGITAL
ADAPTER
CABLE
VIDEO
INTERFACE
TO VIDEO MODALITY
75 ohm
COAX CABLE
(10 m or 45 m)
VIDEO
ADAPTER
CABLE
COLOR
VIDEO
INTERFACE
COLOR
VIDEO
CABLE
(8 m or 20 M)
AUTO FILMING
INPUT 2
TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD
INPUT 2
To UPS
COM 1
SERVICE and
EXT. MODEM
COM 2
(not used)
COM PORT
ADAPTER
CABLE
1
2
COM 10 - AUTO FILMING INPUT 1
COM 11
TOUCHSCREEN or
PRINT KEYPAD
INPUT 1
Ethernet
CABLE
TELCO (RJ11)
PHONE (optional)
CUSTOMER
NETWORK
Slot
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
SLOT
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
BOARD
CABLE, COM 10, 11
INTERNAL MODEM or NETWORK ISOLATION
SERIAL INTERFACE
INPUT 1: DIGITAL or VIDEO
VGA PORT
INPUT 2: DIGITAL or VIDEO
BLANK
H180_0114ECA
H180_0114EC-b
Note
For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see
“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on
3-26 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Figure 3–22 MODALITY SERVERS: KEYPAD CABLES for Video Mode
Keypad Cable
B
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
W
Imaging
Device
B
Video Cable (75 ohm Coax)
Video Input Pkg.
Keypad
MIM 100 or MIM 200
H180_0007BCA
H180_0007BC
Video Adapter Cable for the MIM 200
Important
The CABLES in the figure are for each installed channel of a MIM 200.
Table 3–5 CABLES for Video Mode with KEYPAD
CABLE Description
VIDEO CABLE (75 ohm Coax)
VIDEO ADAPTER CABLE for the
MIM 200
RGB VIDEO CABLE. Used in place of
VIDEO CABLE and VIDEO
ADAPTER CABLE in RGB installations. Not shown in figure.
KEYPAD CABLE
KEYPAD Extension CABLE: Extends the KEYPAD CABLE to a length of
either 15 m (49.2 ft) or 45 m (147.6 ft).
KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not shown in the figure.
KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM
PORT ADAPTER CABLE
Length
Catalog
Number
10 m (32.8 ft.) 839 7747
45 m (150 ft.)
20.3 cm (8 in.)
160 9791
---
Notes
---
The CONNECTORS are not installed.
Included with the MIM 200 only.
8 m (26 ft.)
20 m (65 ft.)
2 m (6.6 ft.)
---
---
Used with MIM 100 only.
3 m (9.8 ft.) --Included with the KEYPAD.
12 m (39.4 ft.) 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels. One end
42 m (137.8 ft.) 848 3539 is labeled “Keypad” and the other end is labeled
“Rear Panel.”
1 m (3.2 ft.) --Included with the MIM 200. Odd numbered COMM
PORT CONNECTORS are for KEYPADS. Even numbered CONNECTORS are for Autofilming connections.
Table 3–6 Color Key for CONNECTORS in Figures 3-16 and 3-17
Symbol
²
B
G
R
Y
W
Label
None
Blue
Green
Red
Yellow
White
Notes
Video
KEYPAD CABLES are blue.
Autofilming CABLES are green.
The RS-232 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE supplied by Kodak has red labels.
The end of the RS-485 DATA CABLE that connects directly to the MIM has a white label.
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-27
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–23 MODALITY SERVERS: Autofilming CABLES for Video Mode
Imaging
Device
Video Adapter Cable for the MIM 200
B
Keypad Cable
B
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
W
Keypad
Video Cable (75 ohm Coax)
Video Input Pkg.
H180_0008BCA
H180_0008BC
R
RS-232 Serial
Control Cable
R Y
Serial Control Cable
RS-422 (DB15)
G
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
W
RS-232 / RS-422
Conversion Kit
This view shows RS-232 converted to RS-422.
MIM 100 or MIM 200
Important
The CABLES in both figures are for each installed channel of a MIM 200. A MIM 200 can have 2 input devices.
Imaging
Device
H180_0021BCA
H180_0021BC
Video Adapter Cable for the MIM 200
Keypad Cable
B
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
W
Keypad
B
Video Cable (75 ohm Coax)
Adapter Cable
(DB25 to DB15)
Y Y
Serial Control Cable
RS-422 (DB15)
952
G
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
W
This view shows an RS-422 connection.
Video Input Pkg.
MIM 100 or MIM 200
3-28 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Table 3–7 CABLES for Video Autofilming
CABLE Description
VIDEO CABLE (75 ohm Coax)
VIDEO ADAPTER CABLE for
MIM 200
RGB VIDEO CABLE. Used in place of
VIDEO CABLE and VIDEO ADAPTER
CABLE in RGB installations. Not shown in the figure.
RS-232/RS-422 Conversion Kit
RS-232 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE
SERIAL CONTROL CABLE
RS-422 (DB15)
ADAPTER CABLE (DB25 to DB15)
KEYPAD CABLE
KEYPAD Extension CABLE: Extends the
KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either
15 m (49.2 ft) or 45 m (147.6 ft). The
KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not shown in the figure.
KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM PORT
ADAPTER CABLE
Length
Catalog
Number Notes
10 m (32.8 ft) 839 7747 ---
45 m (147.6 ft) 160 9791 The CONNECTORS are not installed.
20.3 cm (8 in.) --Included with the MIM 200.
8 m (26 ft.)
20 m (65 ft.)
2 m (6.6 ft.)
---
---
Use with MIM 100 only.
---
1.8 m (6 ft)
121 2018
---
DB25 to DB15
Included with Conversion Kit.
10 m (32.8 ft) 819 2742 Male end connects to the MIM; Female end
45 m (147.6 ft) 860 3599 connects to MODALITY.
1.52 m (5 ft)
3 m (9.8 ft)
835 9689
---
RS-422
Included with the KEYPAD.
12 m (39.4 ft) 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels. One
42 m (137.8 ft) 848 3539 end is labeled “Keypad” and the other end is labeled “Rear Panel”.
1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200. Odd numbered
COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for
KEYPADS and even numbered
CONNECTORS are for Autofilming connections.
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-29
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–24 MODALITY SERVERS: KEYPAD CABLES for Digital Mode
Imaging
Device
W
RS-485 Data Cable (DB37)
Keypad Cable
B
W
B
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
G
G
Digital Input Pkg.
Keypad
MIM 100 or MIM 200
H180_0009BCA
H180_0009BC
W
RS-485 Adapter Cable for the MIM 200
K
Important
The CABLES in the figure are for each installed channel of a MIM 200.
Table 3–8 CABLES for Digital Mode with KEYPAD
CABLE Description
RS-485 DATA CABLE (DB37)
Length
Catalog
Number Notes
10 m (32.8 ft) 197 2330 Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.
45 m (147.6 ft) 877 7021 The CONNECTORS are not installed.Both ends are male.F/F gender changer included.
1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200.
RS-485 ADAPTER CABLE for the
MIM 200
KEYPAD CABLE
KEYPAD Extension CABLE: Extends the
KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either 15 m (49.2 ft) or 45 m (147.6 ft). The
KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not shown in the figure.
KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM PORT
ADAPTER CABLE
3 m (9.8 ft) --Included with the KEYPAD.
12 m (39.4 ft) 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels.
42 m (137.8 ft) 848 3539
One end is labeled “Keypad” and the other is labeled “Rear Panel.”
1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200. Odd numbered
COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for
KEYPADS and even numbered
CONNECTORS are for Autofilming.
Table 3–9 Color Key for the CONNECTORS in Figures 3-18 through 3-21.
R
W
Y
B
G
Symbol Label
K BlacK
Notes
The CONNECTOR of the RS-485 ADAPTER CABLE that connects to the MIM 200 has a black label.
Blue
Green
---
---
Red
White
Yellow
Only the RS-232 CABLE that is supplied by Kodak has red labels.
The end of the RS-485 DATA CABLE that connects directly to the MIM has a white label.
---
3-30 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Figure 3–25 MODALITY SERVERS: Autofilming CABLES for Digital Mode - RS-422 Serial Control
Keypad
Keypad Cable
Imaging
Device
H180_0010BCA
H180_0010BC
W
RS-485 Adapter Cable for the MIM 200
K
B B
RS-485 Data Cable (DB37)
W
Y
RS-422 Serial Control
Cable (DB37)
Y Y
RS-422 Adapter Cable
(DB37 to DB15)
W
B
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
W
Digital Input Pkg.
MIM 100 or MIM 200
G
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
W
Important
The CABLES in the figure are for each installed channel of a MIM 200.
Table 3–10 CABLES for Digital Autofilming: RS-422 Serial Control
CABLE Description
RS-485 DATA CABLE (DB37)
Length
Catalog
Number Notes
10 m (32.8 ft) 197 2330 Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.
45 m (147.6 ft) 877 7021 The CONNECTORS are not installed. Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.
1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200.
RS-485 ADAPTER CABLE for the MIM
200
RS-422 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE
(DB37)
RS-422 ADAPTER CABLE
(DB37 to DB15)
KEYPAD CABLE
KEYPAD Extension CABLE: Extends the
KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either 15 m (49.2 ft) or 45 m (147.6 ft). The
KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not shown in the figure.
KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM PORT
ADAPTER CABLE
10 m (32.8 ft) 842 9391 Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.
45 m (147.6 ft) 197 0862 The CONNECTORS are not installed. Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.
1 m (3.2 ft) 814 5732 ---
3 m (9.8 ft) --Included with the KEYPAD.
12 m (39.4 ft) 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels. One
42 m (137.8 ft) 848 3539 end is labeled “Keypad” and the other end is labeled “Rear Panel.”
1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200. Odd numbered
COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for
KEYPADS and even numbered CONNECTORS are for Autofilming.
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-31
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–26 MODALITY SERVERS: Autofilming CABLES for Digital Mode - RS-232 Converted to RS-422 Serial
Control
Imaging
Device
H180_0011BCA
H180_0011BC
Keypad Cable
W
R
RS-485 Adapter Cable for the MIM 200
K W
RS-485 Data Cable (DB37)
RS-232 Serial
Control Cable
R Y
Serial Control Cable
RS-422 (DB15)
B
W
RS-232 / RS-422
Conversion Kit
G
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
W
B
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
W
G
G
Digital Input Pkg.
MIM 100 or MIM 200
Keypad
Important
The CABLES in the figure are for each installed channel of a MIM 200.
Table 3–11 CABLES for Digital Autofilming: RS-232 Converted to RS-422
CABLE Description
RS-485 DATA CABLE (DB37)
Length
Catalog
Number Notes
10 m (32.8 ft) 197 2330 Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.
45 m (147.6 ft) 877 7021 The CONNECTORS are not installed. Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.
1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200.
RS-485 ADAPTER CABLE for the
MIM 200
RS-232/RS-422 Conversion Kit
RS-232 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE
SERIAL CONTROL CABLE
RS-422 (DB15)
KEYPAD CABLE
KEYPAD Extension CABLE: Extends the
KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either 15 m (49.2 ft) or 45 m (147.6 ft). The
KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not in figure.
KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM PORT
ADAPTER CABLE
---
1.8 m (6 ft)
121 2018
---
DB25 to DB15
Included with Conversion Kit.
10 m (32.8 ft) 819 2742 Male end connects to the MIM; Female end
45 m (147.6 ft) 860 3599 connects to MODALITY.
3 m (9.8 ft)
1 m (3.2 ft)
---
12 m (39.4 ft) 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels. One
42 m (137.8 ft) 848 3539 end is labeled “Keypad” and the other end is labeled “Rear Panel.”
---
Included with the KEYPAD.
Included with the MIM 200. Odd numbered
COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for
KEYPADS and even numbered
CONNECTORS are for Autofilming connections.
3-32 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Figure 3–27 Siemens Imaging Device: FIBER OPTIC CABLE with Hirschmann CONNECTORS
Keypad
Keypad Cable
Imaging
Device
W
RS-485 Adapter Cable for the MIM 200
K
B
RS-485 Data Cable (DB37)
W
R
RS-232
(DB25)
R
Fiber optics
R
RS-232
(DB25)
R
W
Y
RS-422
(DB15)
G
B
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
W
G
Digital Input Pkg.
MIM 100 or MIM 200
Hirschmann
Connectors
RS-232 / RS-422
Conversion Kit
G
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
W
H180_0012BCA
H180_0012BC
Figure 3–28 Siemens Imaging Device: FIBER OPTIC CABLE with Pritzel CONNECTORS
Keypad
Keypad Cable
Imaging
Device
H180_0013BCA
H180_0013BC
RS-485 Adapter Cable for the MIM 200
W K
W
RS-485
(DB37)
W
Fiber optics
R
RS-232
(DB25)
R
W
RS-485
(DB37)
B
W
R
RS-232
(DB25)
R
Y
RS-422
(DB15)
G
Connectors
B
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
G
RS-232 / RS-422
Conversion Kit
G
Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only
W
W
Digital Input Pkg.
MIM 100 or MIM 200
Important
For Figures
: The CABLES are for each installed channel of a MIM 200.
Important
For Figures
: The RS-232/RS-422 CONVERTER 2E4415 contains 2 DIP SWITCHES. To locate the DIP
SWITCHES, remove the COVER from the side of the CONVERTER that has the hole for access.
• For the Hirschmann CONNECTORS, the 2 DIP SWITCHES must be set to the ON position. This provides power to the
Hirschmann CONNECTOR.
• For some versions of the Pritzel CONNECTOR, the 2 DIP SWITCHES might have to be reset.
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-33
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 3–12 Siemens Imaging Device: CABLES for Digital Autofilming
CABLE Description
RS-485 DATA CABLE (DB37)
RS-485 ADAPTER CABLE for the
MIM 200
RS-232/RS-422 Conversion Kit
RS-232 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE
SERIAL CONTROL CABLE
RS-422 (DB15)
KEYPAD CABLE
KEYPAD Extension CABLE: Extends the
KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either 15 m (49.2 ft) or 45 m (147.6 ft). The
KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not in the figure.
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Hirschmann CONNECTOR
---
1.8 m (6 ft)
121 2018 DB25 to DB15
--Included with Conversion Kit.
10 m (32.8 ft) 819 2742 Male end connects to the MIM; Female end
45 m (147.6 ft) 860 3599 connects to MODALITY.
3 m (9.8 ft) ---
---
---
Included with the KEYPAD.
12 m (39.4 ft) 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels. One
42 m (137.8 ft) 848 3539 end is labeled “Keypad” and the other end is labeled “Rear Panel.” variable
---
Pritzel CONNECTOR
KEYPAD and Autofilming COM PORT
ADAPTER CABLE
Length
Catalog
Number Notes
10 m (32.8 ft) 197 2330 Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.
45 m (147.6 ft) 877 7021 The CONNECTORS are not installed.Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.
1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200.
---
1 m (3.2 ft)
---
---
Not provided by Kodak.
Not provided by Kodak. Use for Fiber optics less than or equal to 30 m (98.4 ft) in length.
Not provided by Kodak. Use for Fiber optics greater than 30 m (98.4 ft) in length.
Included with the MIM 200. Odd numbered
COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for
KEYPADS and even numbered
CONNECTORS are for Autofilming connections.
3-34 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Figure 3–29 Terminating the Video Input for MIM 200 with VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD
Installing the Hardware
Uninstalled MIM50 or SPOOLER/Video
Video 60 Board
A
Video In
Video Out
Terminated Video (Non-Passthrough)
B
1
In
Out
MONITOR MODALITY
Single Video Output
B
2
MONITOR MODALITY
TERMINATOR
C
1
In
Out
MONITOR
MODALITY
C
2
Multiple Video Output
MODALITY
MONITOR
Non-terminated Video (Passthrough)
D
1 and
D
2
In
Out
MONITOR
MODALITY
H174_0065CC
Important
The diagrams indicate various states of the VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD depending on the set up of the MODALITY and
MONITOR at the site.
• A: Uninstalled MIM 200.
• B: Installed MIM 200 with terminated video (non-passthrough) for a MODALITY with a single video output. The
“Terminate Video Input” box for monochrome or boxes for RGB must be enabled before you select [Set Parameters]
in the “Video Board Setup” menu. A 75 Ohm TERMINATOR, which is not shipped with the product, must be installed when the MIM is de-energized.
– B
1
: Energized
– B
2
: De-energized
• C: Installed MIM 200 with terminated video (non-passthrough) for a MODALITY with multiple video outputs:
– C
1
: Energized
– C
2
: De-energized
• D: Installed MIM 200 with non-terminated video (passthrough): Same for both the energized and de-energized states.
– D 1 : Energized
– D
2
: De-energized
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-35
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3–30 Video Imaging Device with One Video Output to MONITOR (Non-terminated Passthrough)
IMAGING
DEVICE
MIM
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
IMAGING DEVICE
MONITOR
75 OHMS
H156_0114BC
Important
A MIM with a VIDEO 150 or 150LC INTERFACE BOARD must be energized if the MODALITY is in use (active passthrough video) and provides only one video output connection to the MONITOR.
3-36 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Connecting a Telephone Line to an INTERNAL MODEM
To install a telephone connection for a MIM that includes an INTERNAL MODEM, connect to a telephone line as indicated in
Figure 3–31 Connect MODEM BOARD to Telephone Line
Computer
(rear)
Telephone
Drop Cable
Line Jack
(Analog Line)
Do not connect to PHONE Jack
MIM - Rear
TELCO
Jack
Modem
MODEM BOARD
r9410-13L
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-37
SERVICE MANUAL
Installing an EXTERNALMODEM
An optional EXTERNAL MODEM can be connected to a MIM 200 or 25 PS for remote service access. An analog dial-up telephone line is reqired for the MODEM.
The MODEM requires an AC power source of 100 to 240 volts, 50 or 60 Hz.
Parts
The EXTERNAL MODEM supplied with MIM products includeds the following items:
• MODEM
• POWER ADAPTER
• SERIAL CABLE
• TELEPHONE CORD
• INSTRUCTION BOOK
Procedure
[1] Check that the MIM is de-energized.
Figure 3–32 CONFIGURATION SWITCHES
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MODEM - Bottom
CONFIGURATION
SWITCHES
[2] Set the CONFIGURATION SWITCHES on the bottom of MODEM:
• SWITCHES 3 and 8: ON
• All other SWITCHES: OFF
3-38 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Figure 3–33 MODEM CABLES
POWER SOURCE
100 - 240 vOLTS,
50 or 60 Hz
To COM1 CONNECTOR on MIM 200 or 25PS
SERIAL
CABLE
Ferrite
CLAMP
Installing the Hardware
JACK for ANALOG
TELEPHONE LINE
TELEPHONE
CORD
MODEM
POWER
SWITCH
PHONE JACK
LINE JACK
POWER
ADAPTER
[3] Connect the cables for the MODEM as shown in Figure 3–33 on Page 3 – 39 .
Note
The TELEPHONE CORD connects to the LINE JACK on the MODEM. Do not connect to the TELEPHONE JACK on the
MODEM.
[4] Install the ferrite CLAMP on the SERIAL CABLE near the end with the 25-pin CONNECTOR.
[5] Energize the MODEM.
Note
No MIM software coniguration is required to use the external MODEM. Powering up the MIM with the MODEM installed activates remote service access.
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-39
SERVICE MANUAL
Installing a FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT (FOPCIL) BOARD
This procedure installs a FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT (FOPCIL) BOARD in a MIM 200 or 25 PS and connects the FOPCIL
BOARD to a local PRINTER.
Tools/Parts
• FOPCIL BOARD
• FIBER OPTIC CABLES (2)
Procedure
1. Check that the MIM is de-energized.
2. Insert the FOPCIL BOARD into:
• Slot 6 on the back of the MIM 200 <SLOT ON NEW MIM???>
• The INTERFACE BOARD located at the top center of the 25 PS
3. Connect FIBER OPTIC CABLES as indicated in
• On INPUT MODULES for 969 LASER IMAGERS or 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGERS, the control CABLES can be connected to either the COM 1 or COM 2 PORT.
• On the FIBER INTERFACE BOARD for the 8500/8700 LASER IMAGER/PLUS, the image CABLES can be connected to USER PORT 0 or 1. The control CABLES can be connected to COM PORT 0 or 1.
Figure 3–34 FIBER OPTIC CABLES
Image
Port
B
A
Port
A
B
PACS Link 9410
MIM
B-Lead
A-Lead
A-Lead
B-Lead
FOPCIL
FOPCIL
BOARD
Board
Image
Control
B-Lead
A-Lead
A-Lead
B-Lead
Input Module or
Fiber Interface
Board
A
B
B
A
Image
Port
Note:
The above drawing does not show the exact position of the Image and
COM connectors.
Refer to the laser imager service manual for location of COM and
Image connectors.
3-40 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Installing a COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL) BOARD
This procedure installs a COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL) BOARD in a MIM 200 or 25 PS and connects the COPCIL BOARD to a local LASER IMAGER.
Tools/Parts
• COPCIL BOARD
• Y CABLE
Procedure
1. De-energize the MIM, if necessary.
2. Insert the COPCIL BOARD into:
• Slot 6 in the MIM 200 <SLOT ON NEW MIM??>
• The INTERFACE BOARD location at the top center of the 25 PS
3. Connect CABLES as indicated in
Figure 3–35 . If the local PRINTER is an 8500/8700 LASER IMAGER/STANDARD, you
can connect the “Y” CABLE to either image PORT and to either COM PORT.
Figure 3–35 COPPER OUTPUT CABLES
Digital Image
Port
Image
Computer
MIM
COPCIL
Control
Port
Y
Cable (3 Meters)
74-0500-5864-8
9-PIN CONNECTOR
9-Pin
Connector
Note:
The above drawing does not show the exact position of the Image and
COM connectors.
Refer to the laser imager service manual for location of COM and
Image connectors.
9410-62L
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-41
SERVICE MANUAL
Network Isolation for MIM 200: 667 MHz, 1 MHz, 1.2 GHz, 2.4 MHz - European
DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD
ISOLATION
CABLE
ETHERNET
CABLE
H180_0104GCA
H180_0104GC
Primary Ethernet Isolation Connections
1. Connect the ISOLATION CABLE ASSY to the NETWORK OUTPUT and to INPUT #1 (J1) on the DUAL NETWORK
ISOLATION BOARD.
2. Connect the ETHERNET CABLE to the OUTPUT #1 (J2) on the DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD and to the
CUSTOMER NETWORK.
Secondary Ethernet Isolation Connections
To isolate the connection for the direct-connect network connection using a CROSSOVER NETWORK CABLE to a LASER
IMAGER.
1. Connect the second ISOLATION CABLE ASSY to the NETWORK OUTPUT PORT and to INPUT PORT #2 (J3) on the
DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD.
2. Connect the CROSSOVER ETHERNET CABLE to OUTPUT #2 (J4) on the DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD and to the INPUT NETWORK PORT of the LASER IMAGER.
Patient Environment Connection
The MIM 200 can be installed within the patient environment in the European Economic Community (EEC) if it is connected per “Setup Diagram” on Page 14 – 5 . For additional information see “Compliancy with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1
Requirements” on Page 14 – 4 and “Non-Compliancy with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 Requirements” on Page 14 – 6
3-42 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Installing the Hardware
Connecting the KEYPAD to the MODALITY
A SWITCH on the MODALITY can be connected to a KEYPAD in place of a FOOTSWITCH, as shown in the drawing below.
An optional CABLE is available for this connection. This connection applies to MODALITY SERVERS only.
CABLE Catalog Number: 1836253
CABLE Description: Four meter IMAGE ACQUISITION CABLE
The CABLE has a KEYPAD CONNECTOR on one end and a BNC coaxial PLUG on the other end. It is designed to connect to a MODALITY that has SWITCH CONTACTS wired to a BNC coaxial JACK. A BNC-to-RCA adapter is supplied with the
CABLE for connecting to a MODALITY with an RCA-type coaxial JACK.
Important
This CABLE provides a reference voltage for isolated SWITCH CONTACTS at the MODALITY.
Important
After installing this modification, the MODALITY SERVER must be set up so that the MODALITY Store function can be done from the KEYPAD. See Section 7.
BNC CONNECTOR
(JACK) on MODALITY
FOOTSWITCH
CONNECTOR
CABLE
Length: 4 Meters
BNC CONNECTOR
(PLUG) on CABLE
MODALITY
8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-43
SERVICE MANUAL
Preparing to Apply Power
Setting Up the MIM
Set up the MIM for application of power as follows:
• The MIM 200 (667 MHz) and the 25 PS have a 115/230 V POWER SWITCH, located on the rear of the MIM adjacent to the POWER CONNECTOR. Set this SWITCH to the correct position for the site.
Note
Later MIM 200s (2.4 GHz and 1 GHz) and the MIM 100 do not include the 115/230 V SWITCH. They include “Autosensing” circuits which automatically set the MIM for the correct source voltage.
• The MIM 200 and the 25 PS are provided with a UPS, for either 115 or 230 V operation. A UPS is optional with the MIM
100. Connect the UPS to the MIM and to source power using the instructions included with the UPS.
Important
The UPS for the 25 PS is a “smart” unit. It includes software which allows communication with the 25 PS. If a source power failure occurs, the UPS provides battery backup for the 25 PS for about 1 minute (adjustable) to allow the 25 PS to shut down its processes in order. Then, about 7 or 8 seconds later, the UPS turns off.
De-energizing the MIM
[1] Shut down the MIM either from the KEYPAD or from the “MIM Service Application.” The MIM 200 and 25 PS will power off automatically.
[2] For the MIM 100: De-energize the MIM by pressing the POWER SWITCH off after the KEYPAD indicates that it is safe to do so. The power light will turn off.
Energizing the MIM
After all components have been set up and CABLES have been connected, apply power to the system:
[1] Energize the UPS, if the system includes one.
[2] For all MIMS except the 25 PS:
(a) Energize the MIM by pressing the POWER SWITCH on. The power light will turn on.
(b) If the MIM has been set up, check the KEYPAD for a “Ready” indication. Start-up to “Ready” can take up to 6 minutes.
[3] For the 25 PS: Energize the 25 PS by pressing the POWER SWITCH on the POWER STRIP to the on position.
3-44 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Upgrading MIM Software
Section 4: Upgrading MIM Software
Introduction
The procedures in this section are primarily “upgrade” procedures. These procedures upgrade the MIM to the latest software level. Normally, except for the procedure “Saving and Restoring the Configuration”, it is not necessary to perform these procedures when you install a new system, because new systems are delivered with the latest software and software licenses.
The procedures include:
“Saving and Restoring the System Set Up.”
“Setting Up the BIOS.”
“Installing New MIM Application Software (Ghosting).”
“Enabling Software Licenses.”
“Installing MIM DEVICE DRIVERS and FIRMWARE.”
Saving and Restoring the System Set Up
Saving and Restoring Using the “MIM Service Application”
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application”.
[2] From the “MIM Service Application” window, select Connect>Connect to MIM
[3] Make sure the CONFIGURATION DISKETTE is loaded in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM.
[4] Select Configuration from the menu, and:
• To back up the configuration, select Save Configuration.
• To restore the configuration, select Restore Configuration.
[5] Click [OK].
8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-1
SERVICE MANUAL
Saving and Restoring from a PRINT or DISPLAY KEYPAD
[1] At the KEYPAD main menu, press [Menu].
[2] Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to the “Service” menu.
[3] Press the [Menu].
[4] Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to the “Configuration” menu.
[5] Press the [Menu] key.
[6] Check that the CONFIGURATION DISKETTE is loaded in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM.
[7] To save the configuration for the system:
• Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to Backup Config.
• Press the [Menu] key.
• Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to Run Backup. The following messages will display:
“BACKUP STATUS: IN PROGRESS.” Then “BACKUP STATUS: Operation completed.”
• To exit, press the [Menu] key.
[8] To restore the configuration for the system:
• Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to Restore Config.
• Press the [Menu] key. “Enter Password” will display.
• Use the [Up Arrow] and [Down Arrow] keys to enter the password: SVC, letter by letter. Press the [Menu] key after entering each letter. The [Menu] key acts like the Spacebar on a KEYBOARD.
• Press the [Menu] key until the screen displays “Exit.”
• Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to Exit.
• Press the [Menu] key.
• Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to Confirm Restore.
• Press the [Menu] key to begin the system restore.
Backing up from the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD
[1] Check that the CONFIGURATION DISKETTE is loaded in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM.
[2] Press [MAIN MENU] on the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD.
[3] Press [SERVICE].
[4] Press [BACKUP CONFIGURATION]. The screen will display “DISKETTE OK.”
[5] Press [EXECUTE BACKUP]. The screen will display “BACKUP STATUS: IN PROGRESS,” then “BACKUP STATUS:
COMPLETED.”
[6] Press [RETURN].
Note
The Restore function is not available on the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD.
4-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Upgrading MIM Software
Setting Up the BIOS
BIOS Setup Functions
Version 6.1 software is on a CD-ROM for all MIMs. For all MIMs using software stored on CD-ROM, the BIOS must be set up to boot from CD-ROM. MIM 200s below serial number 100600 were set up to boot from the HDD DRIVE. Before V_6.1 software can be loaded on any MIM 200 below serial number 100600, the BIOS for the MIM must be set up to boot from CD-
ROM. For many of these MIMs, the BIOS was changed when Version 5.0 or 5.2 MIM software was loaded. However, if you are upgrading a MIM200 in this group that currently has a software level below Version 5.0, check the Boot options in the BIOS and change if necessary.
The following pages provide procedures for setting up the BIOS in the following devices:
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200) - Both 1 GHz and 667 MHz
• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)
Note
Setting up the BIOS to boot from CD-ROM normally involves only changing the settings that select the first and second boot devices. CD-ROM must be selected to be the first boot device and the HARD DRIVE to be the second. But if the BIOS is corrupt, all settings will have to be checked.
Table 4–1 shows general options that are available during BIOS setup.
Table 4–1 BIOS Setup Functions
Main
Menu Use to:
Set up and change the main options; for example, time, date, FLOPPY DRIVE, HARD
DRIVE, CD-ROM.
Advanced
Security
Exit
Sub Menu
Change advanced features, for example: “peripheral configuration” and “advanced chipset configuration”.
Enter a password to limit access to the system.
Save or discard changes.
Use to:
Hard Drive Configuration Set up the HARD DRIVE.
Boot options
Peripheral Configuration
Modify options for the system to boot up, for example: boot sequence.
Modify options for the SERIAL PORTS, the PARALLEL PORT, and the HARD
DRIVE interfaces.
Modify options for memory and system buses.
Advanced Chipset
Configuration
Power Management
Configuration
Plug-and-Play
Configuration
Modify options for Advanced Power Management (APM).
Modify options for the system’s plug-and play features.
8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-3
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 200 - 2.4 GHz
This version of MIM will come from the factory set to boot from CD-ROM. The following procedure is provided in case the
BIOS is corrupted.
[1] Check that the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE.
[2] Shut down the MIM from the “MIM Service Application” or the KEYPAD.
[3] De-energize the MIM.
[4] Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM. See “Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM” in Section 2.
[5] Energize the MIM, and access the “Configuration/Setup Utility” menu for the BIOS by pressing F1 when prompted on the
MONITOR screen.
[6] Follow the instructions on the screen for selecting menu items, and install the settings in Table
Table 4–2 Settings on the “Configuration/Setup Utility” Menu
Step Under Menu Item
1 Devices and I/O Ports / USB Setup / USB Support Disabled
2 Devices and I/O Ports / Serial Port Setup / Serial Port B Address 3F8
3 Devices and I/O Ports / Serial Port Setup / Serial Port A Address 2F8
4 Start Options / Startup Sequence / Wake On LAN Disabled
5 Start Options / Startup Sequence / First Startup Device
6 Start Options / Startup Sequence / Second Startup Device
Select “CD ROM”
Select “Hard Disk 0”
Action
7 Start Options / Startup Sequence/ Third Startup Device
8 Start Options / Startup Sequence / Fourth Startup Device
9 Start Options / Fast Power On Self Test
10 Start Options / Memory Test
11 Start Options / Boot Fail Count
12 Advanced Setup / CPU Frequency / Single Processor MP Table
13 Power Management Setup / Automatic Power On
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
[7] After entering new settings, save and exit the BIOS setup.
[8] Reboot. Then re-ghost the MIM.
4-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Upgrading MIM Software
Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 100 and MIM 200 - 1.2 GHz
This version of MIM will come from the factory set to boot from CD-ROM. The following procedure is provided in case the
BIOS is corrupted.
[1] Check that the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE.
[2] Shut down the MIM from the “MIM Service Application” or the KEYPAD.
[3] De-energize the MIM.
[4] Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM. See “Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM” in Section 2.
[5] Energize the MIM, and access the “Configuration/Setup Utility” menu for the BIOS by pressing F1 when prompted on the
MONITOR screen.
[6] Follow the instructions on the screen for selecting menu items, and install the settings in Table
Table 4–3 Custom Settings from Factory Defaults
Step Under Menu Item
1 General Configuration / Select / - 1st Boot Device
2 General Configuration / Select / 2nd Boot Device
3 General Configuration / Select / 3rd Boot Device
4 General Configuration / Select / 4th Boot Device
5 Peripherals / Serial port 2
6 Power Management
[7] After entering new settings, save and exit the BIOS setup.
[8] Reboot. Then re-ghost the MIM.
DROM
HDD-2
DISABLED
DISABLED
COM2
“Disable”
Action
8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-5
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 200 - 1 GHz
This version of MIM will come from the factory set to boot from CD-ROM. The following procedure is provided in case the
BIOS is corrupted.
[1] Check that the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE.
[2] Shut down the MIM from the “MIM Service Application” or the KEYPAD.
[3] De-energize the MIM.
[4] Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM. See “Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM” in Section 2.
[5] Energize the MIM, and access the “Configuration/Setup Utility” menu for the BIOS by pressing F1 when prompted on the
MONITOR screen.
Table 4–4 Settings on the “Configuration/Setup Utility” Menu
Step Under Menu Item
1 Devices and I/O Ports / USB Setup
2 Devices and I/O Ports / IDE Drives Setup
3 Devices and I/O Ports / IDE Drives Setup
4 Devices and I/O Ports / Video Setup
5 Devices and I/O Ports /
6 Devices and I/O Ports /
7 Devices and I/O Ports /
8 Start Options / Startup Sequence
9 Start Options / Startup Sequence
10 Start Options / Startup Sequence
11 Advanced Setup/Chipset Feature
12 Power Management Setup / Automatic Power On
13 Power Management Setup / Automatic Power On
14 Power Management Setup / Automatic Power On
15 Power Management Setup / Automatic Power On
16 Power Management Setup / Automatic Power On
Action
Disable “OnChip USB”
Enable “OnChip Primary IDE” - default setting
Enable “OnChip Secondary IDE” - default setting
Set “Primary Video Slot” to AGP
Disable “OnChip sound”
Disable “Sound Blaster”
Disable “Midi Port (200-207H)”
Select “CD ROM” to be the First Boot Device -default setting
Select “Hard Disk 0” to be the Second Boot Device
Disable “Third Boot Device”
Set “AGP Aperture Size” to 64
Disable “Wake On PCIPME”
Disable “Wake on LAN/Ring”
Disable “Wake on RTC Alarm”
Set “Power Button Mode” to Instant-Off - default setting
Set “Power On After Power Loss” to Last State
[7] After entering new settings, save and exit the BIOS setup.
[8] Reboot. Then re-ghost the MIM.
4-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Upgrading MIM Software
Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 200 - 667 MHz
Important
Starting with V_5.0 application software, the MIM includes a “soft off” feature for all versions of MIM 200. All before serial number 103650 must have a BIOS change before being upgraded to Version 5.0. Otherwise the system will reboot on an
attempted shutdown. See the necessary BIOS change in Step 12 of Table 4–5.
Important
Do this procedure before installing new application software in any MIM 200 with a serial number below 100600, to enable booting from the CD-ROM.
[1] Make sure the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE.
[2] Shut down the MIM from the “MIM Service Application” or the KEYPAD.
[3] De-energize the MIM.
[4] Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM. See “Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM” in Section 2.
[5] Energize the MIM, and access the “Configuration/Setup Utility” menu for the BIOS by pressing F1 when prompted on the
MONITOR screen.
Table 4–5 Settings on the “Configuration/Setup Utility” Menu
Step Under Menu Item
1 Devices and I/O Ports
2 Devices and I/O Ports / USB Setup
3 Devices and I/O Ports / IDE Drives Setup /
IDE Hard Disk Drive 0
4 Devices and I/O Ports / IDE Drives Setup /
IDE Hard Disk Drive 0
5 Devices and I/O Ports / Audio Setup
6 Start Options / Startup Sequence
7 Start Options / Startup Sequence
8 Start Options / Startup Sequence
9 Start Options / Startup Sequence
10 Start Options
11 Start Options
12 Power Management / APM
13 Power Management / APM
14 Power Management / Automatic Power On /
Wake on LAN
Action
Select “Not Installed” for Mouse
Disable “USB Keyboard/ Mouse Support”
Select “High Performance” for IDE Performance - default setting
Disable “IDE Read Prefetch” - default setting
Disable “Audio Support”
Select “CD ROM” for the Primary/First Startup Device
Select “Hard Disk 0” for the Primary/Second Startup Device
Select “Disabled” for the Automatic Power On Startup Sequence
Select “Primary” for the Error Startup Sequence
Enable “Keyboardless Operation Mode”
Disable “Network Boot F12 Option”
Enable “APM BIOS Mode”
Disable “Automatic Hardware Power Management”
Disable “Wake on LAN”
[7] After entering new settings, save and exit the BIOS setup.
[8] Reboot. Then re-ghost the MIM.
8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-7
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up the BIOS for the 25 PS
This version of MIM comes from the factory set to boot from the CD-ROM. Use this procedure if the BIOS is corrupted.
[1] Make sure the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE.
[2] Shut down the MIM from the “MIM Service Application” or the KEYPAD.
[3] De-energize the MIM.
[4] Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM. See “Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM” in Section 2.
[5] Energize the MIM, and access the BIOS “Configuration/Setup Utility Menu” by pressing F2 when prompted on the
MONITOR screen.
indicated. Disregard all other Menu Items.
Table 4–6 Settings on the “BIOS Setup” Menu
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Under Menu Item
Advanced/ I/O Device Configuration
Advanced/ I/O Device Configuration
Advanced/ I/O Device Configuration
Advanced/ I/O Device Configuration
Advanced/ I/O Device Configuration
Advanced/ I/O Device Configuration
Boot/Floppy Check
Boot / Boot Device Priority
[7] After entering new settings, save and exit the BIOS setup.
[8] Reboot. Then re-ghost the MIM.
Action
Enable “Serial Port A”
Enable “Serial Port B”
Enable “Serial Port C”
Disable “Serial Port D”
Disable “Parallel Port A”
Disable “Parallel Port B”
Disable
Select:
“1. ATAPI CD-ROM Drive”
“2. Hard Drive”
“3. Removable Devices”
“4. Network Boot”
“5. MBA UNDI”
4-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Upgrading MIM Software
Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 100
For Software V_6.1, the capability exists to load software from a CD using the external CD-ROM DRIVE KIT Tool. For some
MIMs the BIOS settings must be changed so that the MIM can boot from the CD-ROM DRIVE:
• Each MIM 100 with a serial number below 111345 contains a 120 MHZ mother board and may not be upgraded to V_6.0 and above software.
• Each MIM 100 with a serial number 111345 or above contains a 433 MHz motherboard and may be upgraded to V_6.0 and above software. Additional memory and BIOS configuration may be required.
• Each MIM 100 with a serial number 112779 or higher comes from Manufacuring with the correct BIOS configuration but may need additional memory.
• Each MIM 100 with a serial number 113045 or higher comes from Manufacuring with the correct BIOS configuration and memory.
The following procedure is provided if the BIOS becomes corrupted.
[1] Check that the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE.
[2] Shut down the MIM application from the “Service Application” or the KEYPAD.
[3] De-energize the MIM.
[4] Connect the MONITOR, KEYBOARD, and MOUSE to the equipment.
[5] Energize the MIM.
[6] When the MIM is booting, press [F2] to enter the BIOS Setup.
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
Table 4–7 Settings on the “PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility” Menu
Step Under Menu Item
Advanced
Advanced / I/O Device Configuration
Advanced
Advanced / Advanced Chipset Control
Boot
Main / Secondary Master
Boot / Boot Device Priority
Action
Disable “Legacy USB Support”
Disable “Parallel Port”
Select “Other” for Large Disk Access Mode
Select “4MB” for Graphics Aperture
Disable “QuickBoot Mode”
Select Type: [Auto]
Change the Boot Device Priority to:
• [ATAPI CD-ROM Drive]
• [HARD DRIVE]
• [Diskette Drive]
• [Network Boot]
8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-9
SERVICE MANUAL
Loading New MIM Application Software (Ghosting)
It may be necessary to re-load the MIM application software (ghost) if:
• A software upgrade is necessary
• The HARD DRIVE is corrupt
• The current software is corrupt
Important
This ghosting procedure for MIM 100 requires the use of the external CD-ROM DRIVE KIT TL-Tools.
[1] Is the equipment a MIM 100?
Yes
a. Remove the COVER.
b. Connect the EXTERNAL CD-ROM DRIVE, TL-5651, to the equipment:
1. TOOL RIBBON CABLE, 5E2908 - CONNECTOR P1 to IDE 1 on CPU
BOARD.
2. TOOL RIBBON CABLE, 5E2908 - CONNECTOR P3 to CD-ROM
DRIVE.
3. EXENDER POWER CONNECTOR, TL-5652, to power on CD-ROM
DRIVE and to the INTERNAL CONNECTOR, MOD-J2 POWER
CONNECTION.
No
Continue with
.
[2] Energize the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application”.
[3] Save the MIM configuration to FLOPPY DISKETTE.
[4] If necessary, set up the BIOS.
Note
Setting up the BIOS may be necessary for early MIMs that loaded software from the LAPTOP COMPUTER. Because current version software is provided on CD-ROM, the BIOS must be set up to boot from CD-ROM.
[5] If the LAPTOP COMPUTER does not contain the latest version of the “MIM Service Application”, load the latest version.
[6] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and connect to the “MIM Service Application”.
4-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Upgrading MIM Software
[7] Select Admin>Software Licenses and note the software licenses that are enabled. These will have to be re-enabled after ghosting.
[8] Load the CD-ROM with the new application software into the CD-ROM DRIVE of the MIM.
[9] De-energize, then energize the MIM. The software will begin to load automatically.
[10] Wait 6 minutes for ghosting to complete:
• For the MIM 100 and MIM 200: The MIM will beep 3 times if ghosting was successful. If the MIM beeps 10 times, ghosting has failed.
• For the 25 PS: The CD and HDD LED’s will stop blinking after 6 minutes, indicating that ghosting has completed successfully.
[11] Remove the CD-ROM from the MIM. De-energize the MIM, then energize it.
Important
After a MIM has been ghosted, the first reboot will take about 4 minutes. CHKDSK will be performed once. Then the MIM will reboot and do CHDSK 3 more times before reaching the Ready state. The length of this process is not an indication of a bad Hard
Drive. You should allow at least 7 minutes before assuming that the boot process has failed. When in doubt, connect a
MONITOR to the MIM and watch the boot process.
Note
After V_6.0 and above ghosting is completed, the MIMs and RAS Server will have the following default IP Addresses:
• MIM 100, MIM 200, PS 25: 123.123.123.10
• RAS Server: Begin IP Address: 123.123.123.200, End IP Address: 123.123.123.201
[13] Restore the cofiguration from the backup disk or manually configure the system. See the instructions in Section 6 (for
PRINT SERVERS) or Section 7 (for MODALITY SERVERS).
8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-11
SERVICE MANUAL
Enabling Software Licenses
Software licensing is necessary when:
• The customer purchases additional features for an existing system:
– DICOM Store Output - Enabling connection to WORKSTATIONS and archives
– HIS/RIS Connection - Enabling connection to a HIS/RIS Gateway
• You reload software (ghosting) in a MIM set up with destinations other than PRINTERS.
Important
Using the LAPTOP COMPUTER, the FE must set the Software License to “On” state for each Feature before the MIM can add a DICOM Store Destination, or HIS/RIS GATEWAY.
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application”.
Important
After ghosting, all V_6.0 and above MIMs (MIM 100, MIM 200 and 25 PS) have the default IP Address 123.123.123.10
[2] From the “MIM Service Application” screen, select Admin>Software Licenses.
4-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
[3] From the “Software Licenses” screen, record the “Site Code” information.
[4] Call the TSC and provide:
• The Site Code of the MIM
• The K# of the MIM
Note
The TSC will provide the necessary Site Key information.
[5] On the “Software Licenses” screen, enter the Site Key provided by the TSC.
[6] Click [Update].
[7] On the “Software Licenses” screen, check that the correct Features are “On.”
[8] Select [Cancel] to exit the screen.
Note
After the correct software licenses are enabled, the MIM is ready to be set up.
Upgrading MIM Software
8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-13
SERVICE MANUAL
Installing MIM DEVICE DRIVERS and FIRMWARE
Important
Use this procedure to install software from the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM to upgrade MIM DEVICE DRIVERS or install new FIRMWARE in any of the following MIM components:
• VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD
• DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD
• KEYPAD
Note
The software which will be transferred in the following procedure was loaded onto the LAPTOP COMPUTER when it was set up. See “Installing the LAPTOP COMPUTER Software for MIM Products” in Section 2.
[1] Connect:
• LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM through Dial-Up Networking. See Section 2.
• “MIM Service Application” to the MIM. See Section 2.
[2] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Admin>Update Software.
[3] Select the correct version and then select [OK].
Important
The MIM displays the “File Transfer Progress” window. Do not abort the procedure, which takes 5 to 10 minutes to complete.
• Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the “File Transfer Progress” completion. During this time the “File Transfer Progress” window might indicate 1 to 2 minutes of no activity.
• After 5 to 10 minutes the COMPUTER displays the message “The MIM Software has been successfully updated. The MIM system will be restarted.” At this time, the software automatically restarts the MIM.
• Do not select “Reconnect” when the COMPUTER displays the “Re-establish Connection” window. Wait another 2 minutes for the KEYPAD to display the “Acquisition” window.
[4] Wait until the KEYPAD displays the “Acquisition” window. Then use the KEYPAD to select:
• Main Menu
• Service
• View System Information
[5] At the KEYPAD, check that the correct software version displays.
[6] Close any open windows on the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
4-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Upgrading MIM Software
MIM Privacy Feature
Introduction
MIM software includes a Privacy feature that customers can use to prevent unauthorized users of a MIM from printing or storing patient data. This feature allows customers to comply with the U. S. Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act
(HIPPA). The Customer can elect to either enable or disable the privacy feature. If the Privacy feature is enabled, the customer can set up user accounts that will require each authorized MIM operator to login at a KEYPAD with a user name and password.
The Privacy feature is controlled from a “Security Administrator Console” (SA Console).The SA Console is a web page on the
MIM that can be accessed using Internet Explorer or other web browser. Each MIM unit has its own Security Administrator web page. Usually the customer's Security Administrator will access the SA Console web page from a COMPUTER connected on the same local area network as the target MIM. The SA Console contains several screens that are used to comfigure the Privacy functions to meet customer requirements.
A service provider can also access the Security Administrator Console using a MONITOR KIT if he/she has Security
Administrator privledges. Starting Internet Explorer from the MIM desktop automatically brings up the Security Administrator
Console web page.
For detailed instructions for using the Security Adminitrator Console, see User Guide 8E9002 - Security and Privacy Features for the MIM 100, MIM 200 and 25 PS.
Accessing the Security Administrator Console from a Remote COMPUTER
To open the SA Console for a MIM you must have:
• A remote COMPUTER connected on the same network a the target MIM
• The IP Address of the target MIM
• The username and password for the SA Console on the target MIM
On a newly installed V_6.0 and above MIM or after V_6.0 and above software is installed on a MIM, the username and password are:
• Username: SA
• Password: PASSWORD
Access Procedure
[1] Connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER or other COMPUTER with Internet Explorer to the same network as the MIM.
[2] Launch Internet Explorer.
[3] In the Internet Explorer Address Box, type in http://aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd where aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd is the IP Address of the
MIM.
8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-15
SERVICE MANUAL
[4] Type in the username and password.
Note
Initially the username is SA and the password is password.
[5] Click [Logon].
The SA Console Welcome Screen appears. You can use the menu buttons on the left side of the Welcome screen to move to the other screens within the SA Console.
Menu
Buttons
Enabling or Disabling the Privacy Feature
[1] Click [Device]
4-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Upgrading MIM Software
[2] Click [PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER V_ 6.1].
[3] Click the “Enabled” or “Disabled” button.
[4] Click [Save].
[5] Click [Logout].
8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-17
SERVICE MANUAL
[6] Restart the MIM for the change to take effect.
4-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting up a PRINTER
Section 5: Setting up a PRINTER
Setting Up Parameters for the PRINTER
To set up a local PRINTER for use with a PRINT SERVER, see the SERVICE MANUAL for the PRINTER and the information in the following tables. After setting the parameters for the PRINTER, go to Section 6: Setting Up a PRINT SERVER.
Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER
To set up an 8100 LASER IMAGER that connects to a MIM, use MPC to enter the values for the following parameters.
Parameter
System Configuration
Acquire Channel Digital
Value Parameter
Image Quality
User ID
Value
MODEM Initialization Accept default
4096
MODALITY
Aspect Ratio
Enter ID per customer preference
Enter descriptive name for
MODALITY
1.0
Maximum Imageable
Columns
Network Configuration
Match Borders Option
TCP/IP Address Not applicable Force TFT to Film Dmin
Usually enabled - customer preference
Usually disabled - customer preference
Disabled
Enabled
TC/IP Net Mask
TCP/IP Gateway
Digital Configuration
Not applicable
Not applicable
Pixel Correct
Mag Scaling
Optics
Default Pixels per Line
Default Lines per Image
Pixel Depth
Header Mode
Parity
Communications
Parity
Stop Bits
Baud Rate
EOM
Protocol
Memory Full Message
Alarm Mode
Acquire Timeout
Not applicable
Not applicable
8 or 12*
Header Line
Even
Even
1
1200
CR
952
MOV
Old
25
Translation Speed
SOP Delay
Pixel Stretch
Facet to Stretch
SOS Delay
Laser Dead Time
SOS Level
Laser Dynamic Range
P1 (PRI to DCR/PAS)
P2 (DCR to DCR/PAS)
P3 (STP to STC)
P4 (EXP to DCR.EOE)
P5 (EOE to PTC)
* Set to 8 or 12, depending on the pixel width from modalities.
P6 (DCR to STC)
Follow on-screen instructions
Not adjustable
Follow on-screen instructions
0
0
0
0
0
0
8E8820 – NOV 2003 5-1
SERVICE MANUAL
Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER
To set up an 8200 LASER IMAGER that connects to a MIM, use MPC to enter the values for the following parameters.
Note
To connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the 8200 LASER IMAGER through the customer network and the MIM, you must start Internet Explorer (IE) and in the IE address window, enter the IP Address of the MIM followed by the socket number (4080) of the connection. For example: 149.98.202.200:4080
Parameter
Network Configuration
8200 TCP/IP Address 100.100.100.40
8200 TCP/IP Net Mask 255.255.255.0
8200 TCP/IP Gateway 0.0.0.0
DICOM Parameters
SCU AE Title
SCU TFT Set
SCU Contrast
Value
MIM, for example. This is the “Node Name” used to configure MIM 200 for the network.
Ver693c0.w87
1
SCU Smoothing
PRINTER AE Title
5
DV_8200, as agreed upon by user of MODALITY
PRINTER TCP/IP Port 1025
LOCAL PANEL
Language Code
Current Contrast
Current Density
Image Quality
English
1
2.600
Site ID
Modality
Match Borders Option
Get information from the user. This is data that will appear on each sheet of film.
Name of MODALITY
Enabled
5-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting up a PRINTER
Kodak DryView 8300, 8600 or 8610 LASER IMAGER
To set up the DIGITAL INPUT MODULE that connects to the MIM, enter the values for the following parameters at the LOCAL
PANEL of the 8300/8600/8610 LASER IMAGER. The parameter values in bold apply to operation in a MIM system.
Operator Menu
Density
Parameter
Contrast
Sharp/Smooth
Film Layout
Installation Menu
16
6
AUTO (0)
1:1 Portrait
8300 Value
16
3
1
8600 and 8610 Value
1:1 Portrait
1. Aspect Ratio
3. Serial Control Interface:
1. Baud Rate
2. Number of Data Bits
3. Number of Stop Bits
4. Parity
5. Delimiter
6. Ignore Late Ack/Nack
7. Protocol (3M or Keypad)
6. Mark Install Date
7. Memory Management
8. Calibration Enable: ON or OFF
9. Module ID
1.0
1200*
8*
1*
Even*
Comma
On
3M* (952)
Date PRINTER is installed
16
On
Rename the input module per customer wishes
Do not change
1.0
1200*
8*
1*
Even*
Comma
On
3M* (952)
Date PRINTER is installed.
127
On
Rename the input module per customer wishes
Do not change.
10. Exposures: film counter
11. Cal Processor Center Temp
1. Measured Center Zone Reading Readjustment at installation usually not required
12. Cal Processor End Temp
1. Measured End Zone Reading
13. Energy Saver Option
14. Image Viewing
15. Digital Interface
1. Parity
16. Modality Group
17. Smoothing Group
18. PM Exposures
Readjustment at installation usually not required
Customer preference
Emulsion
-
0
Even
1
1
0
Even
6
19. Film Count Enable
20. Film Type -
On On
DVM for mammography
* Parameter settings must match corresponding Communication and Image Transfer parameter settings for MIM.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 5-3
SERVICE MANUAL
Kodak DryView 8700/8500 and 969 HQ LASER IMAGERS and
Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER
Enter the following parameter values using MPC.
Important
For the 969 HQ LASER IMAGER and the 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER, you must check that the Transfer Clock Speed
JUMPER on the INPUT MODULE that connects to the MIM is set to 10 MHz. See the procedure in the SERVICE MANUAL.
Communication
Parity = Even
Data Bits = 8*
Image
Contrast = 10
Dmax = 3.0
Command Set = 969* Density = 13
Parity = Disable* Border = 0
Stop Bits = 1* 969 Cmd Set Beta
Horizontal = 3
Vertical = 3
Baud = 19200*
End of Message = None Dmin Mode =
Normal
Host System
Image Size Mode = New Parameter Set = 0
Alarm Mode = Old
EIB
Test Pattern = Disable
User Priority = Normal Header Mode* =
Header/Frame or
Header Line*
P1 = 0
P2 = 0
P3 = 0
Match Border = YES P4 = 0
P5 = 0
FIB Port = 0 Prescale = On
Interface = Digital EIB Parity = Even
Media Size = 14 x 17 Parity Enable =
Enable*
Media Type =
BWGEN
ID Fgnd Intensity =
255 (8 bit)
4095 (12 bit)
Port (see Note 2)
Time out = 25
Protocol = Packet
Character Pacing = 0
TFT =VER 693CØ* P6 = 0
Rotate All Images = No
Note: Click on “969 Command Set” in the
Defaults box to enter all of the above values.
Horizontal Smooth = 8
Vertical Sharp = 0
Vertical Smooth = 8
ID Bgnd Intensity = 0
Memory Full Resp = MOV Requeue = 5
Override 952 Beta = No Modality = Digital
Aspect Ratio = 1.00
Horizontal Sharp = 0
User ID = Customer
Preference
Memory Management
= Best Fit
Destination =
Processor 0***
Pixels Per Line = 0
Image Lines = 0
Pixel Width
(see Note 1)
Digital IF Timing
T6 = 200
T7 = 255
T10 = 255
Density Test Contrast
Source = NVRAM
Framing = No
Pixel Correction = Yes
Slides = 35 mm
Dual Switch = Off
Scale Format = No
Scale Magnif. = Yes
* Parameter settings must match corresponding Communication and Image Transfer parameter settings for the MIM.
5-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting up a PRINTER
Communication Image Host
Note 1: Set Pixel Width to 8 or 12, depending on LASER IMAGER capability.
System EIB
Note 2: EIB Port setting:
Fiber connection: always set to 0.
Copper connection (8700/8500 LASER IMAGERS/STANDARD only): Port setting must be the same as the LASER IMAGER COM port used to connect to the MIM (i.e., if MIM connects to COM Port 0 of
LASER IMAGER, set EIB Port to 0. If MIM connects to COM port 1 of LASER IMAGER, set EIB Port to 1.)
8E8820 – NOV 2003 5-5
SERVICE MANUAL
This page is intentionally blank.
5-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
Section 6: Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
Introduction
This section provides instructions for setting up these MIMs to function as PRINT SERVERS:
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)
• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)
The instructions set up the PRINT SERVERS to send images to these PRINTERS:
• Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER
• Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER
• Kodak Ektascan 160 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8300 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / PLUS
• Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / STANDARD
• Kodak DryView 8600 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8610 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / PLUS
• Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / STANDARD
• Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER
• Kodak DryView 969 HQ LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 969 HQT LASER IMAGER
To set up a PRINT SERVER, you must have:
• A LAPTOP COMPUTER with the correct “MIM Service Application” software. See Section 2.
• The CABLES and HARDWARE installed on the system. See Section 3.
• The system software upgraded. If this installation is an upgrade, the MIM has:
– The current MIM Application software. See Section 4.
– The necessary software licenses. See Section 4.
• The LASER IMAGER that will be the destination for the MIM PRINT SERVER correctly set up. See Section 5.
This section includes these procedures for setting up a PRINT SERVER:
Checking Service Tracking
Setting Up the Network Address of the PRINT SERVER
Setting Up Network Profiles for a 25 PS in a Mobile Van
Setting Up the Network Input to the PRINT SERVER
Setting Up the KEYPAD
Setting Up the Destination for Single PRINTER Setups
Setting Up the Destination for Dual PRINTER Setups
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-1
SERVICE MANUAL
Checking Service Tracking
[1] Connect the Service LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM.
Note
You will need the IP Address of the MIM to connect. For a new MIM, locate the IP Address in the pouch on the side of the MIM.
MIMs re-ghosted with V_6.1 software will have these IP Addresses:
• 123.123.123.10 for MIM 100, MIM 200 and 25 PS
• 123.123.123.200 RAS IP - for all MIMs
[2] Start the “MIM Service Application.”
[3] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Service Tracking Information.
Note
The screen displayed on your system might be slightly different from this screen.
[4] Check that the information in the “Service Tracking Information” window is correct.
[5] Did you change information?
• Yes: Click [OK].
• No: Click [Cancel].
[6] Go to the next procedure to set up the Network Address.
6-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
Table 6–1 Input Parameters: Service Tracking Information
Input Parameter
Site/Hospital Name
K Number
Serial Number
Model
Service Code
Power-On-Hours
Service Phone Number
NT Product ID
MIM Application Version
Description
Where the MIM is located. This appears as an annotation if enabled within the “SCU Connection Database.”
The K Number assigned to this product by manufacturing. This should match the number on the tag on the side of the MIM.
The Serial Number assigned to this product by manufacturing. This number should match the number on the Serial Plate decal on the MIM.
Indicates the type of equipment.
Range
1-14 alphanumeric characters
1 -11 alphanumeric characters
1 - 6 alphanumeric characters
For PRINT SERVERS:
MIM 200, 25 PS
Indicates the service code of the equipment.
The number of hours that the MIM has been energized.
The software updates this number every hour. This value is used for product reliability analysis.
Telephone number of the local Technical Support Center:
1-800-328-2910. For the U.S. only.
Product ID for setting up the license for the
Windows NT operating system. Must be unique for each
MIM.
1 - 6 numeric digits
0 - 20 alphanumeric characters
This is a “view only” field. Shows the version level of the application software. For example: 5.0b12
4 alphanumeric fields field 1 = 5 characters field 2 = 3 characters field 3 = 7 characters field 4 = 5 characters
3 - 19 alphanumeric characters
1st number = release level.
Letter = development level, alpha or beta. Last number = sequence number for successive release levels.
Keypad Interfaces
Delivery Interfaces
Viewable only.
The type of output board installed along with the service code, serial number, board revision and firmware level.
Serial number only. 1-6 alphanumeric characters
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-3
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up the Network Address of the PRINT SERVER
The “MIM Service Application” allows you to view and modify the parameters for the TCP/IP and Ethernet circuit that are used to set up the MIM as a device on the network. In most MIMs the RJ45 Ethernet connector is on the CPU MOTHERBOARD. In some MIMs the RJ45 connector is on a NETWORK BOARD located in a slot in the back of the MIM. In either case, you will use the LAPTOP COMPUTER to set it up.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select: Configure>Network.
[2] Determine from the customer if you must change any of the factory default settings in the “MIM Network Configuration” window.
[3] See Table 6-2 on
for descriptions of the parameters in the “MIM Network Configuration” window.
• Node Name: A name that identifies the MIM on the Local Area Network (LAN). The Node Name of a PRINT
SERVER is also the COMPUTER name of the MIM.
• IP Address: See Network Administrator
• Subnet Mask: See Network Administrator
• Gateway Address: See Network Administrator
• RAS Server Begin and End IP Addresses: See Network Administrator. The 2 addresses must be sequential, and the
End IP Address must be higher than the Begin IP Address.
[4] If you changed any information, click [OK] and update the LABEL on the side of the MIM. If you did not change information, click [Cancel].
Note
Changing the Node Name of the MIM will increase the boot time by up to 4 minutes on the next boot only.
[5] At the message “Changes will take effect the next time the MIM is restarted,” click [OK].
[6] Shut down the MIM from the MIM Service Application Admin menu, and select Restart from the next window.
[7] Go to “Setting Up the Network Input.”
6-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
Table 6–2 Input Parameters: Network Information
Input Parameter
Node Name
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Transceiver Type
RAS Server Begin
IP Address
RAS Server End IP
Address
Description
A unique name that identifies the local COMPUTER to TCP/IP. This name should be meaningful for the location. The Node Name for a PRINT SERVER
(SCP) is also the computer name of the MIM.
The unique address that identifies a specific node in a network. Add the unique address name to the LABEL on the side of the MIM.
The subnet mask works with the IP address to subdivide the network into more than 1 network.
The IP Address of the router used in a wide area network (WAN) configuration. No data in this field is necessary for the “MIM Service Application” software.
The TRANSCEIVER type of the NETWORK
BOARD or circuit used for network communications.
This is a “view only” field.
4 fields (0 - 255) in which each field is separated by a period
4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period
Range
1 - 15 alphanumeric characters plus hyphen: “-”
4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period
UTP (RJ45) is the only option for the MIM 200 or 25 PS. Although the MIM 100 has various options, RJ45 is recommended. These options are available only when using the NETWORK
COMBO CARD 10base:
• UTP (RJ45)
• Thickwire (10 base 5)
• Thinwire (10 base 2)
4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period
Beginning IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool. The Begin IP Address must be lower than the End IP Address and located on the same subnet. The Begin and End IP Addresses must be sequential.
Ending IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool. The End IP Address must be higher than the
Begin IP Address and located on the same subnet. The
Begin and End IP Addresses must be sequential.
4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-5
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up Network Profiles for a “Mobile” 25 PS
For a 25 PS installed in a Mobile Van to connect to the network at different customer sites, a different Network Profile for each site is necessary. The IP Addresses can be set up in the “MIM Service Application” or on the KEYPAD by using “Network
Profiles.”
Creating Network Profiles Using the “MIM Service Application”
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Network Profiles.
[2] Enter information in the fields of the “Create Network Profiles” window:
• Profile Name: Enter the name of the site.
• Node ID: Enter a name that will identify the 25 PS to TCP/IP, for example: “MIM25.”
• For all Address entries: See the local Network Administrator.
6-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
[3] After entering the parameters, click [OK]. The “Network Profile Management” window will display a list of all Profile
Names that have been selected for this 25 PS.
Important
The correct Network Profile for each site must be selected at the KEYPAD before the 25 PS can be used at that site. See
Network Profiles at the KEYPAD” on Page 6 – 8
.
[4] After creating the Network Profile, advance to “Setting Up the Network Input.”
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-7
SERVICE MANUAL
Creating Network Profiles at the KEYPAD
[1] At the KEYPAD, press [Menu].
[2] On the Main Menu, press the [Down Arrow] until > points to Service Menu.
[3] Press [Menu].
[4] On the Service Menu, press the [Down Arrow] until > points to Configuration Menu.
[5] Press [Menu].
[6] On the Configuration Menu, press the [Down Arrow] until > points to Network Profiles.
[7] Press [Menu].
[8] Use the [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] keys to select Add to Profile.
[9] Press [Menu].
[10] Select Add Profile.
[11] On the Network Profiles menu:
• Use the [Up Arrow} or [Down Arrow] keys to scroll through the alphabet and numbers to select the Profile Name for the site.
• Use the [Up Arrow} or [Down Arrow] keys to select a Node ID name that will identify the 25 PS to TCP/IP, for example “MIM25.”
• Enter all fields. See the local Network Administrator for addresses.
[12] After setting up the Network Profile, advance to “Setting Up the Network input.”
Important
The correct Network Profile for each site must be selected at the KEYPAD before the 25 PS can be used at that site. Network profiles can be Selected, Viewed, Edited or Deleted at the Keypad.
6-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up the Network Input
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Network.
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
Caution
Changing parameters in this menu will take the system off-line.
[2] Click [Add].
Important
Except to select the “DICOM Port Number” or “Com Port” do not change information in the “Network Input Parameters” window. See Table 6-3.
Table 6–3 Network Input Parameter - Settings
DICOM Port Number
Primary Control
Type
Primary Control
Com Port
Configurable from 1 - 65535. Generally set to 1024 or 5040. Use default: “Keypad - Conventional” Port 5, 7, 9 or 11
[3] In the pull-down menu for “Com Port” the following are the standard port assignments:
• For MIM 200 2.4 GHz, select COM11.
• For all other MIM 200, select COM9.
• For 25 PS, select COM5.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-9
SERVICE MANUAL
Note
Com Port assignments may need to change for Combo boxes. See Table 6-4 on Page 3 – 8 for the functions and locations of
COM ports for all MIMs.
[4] Click [OK].
[5] Click [Close].
6-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
Setting Up the KEYPAD for Date Format and Operating Language
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Keypads>Modify.
Caution
Changing these parameters will take the system off-line.
[2] Select the Operating Language from the Pull-down Menu.
[3] Select either the “American” or “European” format for display of the date.
[4] To store this configuration, click [OK].
Setting Up the KEYPAD for Correct Time Zone
This procedure applies to both the DISPLAY KEYPAD and the PRINT KEYPAD.
[1] On the KEYPAD, press [Menu].
[2] On the “Main Menu,” press the [Down Arrow] until > points to Service Menu.
[3] Press [Menu].
[4] On the “Service Menu,” press the [Down Arrow] until > points to Machine Setup Menu.
[5] Press [Menu].
[6] On the “Machine Setup Menu,” press the [Down Arrow] until > points to Select Time Zone.
[7] To select the time zone:
• Press the [Up Arrow} or [Down Arrow] until > points to the correct time zone.
• Press [Menu] to select the time zone.
• Press [Menu] to exit.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-11
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up the Destination - Single PRINTER Setups
This procedure applies to MIMs with single PRINTER destinations. If the system includes an 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER
PRINTER Setups” on Page 6 – 16 and do the procedure for setting up dual PRINTER destinations.
Important
See the Tables and this information for the Destination Parameters.
[1] At the “Service Application” window, select Configure>Destination.
Note
With any type of CABLE, a printing or imaging destination connected to the MIM is a direct connection.
[2] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select the sequence:
• [Add]
• [Print]
• [Direct]
• [Qualified]
6-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
[3] At the “Choose a New Direct Print Destination” window, select the correct PRINTER and click [OK].
Important
The information in the General parameters window depends on the destination PRINTER. The window in the figure is for an
for descriptions of all parameters that can be displayed.
The Logical Name for a PRINT SERVER is also the AE Title for the PRINTER.
[4] At the General parameters window, enter:
• Logical Name - User defined. This is the AE Title the SCU should target.
• IP Address - Necessary only if an Ethernet OUTPUT BOARD is used.
– 100.100.100.40 for 8200 LASER IMAGERS
– 100.100.100.30 for 160 LASER IMAGERS
• Memory, Image Pixels - 32
• Node ID - 0 to 6. Necessary only for 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS.
[5] Click [Next].
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-13
SERVICE MANUAL
Note
The numbers the “Media” information window displays on the LAPTOP COMPUTER might not match the numbers displayed on the window above.
[6] In the “Media” window, select all media that the customer will use. Check with the customer on film sizes. The table shows all film sizes allowed by LASER IMAGERS/PRINTERS for Kodak.
Film Size
35 x 43 cm
35 x 35 cm
11 x 14 in.
8 x 10 in.
IMAGERS/PRINTERS
8100, 8200, 8700, 969HQT, 160 LASER IMAGERS; 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS
8200 LASER IMAGER; 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS
8200, 8500 LASER IMAGERS; 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS
8300, 8600, 969HQ LASER IMAGERS; 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS
Important
You must select a media base for each medium selected. See “Format Parameters” on Page 6 – 27.
[7] If the destination printer is a Kodak DryView LASER IMAGER, click [Next]. The “Output Parameters” window will display for some Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS.
6-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
[8] If the “Output Parameters” window displays, check that the Output Parameters agree with the set up of the LASER
IMAGER.
Important
The application software automatically selects defaults for the destination parameters. To select values other than the defaults, you must use the “Supported Items” windows for the other groups of parameters.
[9] Click [Finish] to select the defaults for these destination parameters:
• Supported Items
• Interpolation
• Format Types
• Page Formatting
• Image Processing
• M952 Usage
Note
When [Finish] is clicked, the “Installed Destinations” window will display and the MIM will process the parameter information.
[10] When processing is completed, click [Close].
[11] Advance to “Completing Configuration of the Destinations.”
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-15
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up the Destination - Dual PRINTER Setups
This procedure applies to applications that include an 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER or 969 HQ LASER IMAGER that controls 2 destinations.
Important
See the Tables and this procedure for detailed information on the Destination Parameters.
[1] At the “Service Application” window, select Configure>Destination. The “Installed Destinations” window will display.
Note
If a printing destination is connected to the MIM, it is a direct connection, regardless of CABLE connection type.
[2] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select the sequence:
• [Add]
• [Print]
• [Direct]
• [Qualified]
[3] At the “Choose a New Direct Print Destination” window, select the correct destination from the list: 8800/8500, 8800/8700 or 8800/969HQ. Then click [OK].
6-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
Important
The Logical Name for a PRINT SERVER is also the AE Title for the PRINTER. The SCU selects a PRINTER by Logical Name
(AE Title).
[4] At the General parameters window, enter:
• Logical Name - The 2 destinations must be set up separately. Name them correctly. For example, call the first destination 8800_prtA and the second destination 8800_prtB.
• Memory, Image Pixels - 32
[5] If the first destination is the default destination, enter a check mark in the field for “Set As Default Destination for ambiguous DICOM AE Title:”
Note
This destination is where films will be printed if the SCU targets an AE Title tha is not an exact match fo the Logical Name.
[6] Click [Next].
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-17
SERVICE MANUAL
Note
The numbers that the “Media” information window displays on the LAPTOP COMPUTER might not match the numbers displayed in the window above.
[7] In the “Media” window, select all media that the customer will use. Check with the customer, if necessary, on film sizes.
The table shows the correct film sizes for the Kodak DryView 8800 DUAL PRINTERS.
Film Size
35 x 43 cm
11 x 14 in.
8 x 10 in.
PRINTERS
8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER/8700 LASER IMAGER;
8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER/969HQ LASER IMAGER
8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER/8500 LASER IMAGER;
8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER/969HQ LASER IMAGER
8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER/969HQ LASER IMAGER
Important
You must select a media base for each medium selected. See “Format Parameters” on Page 6 – 27.
[8] Click [Next] to display the “Output Parameters” window.
6-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
[9] Select “Printer 1” at the top of the “Output Parameters” window.
[10] Set the “Communication” variables to match those of the 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER.
[11] Set the “Image Transfer” variables to match those of the 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER. Pay special attention to: “Pixel
Depth,” Acquire Mode,” and “Transfer Rate.”
Note
The application software automatically selects defaults for these groups of destination parameters. To select values other than the defaults, advance to the “Supported Items” windows.
[12] Click [Finish] to select the defaults for these destination parameters:
• Supported Items
• Interpolation
• Format Types
• Page Formatting
• Image Processing
• M952 Usage
Note
When [Finish] is clicked, the “Installed Destinations” window will display and the MIM will process the parameter information.
[13] When processing is completed, click [Close].
[14] Return to “Setting Up the Destination - Dual PRINTER Setups” on Page 6 – 16
, Step 1, and set up the second destination.
For the second destination in a dual PRINTER setup:
• In Step 3, select the second destination.
• In Step 4, enter the Logical Name for the second destination. This name should be logically related to the name for the first destination.
• In Step 5, if the second destination is to be the default destination, enter a check mark in the field for “Set As Default
Destination for ambiguous DICOM AE Title:”.
• In Step 9, the second destination, “Printer 2,” will automatically be selected.
[15] Advance to “Completing Configuration of the Destinations” below.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-19
SERVICE MANUAL
Completing Configuration of the Destinations
[1] Check that you correctly set up the destination(s) by running a test print.using “MIM Service Application”
Diagnostics>System.
[2] After completing configuration of the PRINT SERVER, advance to:
Type of System Go To:
PRINT SERVER Section 8. “Obtaining Optimum Images”
COMBO BOX Section 7. “Setting Up a MODALITY Server”
Parameter Tables
Important
Do not change any of the items in the tables for a qualified destination unless directed by the TSC. If an item is not checked in the “Supported Items” or “Media Information” windows, the customer will not be able to use that item.
• The KEYPAD of the MIM will not display a feature or function that is not allowed.
• The MIM will not recognize a request for an item that the destination does not support.
6-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 6–4 General Parameters
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
Item
Logical Name
IP Address
Description
Site-specific name that must be entered for a Destination.
The “Logical Name” is also the “SCP AE Title” for the destination and is used by any SCU that wants to use this destination. A unique logical name for the MIM is necessary across all currently installed destinations.
Site-specific address that uniquely identifies the
Destination on the network. Necessary only when the destination and input to the PRINT SERVER are on an
Ethernet cable. Duplicate IP Addresses for installed destinations are allowed if the DICOM AE Titles are unique for each Destination.
Database Name The name of the Destination, if it is being installed using a known destination from the qualified destination database. This is a “view only” field.
Model The model of the Destination. The product uses this data to optimize the page format validation for the particular
Destination. This is a “view only” field.
ngenge
1 - 9 alphanumeric characters
No spaces allowed.
Underscores and hyphens are allowed.
4 fields of 0 - 255 where each field is separated by a period: For example: 149.110.98.10.
1 - 13 alphanumeric characters.
1 - 12 alphanumeric characters. 1120 and 2180
LASER PRINTERS, Kodak Dryview LASER
IMAGERS, 160 LASER IMAGER, Kodak
DryView PACS LINK 9410 ACQUISITION
SYSTEM.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-21
SERVICE MANUAL
Item
Memory
Node ID
Description
Memory in mega pixels residing in the Destination. The product uses this value to do format validation. This value is site-specific. A value must be in this field for the
“MIM Service Application.”
1 - 128. For 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS, obtain page store information from the
PRINTER’S CES port. For Kodak DryView
LASER IMAGERS, obtain by setting General log level to 5 after LASER IMAGER is installed and checking “Available Memory = log output” with system in Idle state.
1 - 6. Default is 6.
ngenge
The node assigned to the CPOI BOARD in the 1120 or
2180 LASER PRINTER. Node ID must be unique and not conflict with any Node IDs assigned to any CP
Interfaces installed in the PRINTER. A value must be in this field for the “MIM Service Application.”
6-22 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 6–5 Media Information Parameters
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
Size
Item
[Media Info]
Description
Select [Media Info] to display the Media Information in this table.
Media sizes recognized by the Destination.
Maximum
Columns
Maximum number of pixels in the x-direction for a media size. Maximum columns can be selected for each media size. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Maximum Rows Maximum number of pixels in the y-direction for a media size. Maximum rows are selectable for each media size with or without “common” text. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Maximum Rows with Common
Text
Types
Maximum number of pixels in the y-direction for a media size. Maximum rows can be selected for each media size with or without “common” text. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Media types recognized by the Destination. Media types can be selected for each media size. “Any” indicates that the Destination will use the media type that matches the media size selected (blue or clear). The selections “Reflective” and
“Transparent” are valid for color printing.
Range
N/A
35 x 43 cm,
35 x 35 cm,
11 x 14 in.,
10 x 12 in.,
8.5 x 11 in.,
8 x 10 in., 4 x 6 in.,
A4
1 - 9999
1 - 9999
1 - 9999
Any, Blue, Clear,
Reflective (Paper),
Transparent (Film).
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-23
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 6–6 Output Parameters
Item
Command Set
Baud Rate
Description
Used for data transmission to the direct destination.
Baud rate of the SERIAL PORT for data transmission to the direct destination.
Range
952 or SuperSet
300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200,
38400
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Parity
Pixel Depth
Header Mode
Number of data bits in each pixel in the data transmission on the SERIAL PORT. 5, 6, 7, 8; Default 8
Number of stop bits in each pixel the data transmission on the SERIAL PORT.
Parity setting for the data transmission on the SERIAL PORT.
Depth of the pixel data that the MIM will send in a data packet.
Acquire Mode
Determines if the MIM will send a header with the data packet to the direct destination OUTPUT BOARD. The header includes the size of the acquired image. If “No Header” is selected, the size of the acquired images must remain constant.
Determines whether the acquire mode for the digital input port will be Line or
Frame. If Line, the data comes across 1 line at a time.
Transfer Rate Data transfer rate of the digital image port from the MIM to the direct destination.
Applies only to the COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL) BOARD.
Acquire Timeout Time interval allowed to transfer the image from the MIM to the direct destination.
1, 1.5, 2; Default 1
None, Even, Odd
8, 12; Default 8
No Header, Header;
Default Header
Line, Frame
1000, 2000, 4000
KHz
1 - 90 seconds;
Default 60
6-24 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 6–7 Parameters for “Supported Items”
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
Item
[Supported
Items]
Collation
Description
Select [Supported Items] to display the features in this table.
Enables “study mode operation” at the KEYPAD and has the Destination print all of the films that are in the same “study.” Select if the destination allows Collation.
Common Text Enables the user to enter “common” text information including the macros for time/date, etc. at the KEYPAD for printing at the bottom of each film. This parameter will also be used by the MIM when doing format validation.
Select if the destination allows Common Text.
Tonescaling on
Image Basis
Enables the changing of curve shape in the middle of a page and selecting a curve shape series from the KEYPAD.Select if the destination allows Tonescaling on Image Basis.
Pivot Density Enables the selection of a pivot density setting from the KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows Pivot Density.
Print Quality
Remote Image
Deletion
Rotation
Enables the selection of print quality to be used when printing the page from the
KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows different Printing Qualities.
Allows images acquired from the imaging source/image node to be sent to the destination.
Select if the destination allows Remote Image Deletion.
When enabled, allows the user to select “landscape” for a page format that is normally
“portrait” and vice versa. Also used by the MIM when validating the format. Select if the
MIM allows page Rotation.
N/A
Range
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-25
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 6–8 Interpolation Parameters
Item Description
[Interpolation] Select [Interpolation] to display the features in this table.
Interpolation enables you to select an interpolation process from the KEYPAD or from other inputs.
Range
N/A
No Magnification,
Bilinear,
Replication,
Cubic Spline,
Cubic Convolution 2,
Cubic Convolution 3
6-26 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 6–9 Format Parameters
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
Item
[Formats]
Description
Select [Formats] to display the information indicated in this table.
Custom Formats Custom formats enable the user to select formats 101 and 102 from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Row Symmetric
Formats
Slide Format
Super Slide
Format
Enables the user to enter formats that only have 1 line of symmetry in the vertical direction from an Autofilming Link or through a DICOM network. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Enables the user to select the “slide format” from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Enables the selection of super slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs.
The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Allowable
Formats
A list of formats that the destination allows. This list can be customized to control what destination the user sees. Each format (1up, 2up, 4up, etc.) has a setting.
N/A
Yes, No
Range
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-27
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 6–10 Page Formatting Parameters
Item
[Formatting
Parameters]
Aspect Ratio Mix on
Page
Image Size Mix in
Std Fmt
DICOM Annotation
Box
Requested Size
Scale
Requested Size Mix in Row
Trim
Aspect Ratio Mix in
Row
Image Size Mix in
Row
Requested Image
Size
Description
Select [Formatting] to display the information in this table.
Select if the destination allows a mixed aspect ratio on the same page. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Select if the destination allows a mixed image size on a format. This indicates if the image size can be changed on a page with a row/column symmetric format. The images will be scaled independently to print all of the images at the same time. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Select if the destination allows page annotation. This indicates if the destination allows the use of the DICOM Annotation Box for selecting the band of text that will be placed on each film. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Select if the destination allows the requested image to be scaled to fit the image cell on the destination. The PRINTER will notify the output that the operation was completed.
The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Select if all images in a row should have the same requested size. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Select if the destination allows Trim. This allows the user to select a border around each image from the KEYPAD or from other input devices.
Select if the destination allows Mixed aspect ratio in the same row. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Select if the destination allows a mixed image size in row. This indicates if the image size can be changed in a row independent of the page format. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Select if the destination allows the user to request an image size. This indicates if the destination can print images at a specific size.The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Range
N/A
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
6-28 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
Item
Requested Size Mix on Page
Supports True
Landscape
Maximum Images
Per Band
Maximum Bands
Per Page
Maximum Image
Columns
Maximum Image
Rows
Pixel Pitch
Minimum
Horizontal
Separation
Minimum Vertical
Separation
Trim Width - When
Enabled
Trim Width - When
Disabled
Image Pad
Description
Select if all images on the page should have the same requested size. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Select if the destination allows a true landscape orientation.
Enter the maximum images per band allowed by the destination.
Enter the maximum bands per page that is allowed by the destination.
Enter the number of maximum image columns that are allowed by the destination
Enter the number of maximum image rows that are allowed by the destination.
Enter the number of pixels per millimeter for the destination.
Enter the number of columns that separate images in the horizontal direction.The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Enter the number of rows that separate image bands in the vertical direction. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Enter the number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction when trim is on. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Enter the number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction when trim is not on. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Enter the number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.
Range
Yes, No
Yes, No
1 - 32
1 - 32
0 - 5000
0 - 5400
0 - 32
0 - 20
0 - 10
0 - 5
0 - 5
0 - 10
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-29
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 6–11 Image Processing Parameters
Item
[Image Processing]
Color
Color/Grayscale Same Page
Grayscale
Minify/Crop
Maximum Image DMAX
Description
Select [Image Processing] to display the information indicated in this table.
Select if the destination allows color images.
Select if the destination allows the user to place color and grayscale images on the same page.
Select if the destination allows grayscale images.
Formerly Decimation. Indicates if the destination can recognize images with actual dimensions that exceed the dimensions of the printable film area. Select if the destination allows Minify/Crop.
Enter the maximum image DMAX value that is allowed by the destination.
N/A
Range
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
0.0 - 3.8
6-30 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 6–12 M952 Usage Parameters
Setting Up a PRINT SERVER
[M952]
Item
Minimum Horizontal/Vertical
Magnification
Maximum Horizontal/Vertical
Magnification
Minimum DMAX for M952
Command Devices
Description
Select [M952] to display the information indicated in this table.
Enter the minimum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is allowed by the destination. This parameter does not apply to store destinations.
Enter the maximum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is allowed by the destination. This parameter does not apply to store destinations.
Enter the minimum DMAX value that is allowed by the destination when mapping to click counts.
N/A
0.64
0.64
Range
1.5 - 2.0
8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-31
SERVICE MANUAL
This page is intentionally blank.
6-32 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Section 7: Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Introduction
This section provides instructions for setting up the following devices to function as MODALITY SERVERS:
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)
Before doing the procedures in this section, check that:
• The LAPTOP COMPUTER has the current “MIM Service Application” software. See Section 2.
• The system hardware and CABLES have been installed. See Section 3.
• The software for the MIM is correct. If this installation is an upgrade, the MIM must have:
– The correct application software for the MIM. See Section 4.
– The necessary software licenses. See Section 4.
The following pages include instructions for:
Checking Service Tracking
Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the Network
Setting Up the Input for a DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD
Setting Up the Input for a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD
Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for Autofilming
Setting Up a Network Print Destination
Setting Up a Network Store Destination
Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for a HIS/RIS Gateway
Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the BAR CODE READER Option
Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the MODALITY Store Option
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-1
SERVICE MANUAL
Checking Service Tracking
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM.
Note
You will need the IP Address of the MIM to connect:
• For a new MIM, locate the IP Address on the side of the MIM.
• After re-ghosting, the IP Address for all V_6.1 MIMs is 123.123.123.10
[2] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Service Tracking Information.
[4] Did you change information?
• Yes: Click [OK].
• No: Click [Cancel].
[5] Advance to the next procedure to set up the MODALITY SERVER for the network.
7-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Table 7–1 Input Parameters: Service Tracking Information
Input Parameter
Site/Hospital Name
K Number
Serial Number
Model
Description
The location of the MIM. This will appear as an annotation if enabled within the SCU
Connection Database.
The K Number assigned to this MIM by manufacturing.
The Serial Number assigned by manufacturing to the MIM family. The “Service Tracking” window displays the corresponding service code below the Serial Number.
Indicates the type of equipment.
Range
1-14 alphanumeric characters
1 -11 alphanumeric characters
1 - 6 alphanumeric characters
MODALITY SERVERS: MIM 200,
MIM 100NR
4 digit code
1 - 6 numeric digits
Service Code
Power-On-Hours
Indicates the service code of the equipment.
The number of hours that the MIM has been energized. The software updates this number every hour. This value is used for MIM reliability analysis.
Service Telephone Number Telephone number of the local Technical
Support Center, for U.S. only.
NT Product ID Product ID for the license for the Windows NT operating system. Must be unique for each
MIM.
0 - 20 alphanumeric characters
MIM Application Version
Acquisition Interfaces
This is a “view only” field. Shows the version level of the application software for the MIM.
For example: 6.0
Information for each interface is displayed for the MIM 200.
“Service Code”: This is a “view only” field.
“Serial Number”: Check the DATA PLATE of the INPUT or OUTPUT BOARD.
“Board/Rev ID,” “Firmware,” and “Driver
Versions” are “view only” fields.
4 alphanumeric fields field 1 = 5 characters field 2 = 3 characters field 3 = 7 characters field 4 = 5 characters
3 - 19 alphanumeric characters
The number = release level.
If included following the number:
Letter = development level, alpha or beta.
Last number = sequence number for successive release levels.
Video or Digital: 3433, 3468, 3469, or 3743
Enter the Serial Number to automatically update the other fields for Interface Type.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-3
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the Network
The “MIM Service Application” allows you to check and set the MIM network parameters that are necessary to set up the MIM as a device on the network.
Important
The Remote Access Service (RAS) provides IP addresses for clients, enabling access to other MIMs on the network. See the
Network Administrator for RAS IP Addresses. 2 IP Addresses per site are necessary on the same subnet as the MIM: 1 for the
MIM and 1 for the client.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select: Configure>Network.
[2] Determine from the customer the information to enter in the “MIM Network Configuration” window.
for descriptions of the parameters in the “MIM Network Configuration” window.
• Node Name: Identifies the MIM on the Local Area Network (LAN). The Node Name is also the AE Title for a
MODALITY SERVER. See Network Administrator.
• IP Address: See Network Administrator
• Subnet mask: See Network Administrator
• Gateway Address: See Network Administrator
• RAS Server Begin and End IP Addresses: See Network Administrator. The 2 addresses must be sequential, and the
End IP Address must be higher than the Begin IP Address.
[4] If you changed any information, click [OK] and update the LABEL on the side of the MIM. If you did not change information, click [Cancel].
Note
Changing the Node Name of the MIM will increase the boot time by up to 4 minutes on the next boot only.
[5] At the message “Changes will take effect the next time the MIM is restarted...,” click [OK].
[6] Shut down the MIM from the MIM Service Application Admin menu, and select Restart from the next window.
[7] Advance to the correct procedure:
INTERFACE BOARD Go To:
DIGITAL “Setting Up the Input for a DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD.”
VIDEO 60, 150LC, or 150 “Setting Up the Input for a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD.”
7-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Table 7–2 Input Parameters: Network Information
Input Parameter
Node Name
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Transceiver Type
RAS Server Begin
IP Address
RAS Server End IP
Address
Description
A unique name that identifies the local MIM to the TCP/IP network. This name should identify the location of the MIM. For a MODALITY
SERVER, the Node Name is also the AE Title.
Update the LABEL on the side of the MIM.
The unique address that identifies a node in a network. Update the LABEL on the side of the
MIM.
Works with the IP Address to subdivide the network into more than 1 network.
The IP Address of the Router used in a wide area network (WAN) setup. The “MIM Service
Application” software does not require you to enter data in this field.
The TRANSCEIVER type of the Ethernet circuit or NETWORK BOARD used for communication on the network. This is a “view only” field.
4 fields (0 - 255) in which each field is separated by a period
4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period
Range
1 - 15 alphanumeric characters plus hyphen: “-”
4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period
UTP (RJ45) is the only option for the MIM 200.
Although the MIM 100 has various options, RJ45 is recommended. The following options are available only when using the NETWORK COMBO CARD
10base:
• UTP (RJ45)
• Thickwire (10 base 5)
• Thinwire (10 base 2)
4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period
Beginning IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool. This IP Address must be lower than the End IP Address and located on the same subnet. The Begin and End IP Addresses must in sequence.
End IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool. This IP Address must be higher than the
Begin IP Address and located on the same subnet. The Begin and End IP Addresses must in sequence.
4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-5
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up the Input for a DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD
Setting Up the Basic Input Parameters
Use this procedure to set up the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD for the MIM 200 or MIM 100.
• Will the primary control of the MIM be the KEYPAD or an Autofilming Link?
• Will the MIM be connected to a Qualified or Unqualified MODALITY?
– A Qualified Input indicates that the MODALITY has been checked in the field with correct parameters. The database in the Service Software for the MIM may also include this MODALITY in the Qualified list.
– An Unqualified Input indicates that the MODALITY has not been checked in the field. Consult TSC before attempting to set up an Unqualified Input.
• Check that the operator can provide a clinical image to evaluate image quality after you finish setting up the Input. The image must contain:
– Grayscale including the brightest and darkest values (0 to 255 A/D Counts)
– White text on black background, or black text on white background
– Sharp transitions and vertical lines
Important
• New MIMs are set up with a “test” input. Before adding a new input, delete this existing input from the “Configuration” menu.
• Check the MODALITY DATABASE for information on parameters before continuing.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Direct Connect.
[2] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, highlight the “test” input and click [Delete].
[3] At the message, “Executing this command will delete the input from the system. Are you sure?” select [Yes]. The
KEYPAD goes off-line.
[4] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, select:
• [Add]
• [Digital]
• [Qualified]
7-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
[5] At the “Qualified Digital Modalities” window, select the correct MODALITY and click [OK].
Note
See Table 7–3 for descriptions of the Direct Connect Input Parameters.
[6] Enter the correct input parameters:
• Board/Channel: Select from the drop-down menu.
• Logical Name: Enter a name for the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD, for example: dig1, dig2.
• Database Name: For Unqualified MODALITIES only, enter a name for the MODALITY.
• Modality ID Name: Enter a shortened name for the MODALITY.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-7
SERVICE MANUAL
• Primary Control Type: KEYPAD or type of Autofilming connection. See Table 7–3.
• Primary Control COM Port: See Table 7–3.
• Auxiliary Control Type: Used only for Autofilming. See Table 7–3.
• Auxiliary Control COM Port: Used only for Autofilming. See Table 7–3.
• Aspect Ratio and Page Preallocation: See Table 7–3.
[7] Click [OK]. This will display the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window.
[8] Advance to “Setting Up the Digital Interface ‘Image’ Parameters.”
Table 7–3 Direct Connect Input Parameters
Input Parameter
Board
Channel Number
Description
INTERFACE BOARD on the PCI BUS.
Number of the channel of the INTERFACE
BOARD.
Name for the BOARD receiving the input.
DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD 1 or 2
Channel 1
Range
Logical Name 1 - 5 alphanumeric characters
Examples: MRI 1 or CTRM 1
1 - 30 alphanumeric characters Database Name A “view only” field for Qualified MODALTIES.
Name of MODALITY was selected from list of
Qualified MODALITIES. For Unqualified
MODALITIES, a name must be entered.
Modality ID Name Shortened version of MODALITY name. This name is printed on the film when the “Modality
ID” is selected for Common Text insertion.
Primary Control
Type
What the customer uses to control the MIM.
Primary Control
Com Port
Auxiliary Control
Keypad
Auxiliary Control
Port No.
1- alphanumeric characters
Fischer STU, etc.
Port for the KEYPAD or the SERIAL CONTROL
CABLE connection
Enables the KEYPAD for auxiliary control when
Autofilming is the primary control.
The COM Port for the KEYPAD when it is used for auxiliary control.
TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD
Autofilming: Hitachi, KCL, M952/P831, Siemens
(DASM, FSPOT, SPCI), 3M (DASM, FSPOT,
SPCI), Toshiba, YMS
KEYPAD: COM 5 for MIM 100. For MIM 200 it is COM 5, 7, 9 or 11.
Autofilming RS422: COM 4 for MIM 100NR. For
MIM 200 it is COM 4, 6, 8 or 10.
KEYPAD: Touchscreen or Conventional
Autofilming: On
Important: For a MIM with Autofilming,
“Auxiliary Control” is always On.
KEYPAD: COM 5 for MIM 100. For MIM 200 it is COM 5, 7, 9 or 11
Autofilming: COM4 or 6 for HCL, and COM5, 7 or 9 for KEYPAD.
1 - 255 Aspect Ratio:
Horizontal
Aspect Ratio:
Vertical
Horizontal component of pixel aspect ratio. The software automatically determines this ratio.
Aspect ratios not equal to 1:1 correct for nonsquare pixels.
Vertical component of pixel aspect ratio. The software automatically determines this ratio.
Aspect ratios not equal to 1:1 correct for nonsquare pixels.
Page Preallocation When enabled, this feature ensures that sufficient memory is available on the HARD DISK to prevent a “Buffer Full” condition while MIM stores a page.
1 - 255
On, Off
7-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Setting Up the Digital Interface “Image” Parameters
Important
• Set Up the digital input for the smallest image size used at the site.
• Check the MODALITY DATABASE to determine correct parameters.
• To advance to each item in the “Digital Interface Parameters” window, press [Tab] on the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
[1] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, select:
• [Acquisition]
• [Modify]
Note
If you want to see the “Digital Interface Parameters,” you can select:
• [Acquisition]
• [View]
[2] When the MIM prompts “Are you sure?”, click [OK].
[3] For Qualified MODALITIES, the parameters are automatically set. For Unqualified MODALITIES, all parameters in the
window must be set to the correct values. See Table 7–4 for parameter descriptions.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-9
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 7–4 Fields and [Buttons] for the “Digital Interface Parameters”
Parameter
Pixels per Line
Description
The default number of pixels per line that the MIM expects the Imaging Device to send.
This number will be used to determine format validation.
Lines per Image The default number of lines per image that the MIM expects the Imaging Device to send. This number will be used to determine format validation.
Parity Error-detection used by adding an even or odd number of 1’s to the binary word.
Line Timer
Range
1 - 4361
1 - 5348
None, Odd, or Even
1 - 240
Sync Mode
Pixel Depth
The number of seconds that the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD waits to receive a complete size or data packet from the Imaging Device.
If “Auto Sync” is selected, the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD will continue to acquire the image when a failure occurs during image acquisition.
If “No Sync” is selected, the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD will not continue to acquire the image when a failure occurs during image acquisition.
The number of bits per pixel.
No Sync,
Auto Sync
8
[4] After changing information, select [Set]. If the information is correct, select [Cancel].
[5] Use the following table to advance to the next procedure:
Primary Control Type
Autofilming
KEYPAD
Procedure
“Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for Autofilming”
Do the procedures that apply to this site:
• “Setting Up a Network Print Destination”
• “Setting Up a Network Store Destination”
• “Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for a HIS/RIS Gateway”
• “Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the MODALITY Store Option”
7-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Setting Up the Input for a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD
Setting Up the Basic Input Parameters
This procedure applies to all 3 VIDEO INTERFACE BOARDS: VIDEO 60, VIDEO 150LC, and VIDEO 150.
• Will the primary control of the MIM be the KEYPAD or an Autofilming Link?
• Will the MIM be connected to a Qualified or Unqualified MODALITY?
– A Qualified Input indicates that the MODALITY has been checked in the field with correct parameters. The database in the Service Software for the MIM may also include this MODALITY in the Qualified list.
– An Unqualified Input indicates that the MODALITY has not been checked in the field. Consult TSC before attempting to set up an Unqualified Input.
• Check that the operator can provide a clinical image to evaluate image quality after you finish setting up the Input. The image must contain:
– Grayscale including the brightest and darkest values (0 to 255 A/D Counts)
– White text on black background, or black text on white background
– Sharp transitions and vertical lines
Important
• The MIM comes from the factory set up with a “test” Input. Before adding a new Input, you should delete this existing Input from the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” menu.
• See Tables 7-6 through 7-11 for descriptions of the parameters that you will enter in this procedure.
• Consult the MODALITY DATABASE for parameter information before proceeding.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Direct Connect.
[2] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, highlight the “test” Input and click [Delete].
[3] At the message, “Executing this command will delete the input from the system. Are you sure?” select [Yes]. The
KEYPAD goes off-line.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-11
SERVICE MANUAL
[4] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, select:
• [Add]
• [Video]
• [Qualified Video xxx] or [Unqualified Video xxx], as necessary
[5] If you selected “Qualified Video xxx,” the “Qualified Video xxx Modalities” window displays:
(a) Highlight the name of the correct MODALITY.
(b) Click [OK] to display the “Direct Connect Input Parameters” window.
[6] Enter the correct input parameters:
• Board/Channel (monochrome or Color-RGB): Select from the drop-down menu.
7-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
• Logical Name: Select name of VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD, for example: vid1, vid2, etc.
• Database Name: For Unqualified MODALITIES only, enter name of MODALITY.
• Modality ID Name: Enter a short name for the MODALITY.
• Primary Control Type: KEYPAD or type of Autofilming connection. See Table 7–5.
• Primary Control COM Port: See Table 7–5.
• Auxiliary Control Type: Used only for Autofilming. See Table 7–5.
• Auxiliary Control COM Port: Used only for Autofilming. See Table 7–5.
• Aspect Ratio and Page Preallocation: See Table 7–5.
[7] Click [OK] to return to the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window.
[8] If the input is from a “Qualified” MODALITY, advance to “Using Auto Setup to Set Up the VIDEO INTERFACE
BOARD.”
[9] If the input is from an “Unqualified” MODALITY, consult TSC before entering parameters:
(a) Select [Acquisition] + [Modify] to display the “Video Board Setup” window (see Table 7–6).
(c) Enter parameter information from the MODALITY DATABASE and then click [OK].
(d) Repeat steps b and c for each of the 4 remaining parameter types that can be selected on the “Video Board Setup”
(e) After entering the parameters, select [Set Parameters] from the “Video Board Setup” window.
(f) Advance to “Using Auto Setup to Set Up the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD.”
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-13
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 7–5 Direct Connect Input Parameters
Parameter Description
Board / Channel INTERFACE BOARD on the PCI BUS / selected channel
Logical Name Name of the BOARD receiving the input.
Database
Primary Control
Type
Primary Control
COM Port
Name of the MODALITY. A “view only” field.
What the customer uses to control the MIM.
Port for the KEYPAD or the SERIAL CONTROL
CABLE connection
Auxiliary Control
Keypad
Auxiliary Control
Com Port
Aspect Ratio:
Horizontal
Aspect Ratio:
Vertical
Page Preallocation
When Autofilming is selected as the Primary Control,
“Auxillary Keypad” is automatically checked. The type of KEYPAD is selectable.
The COM Port for the KEYPAD when it is used for auxiliary control. If the KEYPAD is the Primary
Control, then the “Auxiliary Control Com Port” is not user changeable.
Horizontal component of pixel aspect ratio. The software automatically determines this ratio. When the aspect ratio is not 1:1, the software corrects for nonsquare pixels.
Vertical component of pixel aspect ratio. The software automatically determines this ratio. When the aspect ratio is not 1:1, the software corrects for non-square pixels.
When enabled, this feature ensures that sufficient memory is available on the HARD DISK to prevent a
“Buffer Full” condition while the MIM stores a page.
Range
VIDEO BOARD 1/Channel 1, 2, or 3, RGB
1 - 5 alphanumeric
1 - 30 alphanumeric
KEYPAD: Touchscreen or Conventional
Autofilming: Hitachi, KCL, M952/P831,
Siemens (DASM, FSPOT, SPCI), 3M (DASM,
FSPOT, SPCI) Toshiba, YMS
KEYPAD: COM 5 for MIM 100. For MIM 200 it is COM 5, 7, 9 or 11.
Autofilming RS422: COM 4 for MIM 100. For
MIM 200 it is COM 4, 6, 8 or 10.
KEYPAD: Touchscreen or Conventional
KEYPAD: COM 5 for MIM 100. For MIM 200 it is COM 5, 7, 9, 11.
1 - 255
1 - 255
On, Off
7-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 7–6 Windows“Video Board Setup”
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
The Terminate
Video Input panel applies to VIDEO
60 only. VIDEO
150LC is Active
Passthrough.
VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD
8E8820 – NOV 2003
VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD
7-15
SERVICE MANUAL
Parameter
Video Input Channel
Description
Allows selection of an RGB channel or monochrome.
Range
1,2,3, RGB or monochrome
[Config]
[Horizontal Parameters]
[Vertical Parameters]
[Gain and Offset]
[Sync Parameters]
[Pixel Clock Parameters]
[Auto Setup]
[Acquire]
Press to enter values for 5 sets of parameters.
[Constant Acquire]
Ignore Lock Detect on
Acquire
Do not enable this mode.
Ignore Signal Detect on
Acquire
Frame Average
Terminate Video Input. See
RS-232/RS-422 Converter in
Section 3.
Terminate Input Video
Terminate Ext CSyn
Image Display
Image Compression
Status
[Set Parameters]
[Set}
[Reset Parameters]
[Reset Board]
[OK] or [Close]
Automatically adjusts the values for certain parameters.
Automatically acquires and displays a test image. VIDEO 150 provides option of acquiring from “Current Settings” or “Last Saved” settings.
Do repetitive acquisitions.
When enabled, the MIM will acquire an image even if an error occurs.
The software will not compute the “Lock Detect Count”.
For VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: The MIM will acquire an image even if a signal is not detected.
This feature reduces the signal noise in the image. When it is selected, a window opens to the user to enter the number of frames (2-4) on which to base the calculation of the average.
For VIDEO 60 only. (Disabled for VIDEO 150LC.) Provides 75 ohms at video input. Without this termination the image will indicate horizontal ringing. MODALITIES with high pixel clock frequency will be affected most.
For VIDEO 150 only: Same as “Terminate Video Input” for VIDEO 60 described above.
For VIDEO 60 only: Provides termination for CSync.
For VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: Allows selection of previous region of interest for image display.
For VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: Provides ability to acquire an uncompressed normal lossy or high lossy image for display.
Grayed out for VIDEO 60 and 150LC. For VIDEO 150, displays the 9
“tasks” during Auto Setup.
For VIDEO 60 or 150LC only. Stores the parameter information permanently.
For VIDEO 150 only. Stores parameter information permanently if
“Temporary” is deselected. If “Temporary” is selected, stores until next time MIM is de-energized, then energized.
Resets the parameters either to the factory default or the last saved set.
For VIDEO 60 and 150LC only. Resets the BOARD to defaults.
Exits the window without saving changes.
Not Enabled
Yes, No
Yes, No default: Off
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
N/A
N/A
Permanent,
Temporary
Default, Last Saved
N/A
N/A
7-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 7–7 “Horizontal Parameters”
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD
8E8820 – NOV 2003
VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD
7-17
SERVICE MANUAL
Horizontal Parameter
Line Time
Total Pixels per Line
Display Time
Image Pixels
Pixel Clock Frequency
Sync Width
Front Porch
Back Porch
Blanking
Calculate
Hold
[Auto Horizontal
Centering]
Shift Image Pixels L/R
Description
Time in microseconds for one HSYNC cycle.
Number of pixel clock pulses that occur in one horizontal line.
Time in microseconds for active video in one horizontal line.
Number of image pixels per line. A combination of 4.
Pixel clock rate in MHz. The software calculates value.
Width in microseconds of the horizontal synchronization pulses.
Width in microseconds of the front porch. The software calculates the value.
Width in microseconds of the back porch.
Total in microseconds of the widths for the back porch, front porch. The software calculates this value.
For VIDEO 150 only. Calculates the pixel clock frequency using the
“Horizontal Line Time” and “Total Pixels per Line” with the option of holding constant the “Display Time” and/or “Image Pixels.” The software requires that values be entered for “Horizontal Line Time” and “Total
Pixels per Line.”
Determines which value you select for the constant during the setup.
Range
1.00 - 99.99
1 - 9999
1.00 - 99.99
1 - 9999
1.000 - 999.999
0.000 - 99.999
0.000 - 99.999
0.000 - 99.999
0.000 - 99.999
N/A
Display Time, Image
Pixels
N/A Do not select. Places the same number of black pixels on either side of the image. Uses the selection you make for “Shift Image Pixels...”.
The number of pixels that the image will move to the right or left when you select [Auto Centering]. Negative numbers move the image to the left, positive numbers to the right.
-9999 to 9999
7-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 7–8 Windows “Vertical Parameters”
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD
8E8820 – NOV 2003
VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD
7-19
SERVICE MANUAL
Vertical Parameter
Image Lines Per Frame
Total Lines Per Frame
Vertical Back Porch (H)
Vsync Width (H)
Serrations
Pre-equalization Width (H)
(Pre-Eq Width) Pulses
Post-equalization Width (H)
(Post-Eq Width) Pulses
Interlaced Image (Option)
Swap Fields (Option)
Interlaced Field Counter:
(in HSyncs)
Override
Vsync Serrations Present
Double H Frequency/Eq/
Serration
ASync Video Compensation
[Auto Vertical Centering]
Description
Number of vertical image lines per frame in the active video.
Number of vertical lines including vertical synchronization and equalization periods.
Number of vertical lines per field that occur after the vertical sync pulse and before the active video begins.
Width of the vertical synchronization pulse measured in Hsync pulses (H).
For VIDEO 150 only. Number of serration pulses that occur during the vertical synchronization pulse period. This number typically is 1 or 2 times the Vsync Width, and is set by the Double H Frequency/Eq/Serration” option. The software calculates the value.
Width of the pre-equalization period measured in Hsync pulses (H).
For VIDEO 150 only. Number of serration pulses that occur during the preequalization pulse period. This number typically is 1 or 2 times the Pre-
Equalization Width, and is set by the Double H Frequency/Eq/Serration” option. The software calculates the value.
Width of the post-equalization period measured in Hsync pulses (H).
For VIDEO 150 only. Number of serration pulses that occur during the postequalization pulse period. This number typically is 1 or 2 times the Post-
Equalization Width, and is set by the Double H Frequency/Eq/Serration” option. The software calculates the value.
Must be enabled if the image is interlaced.
Allows the order of the 2 fields (one for odd lines and one for even lines) of an interlaced image to be interchanged.
Value is automatically calculated for the number of lines or HSyncs by the software for interlaced Modalities only.
Indicates if the “Interlaced Field Counter: (in HSyncs) is overridden.
For VIDEO 150 only. Indicates that serration pulses exist during the Vsync period.
For VIDEO 150 only. If enabled, the frequency of occurrence of serration pulses during the vertical period is twice the rate of Hsync pulses. If not enabled, the frequencies are the same.
Selections for inserting serrating pulses.
Adjusts the top to bottom centering of the image on the film.
0 - 99
0 - 99
0 - 99
0 - 99
Yes, No
Yes, No
0 - 225
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
N/A
Range
1 - 9999
1 - 9999
1 - 999
1 - 99
0 - 99
7-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Figure 7–1
HF and LF Cable Compensation Parameters
Portion of SMPTE Pattern
BLACK WHITE
Pixels
1 2 3 4 5 6
WHITE
BLACK
H174_0064GC
HF LF
Important
The High Frequency (HF) response occurs at the transition of BLACK and WHITE in the SMPTE. The Low Frequency (LF) response begins at Pixel 4.
Table 7–9 Windows “Video Gain and Offset Parameters”
Parameter
Coarse Offset
Fine Offset
Coarse Gain
Fine Gain
LF Cable
Compensation
HF Cable
Compensation
Amp Offset
[Auto Level]
[Auto Offset]
Description
Coarse video offset control. One Coarse Offset step will provide a change of approximately 2 A/D counts.
Fine video offset control. One Fine Offset step will provide a change of approximately one-half A/D count.
Coarse video gain control. Set the gain level with the Coarse Gain before you use the Fine Gain.
Fine video gain control.
VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: Low frequency compensation. Calculated value. The lower the number, the longer the CABLE. See Figure
Page 7 – 21 and the “Cable Compensation Adjustment” on page 7-21.
VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: High frequency compensation. Calculated value. The lower the number, the longer the CABLE. See Figure
Page 7 – 21 and the “Cable Compensation Adjustment” on Page 7-21.
VIDEO 150 only: Sets the offset voltage level applied to the variable gain video amplifiers. Used with the coarse and fine gain offset controls.
VIDEO 150 only: Pressed to do automatic gain and offset calculations.
Requires an image with a grayscale bar or one with brightest white and brightest black.
Sets the offset. Requires an image with a grayscale bar or one with brightest white and brightest black.
Range
VIDEO 150: 45 - 255; default: 128
VIDEO 60 and 150LC: 0
- 255; default: 128
0 - 255; default: 128
0 - 255; default: 128
0 - 255; default: 128
0 - 255; default 128
0 - 255; default 128
0 - 255: default 150
N/A
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-21
SERVICE MANUAL
Parameter
[Auto Gain]
Description
Sets the gain. Requires an image with a grayscale bar or one with brightest white and brightest black.
[Manual Adjustment
Tool]
VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: Displays “Manual Gain/Offset” window, which provides ability to graphically plot the pixel values for lines in the image and manually adjust CABLE compensation values.
RGB Channel Select VIDEO 60 and 150LC manual adjustment only: Selects channel to be adjusted. For monochrome signals this setting is disabled and automatically set to input channel designated from Video Setup Dialog.
For RGB signals, a single channel can be adjusted separately, or all 3 GB channels can be adjusted simultaneously. Changing the value from a single channel to RGB will write over the settings for all channels with the last selected RGB channel.
Pixel Plot Line
Number
VIDEO 60 and 150LC manual adjustment only: Selects the line number to be plotted. Can be used to scroll through and plot lines in an image.
Plot Single Channel of RGB
[Set, Acquire and
Plot]
VIDEO 60 and 150LC manual adjustment only: Provides ability to plot a single channel of an RGB signal. This control is disabled for monochrome signals.
VIDEO 60 and 150LC manual adjustment only: Programs the parameters to the VIDEO BOARD, acquires an image and plots the pixel values for the designated line and channels. Displays the pixel plot window, if necessary.
N/A
Range
1 - 4096: default 1
N/A
N/A
Figure 7–2
VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD - Monochrome.
7-22 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Figure 7–3
VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Figure 7–4
VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD - RGB Color
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-23
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 7–5
VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD - Manual Adjustment
Table 7–10 Windows “Video Sync Parameters”
Parameter
Sync Input Source
RGB Sync Source
External Composite
Sync Polarity
Description
VIDEO 60 AND 150LC only: Selection of Sync Input Source, either Composite Video or External C Sync. Composite video is always the same channel as the video signal.
VIDEO 60 AND 150LC only: Channel selection for Sync
VIDEO 60 AND 150LC only: Polarity of the Sync Pulse.
Sync Input source
Composite Sync
Channel
VIDEO 150 only: Selection of Sync Input Source: Composite
Video, External Composite (Csync), or separate External
Hsync and External Vsync.
VIDEO 150 only: Input channel from which to derive the composite sync. Normally the same channel as the video signal, which will be selected automatically when you select [Set]
External Sync
Channel
VIDEO 150 only: Input channel from which to derive the external Csync, Hsync, or Hsync-Vsync. Normally the same channel as the video signal, which will be selected automatically when you select [Set].
Pos Ext H or C Sync VIDEO 150 only: Set for positive-going External Csync or
External Hsync signals.
Range
Composite Video (default) or External Composite (Csync)
R, G, B
Negative, Positive
Composite Video (default),
External Csync,
External H & V Sync
1,2,3,4; default 1
1,2,3,4; default 1
Yes, No
7-24 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Parameter
Pos Ext V Sync
Description
VIDEO 150 only: Set for positive-going External Vsync signals.
External Sync Level VIDEO 150 only: Setting for H or Csync or Vsync slicing level. A value of 127 shifts the sync to 0 VDC. A value of 0 shifts the slicing level to -3 VDC. A value of 255 shifts the slicing level to +3 VDC. Selecting [Auto H or C Sync] or [Auto
V Sync] automatically calculates these values.
Low Voltage
High Voltage
[Auto H or C Sync]
[Auto V Sync]
VIDEO 150 only: When “Auto H or C Sync” or “Auto Vsync” is selected for an external sync only, the software determines the Low Voltage H/V necessary to correctly amplify or attenuate the sync. The range of -3 VDC to +3 VDC is associated with the 0 to 255 counts. You cannot directly change this value.
VIDEO 150 only: VIDEO 150 only: When “Auto H or C Sync” or “Auto Vsync” is selected for an external sync only, the software determines the High Voltage H/V necessary to correctly amplify or attenuate the sync. The range of -3 VDC to
+3 VDC is associated with the 0 to 255 counts. You cannot directly change this value.
VIDEO 150 only: Select this button to automatically determine the Hsync slicing level. The software calculates the average of the maximum and minimum values between -3.0 and +3.0 volts for the Hsync slicing level. Composite video applied to the
External Hsync input will result in an erroneous slicing level.
VIDEO 150 only: Select this button to automatically determine the Vsync slicing level. The software calculates the Hsync slicing level as for the Vsync slicing level. Composite video applied to the External Hsync input will result in an erroneous slicing level.
Yes, No
Range
0 - 255: default 127
0 - 255; default 0
0 - 255; default 0
N/A
N/A
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-25
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 7–6
VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD
Figure 7–7
VIDEO 150INTERFACE BOARD
7-26 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Table 7–11 Windows “Pixel Clock Parameters”
Parameter
VCO Divisor
VCO Divisor
VCO Divisor
Override
VCO Frequency
Description
VIDEO 60 only: External divisor setting for PLL. Select from drop-down menu. The Video Control Oscillator (VCO) divisor maintains the VCO frequency in the range of 75 to 150 MHz and is calculated automatically.
VIDEO 150 only: External divisor setting for PLL. The divisor is selected automatically to keep the VCO frequency in the range of
15 to 150 MHz. A “view only” field.
VIDEO 60 only. Allows override of calculated PLL VCO divisor value.
Automatically calculated. A “view only” field.
Range
Values from 3 - 80, but not all numbers are included; default 3.
1, 2, 4, 8; No default
On/Off; Default Off
VIDEO 150: 75.000 - 150.000
VIDEO 60: 14.000 - 230.000
VIDEO 150LC: 150.000 - 450.000.
No defaults for any.
0 - 3; Default 3. See Table
Vsync Capacitor Vsync extraction capacitor setting. Automatically calculated. See
.
Lock Detect Count VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: The number of pixel clock periods detected by the PLL between Hsync pulses. A “view only” field.
VCO Gain VIDEO 60 only: Specifies the PLL VCO gain value.
Automatically calculated
VCO Gain Override VIDEO 60 only: Allows for override of PLL VCO gain value.
Pixel Clock Freq VIDEO 150LC only: Pixel clock rate in MHz. Automatically calculated, A “view only” field.
Post-Scaler Divisor VIDEO 150LC only: Specifies the PLL post-scaler divisor value used to derive the VCO frequency. This value is calculated to generate an optimized VCO frequency using the pixel clock frequency. The value is calculated unless overridden.
Post-Scaler Divisor
Override
PLL Locked
VIDEO 150LC only: Allows for override of the calculated postscaler divisor value.
VIDEO 150LC only: Indicates whether PLL is locked. This setting is refreshed each time the pixel clock parameters are sent to the BOARD.
Phase Frequency
Detector Gain
VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: Specifies the PLL phase frequency detector gain. Automatically calculated unless overridden.
Phase Frequency
Detector Gain
Override
VIDEO 60 and VIDEO 150LC only: Allows for override of the calculated phase frequency detector gain value.
Fine Phase Adjust: VIDEO 60 only: Specifies the fine phase adjust feedback direction for the PLL. Do not use unless directed by the TSC.
Dynamic Phase
Adjust Resolution
VIDEO 150LC only: Specifies the number of steps available for the pixel clock phase delay adjustment. The value is calculated unless overridden.
Dynamic Phase
Adjust Res.
Override
VIDEO 150LC only: Allows for override of the dynamic phase adjust resolution value.
Pixel Clock Timing VIDEO 60 only: Specifies the pixel clock phase adjustment relative to the data phase for the PLL. Each step represents a phase shift of about 1 nanosecond. For RGB, 3 separate channels may be adjusted.
0 - 9999; no default
0 - 7; Default 0
On, Off; Default Off
1.000 - 999.999; No default
2, 4, 8, 16; Default calculated
On, Off; Default Off
On, Off; No default
Settings 0-7; Default 0 for VIDEO
60, 6 for VIDEO 150LC
On, Off; Default Off
LEAD, LAG; Default LEAD
0, 1, 3: Default 0
On, Off; Off
0 - 255; Default 0
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-27
SERVICE MANUAL
Parameter
Pixel clock Delay
Adjust
Description
VIDEO 150LC only: Specifies the pixel clock phase adjustment relative to the data phase for the PLL. Each step represents a phase shift delay of about pi/8 RADIANS. For RGB, 3 separate channels may be adjusted.
Control Voltage
HSync to Clock
Delay
VIDEO 150 only: VCO tuning voltage setting. Used to provide minimum jitter and fast lock-up times.
VIDEO 150 only: Pixel clock to horizontal sync pulse clock delay. Used to prevent line shift artifacts which may occur because of race conditions.
[Auto Pixel Clock] When pressed, automatically adjusts pixel clock phase setting to maximize pixel to pixel contrast.
[AutoControl
Voltage]
VIDEO 150 only: Pressed to automatically adjust PLL control voltage setting to ensure proper lock and minimum jitter.
[AutoHSync to
Clock]
VIDEO 150 only: Pressed to automatically adjust pixel clock to
Hsync delay setting to minimize probability of horizontal line shift.
Range
0 - 15; Default 0
0 - 63; Default 32
0 - 255; Default 0
N/A
N/A
N/A
Figure 7–8
VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD
7-28 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Figure 7–9
VIDEO 150LC INTERFACE BOARD
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Figure 7–10
VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-29
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 7–12 Settings for Vsync Capacitor
0
1
2
3
Setting H Line Time (microseconds)
0 - 14.29
14.49 - 32.26
32.25 - 55.56
55.57 - 64.00 and higher
HSync Frequency (KHz)
69 - 100
31 - 68.99
18 - 30.99
0 - 17.99
7-30 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Using Auto Setup to Set up the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD
Important
• The MIM must be energized for at least 5 minutes before doing “Auto Setup.” The VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD requires about 5 minutes to stabilize.
• Check that the operator can send a test pattern from the MODALITY (e.g., a SMPTE or Grayscale pattern). If a test pattern is not available, choose the best clinical image with the following:
– Grayscale with brightest and darkest values (0 to 255 A/D Counts)
– White text on black background or black text on white background
– Sharp transitions and vertical lines
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Direct Connect.
Important
A MODALITY must be set up before you do Step 2. Check that the MODALITY you want to configure is highlighted in the
“Direct Connect Input Configuration” window.
[2] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, click:
• [Acquisition]
• [Modify]
[3] At the “Modify Parameters” window, select [OK].
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-31
SERVICE MANUAL
Important
[4] At the “Video Board Setup” window, select [Auto Setup].
[5] For the VIDEO 60 or 150 LC INTERFACE BOARD:
(a) Wait about 1 minute while the “Video Board Setup” window displays the messages indicated below, as well as other messages. The messages might occur more than once during the process. Also, the Offset and Gain messages might interchange. If Auto Setup does not finish, see Help Files “Autosetup Failures.”
Auto Offset:Decreasing coarse auto offset (xx)
Auto Gain: Increasing coarse gain (xx)
Auto Pixel Clock: Computing derivatives (xx)
Auto Horizontal: Finding right black border
Auto Vertical: Finding top black border
(b) Select [Set Parameters}.
(c) At the “Video Board Setup” window, select [Acquire] to display the test image.
(d) Check the image for “ghosting.”
• If ghosting is excessive, advance to the cable compensation adjustment on the next page.
• If ghosting is not excessive, advance to
“Checking Image Quality” on Page 7 – 35 .
Note
Ghosting is best observed in the areas of the image where the largest pixel value transition, from black to white or white to black, occurs. Ghosting occurs only for transitions in the horizontal direction.
[6] For the VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD:
(a) Wait about 2 minutes until the “Status” line in the “Video Board Setup” window displays the message “Auto Board
does not finish, see Help Files “Autosetup Failures.”
(b) Select [Set].
(c) Advance to “Checking Image Quality” on Page 7 – 35
.
Table 7–13 The 9 Tasks Completed During [Auto Setup] for the VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD
7
8
5
6
9
3
4
1
2
No.
Tasks Displayed in Status Line
“Input source sync auto-set”
“PLL control voltage auto set”
“PCLK to Hsync auto-align”
“Gains and offsets auto-level”
“Horizontal auto-framing”
“PCLK to Data Phase auto-align”
“Horizontal auto-framing”
“Vertical auto-framing”
“Auto setup end”
Associated Parameter Window: Field
Video Sync Parameters: [Auto Hsync] and [Auto Vsync]
Pixel Clock Parameters: [Auto Control Voltage]
Pixel Clock Parameters: [Auto Hsync to Clock]
Gain and Offset Parameters: [Auto Level]
Horizontal Parameters: [Auto Horizontal Centering]
Pixel Clock Parameters: [Auto Pixel Clock]
Horizontal Parameters: [Auto Horizontal Centering]
Vertical Parameters: [Auto Vertical Centering]
Indicates completion of Auto Setup.
7-32 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Cable Compensation Adjustment for VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARDS
Warning
This procedure should not be done unless it is absolutely necessary. Noise or other artifacts can be induced if the adjustment is not done properly.
Important
VIDEO CABLE lengths are from 2 to 45 meters, with 10 meters the standard length. For a long CABLE the compensation may have to be increased. For a short CABLE the compensation may have to be decreased.
[1] At the “Video Board Setup window, set the “Image Compression” value to “None.”
[2] Acquire a test image.
[3] In the image viewer window, determine the line number you wish to view and move the cursor to this line.
[4] At the “Video Board Setup” window, click [Gain & Offset Parameters].
[5] At the “Gain and Offset Parameters” window, click [Manual Adjustment Tool].
Note
The ‘Manual Gain/Offset” window can be used to display 1 line of video as a linear graph to aid in adjusting the cable compensation parameters.
128
[6] Enter the line number selected in Step 3 into the Line Number dialog box, and click [Set, Acquire and Plot].
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-33
SERVICE MANUAL
Note
You can zoom in on the transition by placing the cursor on the area and clicking the left mouse button. You can use the right mouse button to zoom back out.
Frequency) adjustment affects primarily the first pixel after the transition, and the LF (Low Frequency) adjustment affects multiple pixels after the transition.
[8] Change compensation values in small increments in the LF or HF Cable Compensation box. Never increase or decrease a value by more than 10 before viewing the results.
Note
The range of adjustment is 0 - 255, and the normal setting for both HF and LF compensation is 128. Decreasing the compensation number will increase the amount of compensation. Increasing the number will decrease the amount of compensation.
[9] After changing compensation values, click [Set, Acquire and Plot] to view the results.
[10] Run Auto Setup again (see page
7 – 31 ) and check for ghosting again.
[11] If necessary, repeat this cable compensation adjustment to remove ghosting.
Figure 7–11
HF and LF Cable Compensation Parameters
Portion of SMPTE Pattern
BLACK WHITE
Pixels
1 2 3 4 5 6
WHITE
BLACK
H174_0064GC
HF LF
Over Compensation
Perfect Compensation
Under Compensation
Important
The High Frequency (HF) response occurs at the transition of black and white in the SMPTE. The Low Frequency (LF) response begins at pixel 4.
7-34 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Checking Image Quality
[1] After Auto Setup and the cable compensation adjustment (if performed), select [Acquire] at the “Video Board Setup” window to display a test image.
[2] Select a Region of Interest (ROI) and display the uncompressed ROI image:
(a) Use the MOUSE to click-and-drag a rectangle around an ROI: You must drag the MOUSE from the top-left position of the ROI to the bottom-right position of the ROI.
(b) Release the MOUSE click. The uncompressed image displays.
Important
• If this is color video, check each of the Red, Green, and Blue pixels in the following steps.
• To determine pixel values, check the “Pixel Value” window while you move the cursor across the image.
• You might have to execute more than 1 acquire to evaluate the quality of the image.
• To make a histogram, do Step 2 again within the existing uncompressed image.
• You can right click the MOUSE to zoom on a specific area of the ROI.
[3] Check the properties for the test image:
• Correct Gain and Offset:
Brightest white: Pixel value of 253 + 2 counts
Darkest Black: Pixel Value of 2 + 2 counts
Visible 5% and 95% grayscale values if you display the SMPTE pattern.
• Centered horizontally and vertically
• Correct clock timing: No visible pixel shift or line shift
• Straight, undistorted horizontal and vertical lines
• Clear text. Ask the operator to type more text, if necessary.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-35
SERVICE MANUAL
• Sharp transitions between maximum and minimum grayscale values
[4] Use Table 7-14 as a troubleshooting guide after the quality check. If the video gain and offset parameters are not at acceptable levels, advance to:
VIDEO BOARD
60 and 150LC
150
Procedure
“Using Advance Leveling to Define Black and White Values”
“Adjusting Gain and Offset”
Table 7–14 Troubleshooting Guide for the Acquired Image
Malfunction
Maximum grayscale counts not
253 + 2 counts.
Minimum grayscale counts not 2 + 2 counts.
Pixel shift or line shift in the vertical lines or in the text of the image.
The acquired image does not include all of the image information that the
MODALITY monitor displays.
Image is too high or too low on film.
Blurred text.
Remedy
In the “Video Gain and Offset Parameters” window: Adjust the values for
Coarse Gain and Coarse Offset. Adjusting by 1 count will change pixel value by approximately 3-4. Adjust the values for “Fine Gain” and “Fine Offset.”
Adjusting by 3 counts will change pixel value by approximately 1. (If using color video, adjust the values of each color separately.) Increasing the “Gain” will cause the white pixel counts to increase without affecting the black pixels.
Increasing the “Offset” will cause the white and black pixel counts to increase.
Check that the MONITOR of the MODALITY displays the correct test image.
Execute [Auto Setup] again. Ask the operator to add more text to the image if you do not have sufficient text to evaluate.
In the “Video Vertical Parameters” window, adjust the values for the “Images
Lines / Frame.” In the “Video Horizontal Parameters” window, adjust the values for the “Image Pixels / Line.” Increasing these values will increase the area of the image that the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD requires.
In the “Video Vertical Parameters” window: Adjust Vertical Back Porch for
VIDEO 150. Adjust Vertical Shift for VIDEO 60 and 150LC.
In the “Video Vertical Parameters” window, swap fields.
Using Advanced Leveling to Define Black and White Values
Note
This procedure applies only to the VIDEO 60 and 150LC VIDEO INTERFACE BOARDS.
[1] At the “Video Board Setup” window, click [Acquire].
[2] In the “Uncompressed Region Of Interest” window, hold and drag the left mouse button to select a region of interest, including a grayscale area. The “Uncompressed Region of Interest” screen is displayed.
[3] Select a Region of Interest (ROI) to include grayscale:
(a) Use the MOUSE to click-and-drag a rectangle around an ROI: You must drag the MOUSE from the top-left position of the ROI to the bottom-right position of the ROI.
(b) Release the MOUSE click. The uncompressed image displays.
[4] Move the cursor to the blackest point of the screen. Hold the “b” key and press the right MOUSE button. The x and y coordinate values will be entered in the Black area of the “Advanced Leveling” window.
[5] Move the cursor to the whitest point of the screen. Hold the “w” key and press the right MOUSE button. The x and y coordinate values will be entered in the White area of the “Advanced Leveling” window.
[6] In the “Advanced Leveling” window, select [Perform Leveling].
7-36 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
[7] Close the Region Of Interest window.
[8] In the “Video Board Setup” window, select [Set Parameters].
[9] Select [Acquire].
[10] Select a Region of Interest (ROI) to check the gain and offset values:
(a) Use the MOUSE to click-and-drag a rectangle around an ROI: You must drag the MOUSE from the top-left position of the ROI to the bottom-right position of the ROI.
(b) Release the MOUSE click. The uncompressed image displays.
[11] If gain and offset are still not acceptable, advance to the next procedure to adjust gain and offset.
Adjusting Gain and Offset
[1] At the “Video Board Setup” window, click [Gain & Offset Parameters].
VIDEO 60 AND 150LC BOARD-
Monochrome
VIDEO 60 and 150LC - RGB Color
VIDEO 150 BOARD
[2] Select the necessary dialog box. See Table 7-14.
[3] Enter the changes and select [OK].
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-37
SERVICE MANUAL
[4] At the “Video Board Setup” window, select [Set Parameters].
[5] View the image and repeat the adjustment as necessary.
[6] After completing the adjustment, click [OK] in the “Gain and Offset Parameters” window.
[7] Click [Set Parameters] in the Video Board Setup” window.
[8] To see the image and check the changes you have made, click [Acquire] in the “Video Board Setup” window.
[9] If necessary, repeat the adjustment procedure.
[10] When you are satisfied with the test image, click [OK] in the “Video Board Setup” window.
[11] After completing video adjustment, advance to:
Primary Control Type
Autofilming
KEYPAD
Procedure
“Setting Up the MIM for Autofilming” in next procedure.
Do in turn the procedures that apply to this site:
• “Setting Up a Network Print Destination.”
• “Setting Up a Network Store Destination.”
7-38 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Notes on Adjusting Image Quality
Optimum image quality can be achieved from the MIM by adjusting the video signal and parameters. In a video environment, the process begins with a good video signal. This signal must then be adjusted in the MIM. Check that you have done the following:
• Use the correct parameters to acquire the video signal for digitization.
• Check that the image is centered correctly - both vertically and horizontally.
• Set the gain and offset correctly to obtain the correct black and white values. See “Defining Black and White Values (Using the Advanced Leveling Feature)”.
• The pixel clock must be correctly timed with the data signal pixels.
The VIDEO INTERFACE BOARDS have an Auto Setup feature that will accomplish this setup when the correct video signal is provided. When the algorithm has completed, check the image for the correct values for gain and offset. For optimum quality in monochrome images, the black value should be 2 ±2 and the white value should be 253 ±2. If the adjustment is for color images, these values should be 1 -1/+0 (0 or 1) for black and 254 +1/-0 (254 or 255) for white. Check these values in the red, green and blue color plane for the correct values.
“Advanced Leveling” is a feature of the VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARDS. It allows the user to choose a position for black and white values. Normally, the MIM uses the entire image to find a part that it calls black and white. When a
MODALITY provides a computer-generated grayscale, the black and white points can be selected from it. This will provide a known black and white point for the MIM to use to adjust gain and offset. After this algorithm runs, you should check the images for the proper gain and offset values. This feature can be especially useful for Ultrasound images and can be used for images from all MODALITIES. See “Using Advanced Leveling to Define Black and White Values.”
• Print a page of images to check that the timing is correct.
• Check that transitions from black to white are sharp and clear.
• Print a curve series, contrast series, or color print matching series.
In versions of software prior to V_3.2, only the curve series or the color print matching series could be run. The curve series is used for the 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS. Different contrast settings will produce a different looking image when printing the curve series. 11 contrast settings can be used. The user can select from 6 curve shape prints for each contrast setting.
The contrast series is used for all Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS and any IMAGERS connected to the 9410
ACQUISITION SYSTEM. The correct TFT/ULUT (Transfer Function Table/Universal Look Up Table) should be selected before printing this contrast series. The user can select from 16 images in the series. The 160 LASER IMAGER requires the use of this contrast series to adjust image quality.
Setting the curve shape and the contrast settings depends on the MODALITY. Some Autofilming links will send the values to use, and some will use the default settings in the MIM.
The contrast setting could be sent with the DICOM information, but defaults in the MIM are used in case these values are not sent. In versions below V_3.2, only one default value was used by all Service Class Users (SCUs). Starting with V_3.2, the default values for each SCU can be set at the MIM.
Starting with V_3.2, the SCU sends the MODALITY type, body part, and image tone adjustment information to the print and storage destinations. The MODALITY type can be set up using the “MIM Service Application” and the body part (if series is enabled) can be selected at the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD. The MODALITY type and body part information is useful when sending to storage destinations to enable hanging protocols and features of certain WORKSTATIONS. MODALITY type is useful when sending DMI print destinations through the network to select image processing techniques.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-39
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for Autofilming
Important
• For Autofilming, an RS232 or RS422 CABLE must be connected between the MODALITY and the MIM.
• Current MIMS use only RS422.
• For Autofilming connections that require RS232, install the CONVERTER KIT 8B8186 (Catalog No. 121-2018) to changes the RS232 signal to RS422.
• Check the MODALITY DATABASE for information on parameters.
[1] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, click:
• [Autofilming]
• [Modify]
[2] At the prompt “Are you sure?” click [OK]. The “Autofilming Parameters” window displays.
[4] If you did not change information, click [Cancel].
[5] If you changed information, click [Set].
Important
After changing the setup information, you must click [Set] or the changes will be lost.
[6] After setting up for Autofilming, advance to “Setting Up a Network Print Destination.”
7-40 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Table 7–15 Default Values for Autofilming Link Parameters
Parameter Autofilming Link
Hitachi KCL
Port ID
Baud Rate
Driver Type
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Parity
ACK Wait Timer
Ack Required --
Memory Full Response --
Host Assume 4800
Lines
--
1 even
3
--
4800
--
9600
RS422 R2332**
8 8
1 none
5
--
--
--
No
M952/
P831
--
1200
RS422
8
MOV
No
1 even
6
--
--
--
Siemens or 3M*
SPCI/FSPOT DASM
--
2400
RS232**
7
2 odd
2
--
--
--
--
4800
RS232**
8
1 even
2
--
--
--
Toshiba
--
9600
RS422
7
1 even
1
--
--
--
YMS
--
1200
RS422
8
2 odd
--
Report Alarms
Host Assume 300 DPI --
Variable Correction
Store Key Active
--
-active
Receive Message Timer
Start Timer
EOT Wait Timer
Switch Mode
Switch Handling
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
-active
5
2
--
KEYPAD
Not
Allowed
--
No
On
Yes active
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1
--
--
--
--
--
-active
1
--
10
KEYPAD
--
--
--
-active
--
--
--
--
--
Automatic Film Type
Selection
DTR Connect
Default Horiz. Frames
Default Vertical Frames
Autoprint
AutoFormat
Interpolation: Sharp --
Interpolation: Smooth --
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
On***
On***
Off
--
--
--
Replication***
On***
On***
Off
--
--
--
Replication***
--
--
--
Cubic Spline*** Cubic Spline*** --
--
On
3
4
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Emulate 3M --
Extended Page Formats --
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Off
--
Off
On
Notes:
* For all Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS and 969/8800, select “3M” parameters for the Primary Control Type. For the
160 LASER IMAGER, and 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS, select “Siemens” for the Primary Control type.
** Allowed by the MIM 100 only. All other models must have RS232 changed to RS422. See the “Important” at the top of
Page 182.
*** Applies to 3M-Siemens only.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-41
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 7–16 Autofilming Parameter Definitions and Range
Port Id
Baud Rate
Driver Type
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Parity
Item
ACK Wait Timer*
Ack Required*
Description
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT
Baud Rate of the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT.
Range
MIM 100: COM 4, MIM 200:
COM 4, 6, 8, OR 10
300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
Driver protocol of the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT. MIM 100: RS422
MIM 200: RS422
Number of bits for serial communications.
7, 8
Number of stop bits for serial communications.
Setting of parity for SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT.
1, 2
None, Even, Odd
1 - 999 Acknowledgment wait timer. The time in seconds that the MIM will wait after it sends a message until the Imaging Device acknowledges that it received the message.
Determines whether or not an acknowledgment is required from the “host.”
Yes, No
MOV, BSY Memory Full Response* Specifies what the Memory Full response should be for the
“host.”
Host Assume 4800 Lines* Specifies whether the “host” assumes that the destination has
4800 lines on a page.
Report Alarms* Flag that indicates if the MIM should report to the
MODALITY alarm conditions associated with the PRINTER.
Host Assume 300 DPI* Specifies whether the “host” assumes that the destination has
300 DPI.
Variable Correction* Specifies whether the MIM will attempt to reduce the number of lines in the last image band to fit the film (without minifying the image).
Yes, No
On, Off
Yes, No
Yes, No
Active, Inactive Store Key Active* Determines if [Store] on the KEYPAD is active when the system uses auxiliary control.
Receive Message Timer* Specifies the amount of time in seconds allowed to receive an entire message.
Start Timer* Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the MIM waits for the Imaging Device to reply to a handshake character.
EOT Wait Timer*
Switch Mode*
Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the MIM waits to receive an End of Transmission (EOT) character from the
Imaging Device.
Allows you to designate printing films using either the Console of the Imaging Device (Host) or the Auxiliary KEYPAD.
Switch Handling*
Automatic Film Type
Selection*
DTR Connect*
Default Horizontal
Frames*
Default Vertical
Frames*
Autoprint*
The process used to handle stored images when filming is switched between the“host” and the Auxiliary KEYPAD.
Flag that indicates if the SUPPLY MAGAZINE in the LASER
PRINTER must be used to automatically select the film size and film base.
Specifies the amount of time in seconds the MIM must wait for the Imaging Device to respond to a handshake character.
The number of horizontal frames in page format that the MIM defaults to.
The number of vertical frames in page format that the MIM defaults to.
Flag that indicates if the MIM should automatically print the page when the last image on the page is stored.
1 - 999
1 - 999
1- 999
Keypad, Host
Not Allowed
On, Off
On, Off
1 - 9
1 - 9
On, Off
7-42 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Item
AutoFormat*
Interpolation: Sharp*
Interpolation: Smooth*
Description
Flag that indicates if the MIM should automatically set up for a new page of the same format after it makes a print of a page.
Specifies the type of interpolation to use when the MODALITY selects Sharp interpolation.
Specifies the type of interpolation to use when the MODALITY selects Smooth interpolation.
On, Off
Range
Bilinear, Cubic Spline, Cubic
Convolution 2, Cubic
Convolution 3, No
Magnification, Replication
Bilinear, Cubic Spline, Cubic
Convolution 2, Cubic
Convolution 3, No
Magnification, Replication
True, False Emulate 3M*
Extended Page
Formats*
Specifies whether the Toshiba or YMS Autofilming link will emulate the behavior of the 3M Toshiba or YMS interface.
Flag that determines if the MIM will allow the extended page formats (15:1, 16:1, 20:1, 24:1) that can be selected at the
Auxiliary KEYPAD. Older YMS Imaging Devices do not support the new page formats.
Note: Parameters indicated by * do not apply to all types of Autofilming.
Yes, No
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-43
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up a Network Print Destination
Important
See the tables on
7 – 49 and following for detailed information on the Destination Parameters.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Destination. The “Installed Destinations” window will display.
Important
The following procedure for installing destinations must be done for each network destination.
[2] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select from the “Update Configuration” panel the following sequence:
• [Add]
• [Print]
• [Network]
• [Qualified]
7-44 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
[3] At the “Choose a New Network Print Destination” window, select the correct SERVER/PRINTER combination from the list and then click [OK].
[4] At the “General” parameters window, enter the Logical Name for the destination, the IP Address, and the Memory value.
[5] Click [Next].
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-45
SERVICE MANUAL
Important
You must select a media base for each media item selected in the “Media” window.
[6] In the “Media” window, select all media that the customer will use.
Note
The numbers the “Media Information” window displays on the LAPTOP COMPUTER might not match the numbers displayed on the screen.
[7] After entering the media parameters, click [Next].
7-46 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
[8] At the DICOM window, check the following parameters:
• Protocol: DICOM 3.0
• Service Class: Basic Grayscale Print
• Port Number: Enter as necessary by the SCP.
• AE Title: Enter as necessary by the SCP.
• Timers/Counters: Accept the defaults.
Important
With Version 5.0 and higher, the application software for the MIM automatically selects defaults for these destination parameters. To select values other than the defaults, click [Next] to proceed to the “Supported Items” window and to windows for the other groups of parameters.
[9] Click [Finish] to select the defaults for these destination parameters:
• Supported Items
• Interpolation
• Format Types
• Page Formatting
• Image Processing
• M952 Usage
Note
When [Finish] is clicked, the “Installed Destinations” window will display and the MIM will process the parameter information.
[10] When processing is completed, click [Close].
Important
You must repeat the destination setup procedure for each network print destination.
[11] To check that the network destinations are correctly set up:
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-47
SERVICE MANUAL
(a) Start the “MIM Service Application” and select Diagnostics>Network.
(b) Execute a Ping and/or DICOM Echo:
• Enter the IP Address of the new destination for a Ping.
• Enter the IP Address, port number and AE title for a DICOM Echo.
(c) Click [OK].
(d) Click [Cancel] from the “Network Diagnostics” window.
[12] After completing the network print destination setup, use the table below to advance to the correct procedure:
Procedures to Complete:
Does the MODALITY SERVER have Store
Destinations?
Will the MODALITY SERVER be connected to an HIS/RIS Gateway?
Has the FOOTSWITCH been modified for the
MODALITY Store Option?
Have you finished setting up the MODALITY
SERVER?
Advance to:
“Setting Up a Network Store Destination” on
“Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for a HIS/RIS Gateway” on page
“Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the MODALITY Store
Option” on page
Section 8, Obtaining Optimum Images
Parameter Tables
Important
• Do not modify any of the items in the following tables for a qualified destination unless directed to by the TSC. If an item is not checked in the “Supported Items” or Media Information” window, the customer will not be able to access that item.
• The KEYPAD will not display features or functions that are not allowed.
7-48 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 7–17 General Parameters - for Print Destinations
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Item
Logical Name
IP Address (This will be blank for a Direct option.)
Description
Site-specific name for a particular Destination. The
KEYPAD displays this name when the operator selects a
Destination. The MIM requires a logical name that is unique across all currently installed destinations.
Site-specific address that uniquely identifies the
Destination on the network. The Service Application for the MIM requires the user to enter a value. Duplicate IP
Addresses for installed destinations are acceptable if the
DICOM AE Titles are unique for each destination.
Database Name The name of the Destination if it is being installed using a known destination from the qualified destination database.
This is a “view only” field.
Model The model of the Destination. The MIM uses this data to optimize the page format validation for the particular
Destination. This is a “view only” field.
Memory Memory in megabytes residing in the Destination. The
MIM uses this value to validate the format. This value is site-specific. The Service Application requires a value in this field.
Range
1 - 9 alphanumeric characters
No spaces allowed.
Underscores are allowed.
4 fields of 0 - 255 where each field is separated by a period:
For example: 149.110.98.10.
1 - 13 alphanumeric characters
1 - 12 alphanumeric characters.
Kodak Ektascan LASER PRINTERS, Kodak
DryView LASER IMAGERS, 160 LASER
IMAGER, Kodak PACS LINK 9410
ACQUISITION SYSTEM.
1 - 99. For the 2180 and 1120 LASER
PRINTERS, obtain page store information from the printer’s CES port.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-49
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 7–18 Media Information - for Print Destinations
Size
Item
[Media Info]
Description
Select [Media Info] to display the Media Information indicated in this table.
Media sizes allowed by the Destination.
Maximum
Columns
Maximum number of printable pixels in the x-direction for a particular media size.
Maximum columns can be selected for each media size. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Maximum Rows Maximum number of printable pixels in the y-direction for a particular media size.
Maximum rows are selectable for each media size with or without common text.
The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Maximum Rows with Common
Text
Types
Maximum number of printable pixels in the y-direction for a particular media size.
Maximum rows can be selected for each media size with or without common text.
The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Media types allowed by the Destination. Media types can be selected for each media size. “Any” indicates that the Destination will use the media type that matches the media size selected (blue or clear). The selections “Reflective” and
“Transparent” are valid for color printing.
Range
N/A
35 x 43 cm
35 x 35 cm
11 x 14 in.
11 x 11 in.
10 x 12 in.
8.5 x 11 in.
8 x 10 in.
4 x 6 in.
A4
1 - 9999
1 - 9999
1 - 9999
Any, Blue, Clear,
Reflective (Paper),
Transparent (Film).
7-50 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 7–19 DICOM Parameters - for Print Destinations
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Item
Protocol
Service Class
Port Number
AE Title
Association Retry
Counter
Response Message
Description
Protocol used to communicate with the Destination.
The service class provided by the Destination.
The port number of the Destination that the MIM uses to make a socket connection for sending and receiving DICOM messages.
Range
DICOM 3.0
Print or Store
0 - 65535
The Applications Entity (AE) Title specifies the Destination application that the MIM must communicate with for successful DICOM communications.
1 - 16 alphanumeric characters
Specifies the number of retry attempts in establishing a DICOM association. 1 - 999
Specifies the time to wait for a response after a message is sent. Meaningful only when the MIM is functions as a DICOM SCU.
1 - 999 seconds
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-51
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 7–20 Supported Items Parameters - for Print Destinations
Item
[Supported
Items]
Media Bin
Default
Pivot Density
Print Quality
Description
Select [Supported Items] to display the supported features indicated in this table.
Collation Enables “study mode” operation at the KEYPAD and has the Destination print the set of all films that belong to the same study. Select if the destination allows Collation.
Common Text Allows the user to enter common text information (including the macros for time/date, etc.) at the KEYPAD for printing at the bottom of each film. This parameter will also be used by MIM when validating the format. Select if the destination allows Common text.
Tonescaling on
Image Basis
Enables the changing of curve shape in the middle of a page and selecting a curve shape series from the KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows Tonescaling on Image Basis.
Enables selecting a default media bin at the KEYPAD when the media size/type is not specified by a DICOM input. Select if the destination allows this feature.
Enables the selection of a pivot density setting from the KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows pivot density.
Enables the selection of print quality to be used when printing the page from the KEYPAD.
Select if the destination allows different printing qualities.
Remote Image
Deletion
Rotation
Enables images to be sent to the destination when they are acquired from the imaging source/ image node. Select if the destination allows remote image deletion.
Allows the KEYPAD to prevent the customer from selecting a page orientation of landscape for formats that are normally portrait (and vice versa) from the KEYPAD that is not allowed by the destination. The MIM also uses this to validate the format. Select if the MIM allows page rotation.
Range
N/A
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
7-52 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 7–21 Interpolation Parameters - for Print Destinations
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Item Description
[Interpolation] Select [Interpolation] to display the supported features indicated in this table.
Interpolation allows the user to use the KEYPAD or other input to select from a list of interpolation modes.
Range
N/A
No Magnification,
Bilinear,
Replication,
Cubic Spline,
Cubic Convolution 2,
Cubic Convolution 3
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-53
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 7–22 Format Parameters - for Print Destinations
Item Description
[Format Types] Select [Format Types] to display the information indicated in this table.
Custom Formats Custom formats enables the selection of formats 101 and 102 from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Row Symmetric
Formats
Enables the user to select formats that only have a line of symmetry in the vertical direction from an Autofilming Link or through a DICOM network. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Slide Format
Super Slide
Format
Allowable
Formats
Enables the selection of slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. The
MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Enables the selection of super slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs.
The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
A list of standard formats that the destination allows. This list can be customized to control what the users see for a specific destination. Each format (1up, 2up, 4up, etc.) has 1 setting.
N/A
Yes, No
Range
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
7-54 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 7–23 Page Formatting Parameters - for Print Destinations
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Item
[Formatting
Parameters]
Aspect Ratio Mix on
Page
Image Size Mix in
Std Fmt
DICOM Annotation
Box
Requested Size
Scale
Requested Size Mix in Row
Trim
Aspect Ratio Mix in
Row
Image Size Mix in
Row
Requested Image
Size
Requested Size Mix on Page
True Landscape
Description
Select [Formatting] to display the Formatting information indicated in this table.
Mixed aspect ratio on the same page is allowed by the destination. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows mixed image size on standard format. This indicates if the image size can be changed on a page with a row/column symmetric format. The images will be scaled differently to print all the images at the same time. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows page annotation. This indicates if the destination allows the DICOM Annotation Box to be used for selecting the band of text that will be placed on each film. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination should scale the image to fit the image cell area of the destination. The printer places a notice on the output indicating that the operation was done. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows all images in a row to be the same size. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows Trim. This allows the user to select a border to around each image from the KEYPAD or from other input devices.
Select if the destination allows mixed aspect ratio in the same row. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows mixed image sizes in row. Allows the image size to be changed separately of the page format. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows the user to select an image size. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows all images on the page to have the same requested size.
The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows a true landscape orientation.
Range
N/A
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-55
SERVICE MANUAL
Item
Maximum Images
Per Band
Maximum Bands
Per Page
Description
Enter the maximum images per band allowed by the destination.
Enter the maximum bands per page allowed by the destination.
Maximum Image
Columns
Maximum Image
Rows
Pixel Pitch
Enter the number of maximum image columns allowed by the destination.
Enter the number of maximum image rows allowed by the destination.
Minimum
Horizontal
Separation
Minimum Vertical
Separation
Enter the number of pixels per millimeter for the destination.
The number of columns that separate images in the horizontal direction.The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
The number of rows that separate image bands in the vertical direction. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Trim Width Enabled The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction when trim is on. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Trim Width
Disabled
The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction when trim is not on. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Range
1 - 32
1 - 32
0 - 5000
0 - 5400
0 - 32
0 - 20
0 - 10
0 - 5
0 - 5
7-56 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 7–24 Image Processing Parameters - for Print Destinations
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Item
[Image Processing]
Color
Color/Grayscale Same Page
Edge Enhancement
Grayscale
Minify
Maximum Image DMAX
Description
Select [Image Processing] to display the information indicated in this table.
Select if the destination allows color images.
Select if the destination allows the user to place color and grayscale images on the same page.
Allows the user to select edge enhancement parameters (e.g.,
MODALITY type and image tone adjustment values) from the
KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows edge enhancement.
Select if the destination allows grayscale images.
Formerly Decimation. Indicates that the destination can accept images with dimensions larger than the dimensions of the image cell where the image will be printed. Select if the destination allows Minify.
Enter the maximum image DMAX value that is allowed by the destination.
N/A
Range
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
0.0 - 3.8
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-57
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 7–25 SCU Parameters - for Print Destinations
Density
Item
Density Space
Luminance Space
Variable Border
Curve Shape
Tonescaling
Perception LUT
Tonescaling
PLUT Service
Extended Print
Attributes
7-58
Description
Density space allowed by the destination. Determines if the MIM can send images using density space (code value 0 represents white and code value 255 represents black). In DICOM, density space is represented in the photometric interpretation attribute of the Image SOP as “monochrome 1.”
Luminance space allowed by the destination. Determines if the MIM can send images using luminance space (code value 0 represents black and code value 255 represents white). In DICOM, luminance space is represented in the photometric interpretation attribute of the Image SOP as “monochrome 2.”
Indicates whether the destination allows the user to select a border density between black and clear. The parameter has no meaning for store destinations.
Specifies whether the destination allows Curve Shape Tonescaling with Curve shape and contrast. Determines if the MIM will send Curve Shape Tonescaling parameters when the destination does not support negotiation of PLUTs. Has no meaning for store destinations.
Specifies whether the destination allows Perception LUT Tonescaling with TFT set and contrast setting. Determines if the MIM will send Perception LUT
Tonescaling parameters when the destination does not support negotiation of
PLUTs. Has no meaning for store destinations.
Specifies whether the destination allows Presentation Lookup Tables (PLUTs).
PLUTs are used to standardize “tonescaling” information for the same image on any type of PRINTER. Information in PLUT includes curve shape, contrast, pivot density, TFT set, DMIN, DMAX, and border DMAX. Parameter has no meaning for store destinations.
These attributes (MODALITY, body part, and image tone adjustment) can be used by some destinations to enhance image quality. The parameter attributes are automatically sent to the store destination.
Range
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No.
NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 7–26 M952 Usage Parameters - for Print Destinations
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
[M952]
Item
Minimum Horizontal/Vertical
Magnification
Maximum Horizontal/Vertical
Magnification
Minimum DMAX for M952
Command Devices
Description
Select [M952] to display the information indicated in this table.
Enter the minimum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is allowed by the destination. This parameter does not apply to store destinations.
Enter the maximum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is allowed by the destination. This parameter does not apply to store destinations.
Enter the minimum DMAX value that is allowed by the destination when mapping to click counts.
N/A
0 - 64
Range
0 - 64
1.5 - 2.0
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-59
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up a Network Store Destination
Important
• Before you enter the Storage Destination Parameters, verify the information at the Destination.
• If this is the first Storage Destination, see “Enabling Software Licenses” in Section 4.
• In the “Destination Parameters” window, press [Tab] on the LAPTOP COMPUTER to advance to the next field.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Destination.
[2] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select:
• [Add]
• [Store]
• [Qualified] or [Unqualified]
[3] Select the store destination and click [OK].
7-60 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
[4] At the “General” parameters window, enter the following parameters. See Table 7-27.
(a) “Logical Name”
(b) “IP Address”
[5] Click [Next].
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-61
SERVICE MANUAL
[6] In the “DICOM” window, enter the required information (see Table 7-27).
[7] Click [Finish]. This will select default values for the following groups of parameters:
• Supported Items
• Formats
• Page Formatting
• SCU
Note
Descriptions of the parameters in these groups is provided in Table 7–28 through Table 7–31.
Table 7–27 Destination Parameters: Names, Addresses and DICOM Information
Item Description
Logical Name
IP Address
Site-specific name that you must enter for a particular Destination.
The KEYPAD displays this name when the operator selects a
Destination. The MIM requires a unique “Logical Name.” The
“Logical Name” of the DICOM PRINT SERVER is the “AE
Title”.
Site-specific address that identifies the Destination on the network. The Service Application for the MIM requires the user to enter a value. Two or more Destinations must not have the same IP
Address.
Database Name The name of the Destination selected from the Destination database. This is a “view only” field.
Model The model of the Destination. The MIM uses this data to optimize the page format validation for the particular Destination. This is a
“view only” field.
Memory The amount of memory in megabytes residing in the Destination.
The MIM uses this value to validate the format. This value is sitespecific. The Service Application for the MIM requires that the user enter a value in this field.
[DICOM Info] Select [DICOM Info] to display the DICOM information indicated in this table.
Protocol Protocol used to communicate with the Destination.
MEDICAL VIEWING STATION
(MVS), MEDICAL IMAGE AND
INFORMATION LIBRARY (MIIL)
1 - 99
Range
1 - 9 alphanumeric characters
No spaces allowed.
Underscores are allowed.
4 fields of 1 - 254 where each field is separated by a period. For example:
149.110.98.10
1 - 13 alphanumeric characters
N/A
Service Class
Port Number
The service class provided by the Destination.
The port number of the Destination that the MIM uses to make a socket connection for sending and receiving DICOM messages.
DICOM 3.0
Store
0 - 65535; default 104
AE Title The Applications Entity (AE) Title specifies the Destination application that the MIM must communicate with for successful
DICOM communications. The field width for this parameter is 1 -
16 alphanumeric characters.
1 - 16 alphanumeric characters
Timers/Counters] This feature is used for DICOM communication, and is configurable per site. It specifies the number of retries per message and the amount of time to wait for a response after sending a message.
7-62 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 7–28 Supported Items Parameters - for Store Destinations
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Item
[Supported
Items]
Collation
Description
Select [Supported Items] to display the supported features indicated in this table.
Enables “study mode” operation at the KEYPAD and has the Destination print the set of all films that belong to the same study. Select if the destination allows Collation.
Common Text Enables the user to enter common text information (including the macros for time/date, etc.) at the KEYPAD for printing at the bottom of each film. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format. Select if the destination allows Common text.
Tonescaling on
Image Basis
Enables the user to change the curve shape in the middle of a page and select a curve shape series from the KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows Tonescaling on Image Basis.
Media Bin
Default
Pivot Density
Print Quality
Selects a default media bin at the KEYPAD when the media size/type is not selected by a
DICOM input. Select if the destination allows this feature.
Range
N/A
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Selects a pivot density setting from the KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows pivot density. Yes, No
Selects the print quality to be used when printing the page from the KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows different printing qualities.
Yes, No
Yes, No
Remote Image
Deletion
Rotation
Sends images to the destination as soon as they are acquired from the imaging source/image node. Select if the destination allows remote image deletion.
Prevents the customer from selecting a landscape page for formats that are normally portrait
(and vice versa) from the KEYPAD that the destination does not allow. The MIM uses this to validate the format. Select if the MIM allows page rotation.
Yes, No
Yes, No
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-63
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 7–29 Format Parameters - for Store Destinations
Item Description
[Format Types] Select [Format Types] to display the information indicated in this table.
Custom Formats Custom formats enables the selection of formats 101 and 102 from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Row Symmetric
Formats
Allows the user to select formats that only have a line of symmetry in the vertical direction from an Autofilming Link or through a DICOM network. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Slide Format
Super Slide
Format
Allowable
Formats
Enables the selection of slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. The
MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Enables the selection of super slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs.
The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
A list of formats that the destination allows. This list can be customized to control what the users see for a specific destination. Each format (1up, 2up, 4up, etc.) has 1 setting.
N/A
Yes, No
Range
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
7-64 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 7–30 Page Formatting Parameters - for Store Destinations
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Item
[Formatting
Parameters]
Aspect Ratio Mix on
Page
Image Size Mix in
Std Fmt
DICOM Annotation
Box
Requested Size
Scale
Requested Size Mix in Row
Trim
Aspect Ratio Mix in
Row
Image Size Mix in
Row
Requested Image
Size
Description
Select [Formatting] to display the Formatting information indicated in this table.
Mixed aspect ratio on the same page is allowed by the destination. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows mixed image size on a standard format. This indicates if the image size can be changed on a page with a row/column symmetric format. The images will be scaled differently to print all the images at the same time. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows page annotation. This indicates if the destination allows the DICOM Annotation Box for selecting the band of text that will be placed on each film. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows the user to request an image to fit the image cell allowed by the destination. The size of the image should be scaled to match the available image cell area. The printer places a notice on the output indicating that the operation was done. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows all images of the same size in a row. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows Trim. This allows the user to select a border around each image from the KEYPAD or from other input devices.
Mixed aspect ratio in the same row allowed by the destination. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows mixed image size in row. This indicates if the image size can be changed in a row independent of the page format. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination can print images at a specific size. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Range
N/A
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-65
SERVICE MANUAL
Item
Requested Size Mix on Page
True Landscape
Maximum Images
Per Band
Maximum Bands
Per Page
Maximum Image
Columns
Maximum Image
Rows
Description
Select if the destination allows the same size for all images on the page. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Select if the destination allows a true landscape orientation.
Enter the maximum images per band allowed by the destination.
Enter the maximum bands per page allowed by the destination.
Enter the number of maximum image columns allowed by the destination.
Enter the number of maximum image rows allowed by the destination.
Pixel Pitch
Minimum
Horizontal
Separation
Minimum Vertical
Separation
Enter the number of pixels per millimeter for the destination.
The number of columns that separate images in the horizontal direction. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
The number of rows that separate image bands in the vertical direction. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Trim Width Enabled The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction when trim is on. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Trim Width
Disabled
The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction when trim is not on. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.
Range
Yes, No
Yes, No
1 - 32
1 - 32
0 - 5000
0 - 5400
0 - 32
0 - 20
0 - 10
0 - 5
0 - 5
7-66 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Table 7–31 SCU Parameters - for Store Destinations
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Item
Density Space
Luminance Space
Variable Border
Density
Curve Shape
Tonescaling
Perception LUT
Tonescaling
PLUT Service
Extended Print
Attributes
Description
Density space allowed by destination. Determines if the MIM can send images using density space (code value 0 is white, and code value 255 is black). In
DICOM networks, density space is indicated in the photometric interpretation attribute of the Image SOP as “monochrome 1.”
Luminance space allowed by destination. Determines if the MIM can send images using luminance space (code value 0 is black and code value 255 is white). In DICOM, luminance space is indicated in the photometric interpretation attribute of the Image SOP as “monochrome 2.”
Indicates whether the destination allows the user to select a border density between black and clear. The parameter has no meaning for store destinations.
Specifies whether the destination allows Curve Shape Tonescaling with Curve shape and contrast. Determines if the MIM will send Curve Shape Tonescaling parameters when the destination does not support negotiation of PLUTs. Has no meaning for store destinations.
Specifies whether the destination allows Perception LUT Tonescaling with TFT set and contrast setting. Determines if the MIM will send Perception LUT
Tonescaling parameters when the destination does not support negotiation of
PLUTs. Has no meaning for store destinations.
Specifies whether the destination allows Presentation Lookup Tables (PLUTs).
PLUTs are used to standardize “tonescaling” information for the same image from any type of PRINTER. Information in PLUT includes curve shape, contrast, pivot density, TFT set, DMIN, DMAX, and border DMAX. Parameter has no meaning for store destinations.
These attributes (MODALITY type, body part, and image tone adjustment) can be used by some destinations to enhance image quality. The parameter attributes are automatically sent to the store destination.
Range
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-67
SERVICE MANUAL
Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for a HIS/RIS GATEWAY
Setting Up an HIS/RIS Gateway for a MIM with TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD
Important
Each input channel must be set up. To set up the MODALITY information the first time, do all remaining steps. If the
MODALITY information has previously been set up, advance to Step 3 .
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Direct Connect.
[2] At the “Configuration” window, select Modality Info>Modify.
[3] At the prompt “Are you sure?,” click [OK]. The LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the “Modality Info.”
[4] At the “Type” line, select the Down Arrow and highlight a MODALITY from the list.
Note
The “Type” parameter enables “preferences” and “tonescaling” on some WORKSTATIONS. “Type” sets up an algorithm for the MODALITY (e.g., MR for Magnetic Resonance). The other fields can be any information that is meaningful to you and the site. Once set up, the information for the MODALITY will be used for HIS/RIS and storage class destinations.
[5] Enter any additional information in other fields.
[6] At the “Modality Info” screen, click [OK].
[7] At the “Configuration” window, click [Close].
Note
Check the Storage Destination connection by executing a ping. If the ping does not work, you will have to set up the destination or troubleshoot the problem.
[8] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Diagnostics>Network.
[9] At the “Network Diagnostics” window, press [Run].
[10] At the “Input IP Address” window, enter the “IP Address” of the storage device.
[11] Click [OK].
[12] At the “Network Diagnostics” window, press [Cancel].
[13] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>HIS/RIS Gateway.
Important
• You must set up the HIS/RIS Gateway at the KEYPAD for the MIM to successfully query the “Patient Worklist.” See
Section 13 for instructions for setting up a “Mitra PACS Broker” to send Event Notifications to the MIM.
• When the KEYPAD on the MIM displays either “Study Info” or the “Patient List” screen, the application software for the
MIM queries the HIS/RIS GATEWAY every 2 minutes and updates the new information on the “Patient List” screen.
• The KEYPAD displays records in the “Patient List” for a configurable time.
7-68 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
[14] At “HIS/RIS Gateway Configuration,” enter the correct values:
IP address
Parameter
AE Title
Port Number
Override Study Description with RPD
Scheduled Procedure Start
Time
Support Study Description
Description
Site specific
The Application Entity (AE) Title of the HIS/RIS Gateway
The DICOM communication port
Determines whether the MIM will query the HIS/RIS
BROKER by the study description (default) or the requested procedure description. The MIM will display the requested procedure description (RPD) in the study description field when this option is selected.
Disabling causes the MIM not to request the scheduled procedure start time on a query.
Disabling causes the MIM not to query the Broker for Study
Description.
Mitra GATEWAY
Site specific
BROKER
3320
On, off
On, Off
On, Off
[15] Press [Set].
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-69
SERVICE MANUAL
Adding the “Station Name” at the KEYPAD
[1] Using the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD, press:
(a) [Main Menu]
(b) [Service]
(c) [More Options]
(d) [HIS/RIS Configuration]
(e) [Add Station Name]
[2] Using either the KEYPAD or the MINI-KEYBOARD, type the name of the station and then press [Enter].
[3] Press [Return].
[4] Press [Polling Interval].
[5] Type in the interval (in minutes) at which the MIM will poll the Broker for Patient List updates and press [Enter].
[6] Press [Retention Period].
[7] Type in the length of time (in hours) that items will remain in the patient list before deleting and press [Enter].
[8] Press [Return] 2 times.
[9] Press [Acquisition].
Checking the HIS/RIS Connection
Important
If the HIS/RIS connection is not functioning, an error message “WORKLIST CONN. TIMEOUT” displays on the “Study Info”
MIM KEYPAD screen.
See “Troubleshooting the HIS/RIS Gateway Connection.”
[1] At the “Main Menu” screen on the KEYPAD, press [Acquisition] and then [Study Info].
[2] At the “Study Info” screen, press [Patient List].
[3] Check that the Hospital Administrator makes correct entries for today’s date.
Note
If patient information exists, it appears in the “Patient Info” field.
Troubleshooting the HIS/RIS Gateway Connection
[1] Use the “MIM Service Application” to “ping” the IP Address of the HIS/RIS GATEWAY.
[2] Check that the Station Name is entered correctly. The Station Name is used by the MIM to query the HIS/RIS GATEWAY for Patient Worklist Records.
[3] Check that the Hospital Administrator correctly enters the Patient Records at the HIS/RIS GATEWAY for today’s date.
Disabling the HIS/RIS GATEWAY
Note
This procedure allows you to use “Study Info” or “Patient List” screen on the KEYPAD to stop querying the HIS/RIS Gateway every 2 minutes.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>HIS/RIS Gateway.
[2] Press [Reset]. The IP Address is cleared.
7-70 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the BAR CODE READER Option
Setting up the BAR CODE READER
The BAR CODE READER supports the bar code standard 39 used by most HIS/RIS systems and full ASCII decode. The BAR
CODE READER can be configured to work with or without a HIS/RIS system to reduce or eliminate the user entry of patient demographics at the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD or KEYBOARD.
[1]At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Direct Connect.
Note
Changing parameters in the following procedure will take the system off-line.
[2]To display the “Parameters: Touchscreen Keypad” window, click:
• [Keypad]
• [Modify]
• [OK]
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-71
SERVICE MANUAL
[3]At “Demographic Input Device”, select Bar Code Reader.
[4]Click [Configure].
7-72 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
[5]Based on the customer needs, select the primary field that matches the BAR CODE LABEL at the site. Enter prefix and/or suffix sizes, discriminators, and/or leading zero filter as needed:
Parameter
Primary Field
Description
The demographic field that is used to search the patient list for a matching record. This is also the field that receives scanned data when:
• no discriminator is found.
• the scan was done while in the Acquisition screen.
Range
PATIENT NAME
PATIENT ID
BIRTHDATE
SEX
ACCESSION NUMBER
REFERRING PHYSICIAN
Prefix Size
Suffix Size
Discriminator
Leading Zero Filter
Patient ID
Accession Number
Automatic Search
Date Format Delimiter
• no field is currently selected on the “Study Info” screen.
A prefix filter size for each demographic field. Specifies the number of characters to remove from the front of the received data.
A suffix filter size for each demographic field. Specifies the number of characters to remove from the end of the received data.
Discriminators are characters that you can associate with each piece of patient information (patient name, patient ID, etc.) to tell the BAR CODE READER which type of information you have scanned.
To use discriminators, you must have a symbol(s) or a special character as part of the patient information. You configure the
MIM to read and understand the symbol(s) or special characters when scanned with the BAR CODE READER.
For example, if you associate the character “%” with patient names, the customer can scan the BAR CODE LABEL with the patient name, and the name automatically populates the
Patient Name field. Using discriminators eliminates the need for the customer to highlight the appropriate field before they scan the LABEL.
A leading zero filter switch from Patient ID and Accession
Number. Specifies whether or not to remove leading zeros from the data scanned.
Enable Automatic Search.
A switch for automatic search on the primary demographic field. Enables the automatic search of the local patient list when any bar code data is received for the Primary Field.
The delimiter for date of birth demographic field. Allows variable length day, month, and year.
Note
The birthdate format is determined by the region of the selected language:
• US: mmddyy
0 to N
0 to N
1 or more characters from the ASCII character set.
On, off
Recommend OFF without
HIS/RIS and ON with
HIS/RIS
None (mmddyy) backslash “/” (mm/dd/yy) hyphen “-” (mm-dd-yy) underscore “_”
(mm_dd_yy) period “.” (mm.dd.yy)
• Europe: ddmmyy
• Asia: yymmdd
[6]Click “Automatic Search” to enable.
[7]To exit, click:
• [OK]
• [OK]
• [Close]
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-73
SERVICE MANUAL
Using the BAR CODE READER with HIS/RIS
[1]At any screen, scan the BAR CODE LABEL. You receive 1 of the following messages:
•1 record found on the local MIM database.
The patient is updated with all the study information. The information is displayed after “NAME:” above “Study
Info”. The record received from the HIS/RIS cannot be edited.
•No matching records were found.
The study information you scanned will be entered, and all additional fields will be blank. You must select [Study
Info] to enter all missing information.
•More than 1 record is found.
The user must select [Study Info], and then select [Patient List] to select the correct record.
[2]To check initial operation, select [Study Info], and verify: a.Correct Information was placed in the Primary Field.
b.Correct information is present.
Using the BAR CODE READER without HIS/RIS
Important
• Before you scan the LABEL, you must highlight the correct field on the “Study Info” screen. When you scan the LABEL, the information is placed in the field you have highlighted. If the site is configured with discriminators, the information will be placed in the field according to the site setup.
• You can only retrieve 1 piece of information from each BAR CODE LABEL, for example, Patient Name or Patient ID.
[1]At any screen, scan the BAR CODE LABEL.
[2]From the “Study Info” field, you can view, edit, or delete the information as necessary.
[3]Complete the 5 required demographic fields.
7-74 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the MODALITY Store Option
A MODALITY can be set up to store from the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD by connecting a cable from the KEYPAD to a switch on the MODALITY. The MODALITY must have a switch available for this purpose. See “Connecting the KEYPAD to the
MODALITY” in Section 3. If the KEYPAD has been connected to the MODALITY, do the following procedure:
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Direct Connect.
Note
Changing parameters in the following procedure will take the system off line.
[2] To display the “Parameters: Touchscreen Keypad” window, click:
• [Keypad]
• [Modify]
• [OK]
[3] In the “Store Connection” panel, select “Modality.”
[4] Click [OK].
8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-75
SERVICE MANUAL
This page is intentionally blank.
7-76 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
Section 8: Obtaining Optimum Images
Introduction
This section includes procedures for obtaining optimum images after initial configuration of the MIM. The procedures apply to images sent to the:
• Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER
• Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER
• Kodak Ektascan 160 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8300 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / PLUS
• Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / STANDARD
• Kodak DryView 8600 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8610 LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / PLUS
• Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / STANDARD
• Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER
• Kodak DryView 969 HQ LASER IMAGER
• Kodak DryView 969 HQT LASER IMAGER
The procedures in this section include:
Creating optimum images for an SCP. Either the “MIM Service Application” or the DISPLAY KEYPAD is used for this procedure.
Creating optimum images for an SCU. Either the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD or the PRINT KEYPAD is used for this procedure.
Note
Information on Transfer Function Tables (TFTs) and User Lookup Tables (ULUTs) is provided at the end of this section.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-1
SERVICE MANUAL
Using the “MIM Service Application” to Create Optimum Images for the SCP
This procedure sets up SCP image processing defaults for all MODALITIES that sends images to a PRINTER through the MIM.
[1] Send an image from each SCU to record its IP Address with the MIM.
[2] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>SCP Services.
[3] From the “List of Connected SCUs,” select the first SCU and click [Modify].
8-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Figure 8–1
SCP Parameters - Image Optimization
Obtaining Optimum Images
recommended parameter values.
[5] Click on the Other Printer Options tab to select the second screen of parameters.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-3
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 8–2
SCP Parameters - Other Printer options
[7] Send an image from the SCU to the MIM and PRINTER, and check quality of the image.
[8] Repeat this procedure from Step 1 for each SCU.
8-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
Table 8–1 Setting Defaults for the Image Processing Parameters
Selection
Parameter Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS
Services Provided to SCU Select PLUT
Tonescaling Method
TFT/ULUT file
Select Perception LUT*
Select the TFT or ULUT file that applies to MODALITY.*
Does not apply to 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER.
ICC Profile
(color compensation)
Contrast (dry)
Does not apply.
Image Dmin
Image Dmax
Type a number from 1 to 15,* except for 8600 and 8610
LASER IMAGER, see note**.
Type 0.0*
Type a number from 1.7 to 3.2 for all, except type
3.5 for 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER.*
Modality Type
Body Part
Does not apply.
Does not apply.
160, 1120, 2180 LASER
IMAGERS/PRINTER
Select PLUT
Select Curve Shape*
Does not apply.
Does not apply.
Does not apply.
Type 0.0*
Type a number from 1.7 to 3.2 for
160, 1120, 2180 IMAGERS.
Select correct type.*
Does not apply to 160, 1120, 2180
IMAGERS.*
Does not apply.
Modality Group Type a number from 1 to 11. Applies only to 8600 and 8610
LASER IMAGER. See note***
Does not apply.
Curve Shape
Contrast (wet)
Interpolation Type
Convolution Group
Does not apply.
Select Cubic. Applies only to 8600 and 8610 LASER
IMAGER.
Type a number from 0 to 11. Applies only to 8600 and 8610
LASER IMAGER.
Type a number from 0 to 69.* 30 is recommended.
Type a number from -5 to +5.
Recommend 0 for DMI.
Select Bilinear, Cubic or
Replicate.*
Does not apply.
Gamma Table Type 0 for Linear in Density. Type 1 for Linear in
Xmittance. Applies only to 8600 and 8610 LASER
IMAGER.
Does not apply.
Smoothing Type Type a number from 0 to 15 for all.* (1 is recommended for
8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER.)
Select Normal or Reverse.
Type a number from 1 to 15.*
Image Polarity Select Normal or Reverse.
* Selecting Always Apply will cause the parameter set at the SCP to be used, not the corresponding parameter from the
SCU.
** For 8600 and 8610: The range is 1-12. Set Contrast to 3 for GE Senographe 200D, 6 for Lorad TDMS, and 3 for Fischer.
*** For 8600 and 8610: Set Modality Group to 6 for GE Senographe 200D, 7 for Lorad TDMS, and 3 for Fischer.
Note
Functions of the image processing parameters are described in Table 8–3 on Page 8 – 6 .
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-5
SERVICE MANUAL
Table 8–2 Setting Defaults for Status Reporting, Annotation, Printer Parameters, Film and Page Options, and Image
Resizing
Parameter
Status Reporting
Annotation (Common Text)
Elements
Printer Parameters
Film and Page Options
For all Kodak LASER IMAGERS/PRINTERS:
For “N-Event Reporting”: Select Send N-Event Reports.*
Default is De-Select for Siemens products. May need be selected for other products.
For “Warning Status”: Select Off or On.* (Default is On).
Select Print Date to display current date on film.*
Select Print Time to display current time on film.*
Select Page Number to display sequential numbers on film.*
Select Hospital Name to display Site/Hospital name field within Service Tracking
Information screen on film.*
Select Modality ID to display a name of the MODALITY on film. Type the name to be displayed the adjacent text box.*
For “Priority”: Select Low, Normal or Stat.*
For “Border”: Select Clear or Black.”*
For “Film Base”: Select Clear Film, Blue Film or Paper.*
For “Film Size”: Select the film size to be used. *
Image Resizing
Text Box Relocation
For “Film Output Destination”: Select Bin 0-9, 969 Processor or 969 Magazine.*
Select Minify/Scale or Crop to resize images.
For “Text Box Relocation”: select Top, Bottom, or None to cut and place text information back in cropped images.
SourceID
Border DMAX
Not adjustable - for information only.
Type a number from 0.00 to 3.99. Note: for the 160, 2180 and 8900 the default border
Dmax = Image Dmax.
* Selecting Always Apply will cause the parameter set at the SCP to be used, not the corresponding parameter from the SCU.
Table 8–3 Image Processing Parameter Definitions
PLUT
Parameter
Tonescaling Method
TFT/ULUT file Transfer Function Table/ User Lookup Table File- A set of curves that can be selected according to MODALITY requirements. See the descriptions of TFTS and ULUTs later in this section.
Used with a TFT/ULUT set, this number controls which TFT/ULUT curve will be used.
Contrast (dry)
ICC Profile (CRT1-CRT6) Used with DMI 1200 and 3600 color PRINTERS only. A CRT profile is selected to help the image data match that of the monitor of the MODALITY. As the CRT number is increased, the image darkens. Does not apply to V_6.0.
Image Dmin (0.00-3.98)
Image Dmax (0.01-3.99)
Curve Shape (0.0-69)
Contrast (wet) (-5 to +5)
Descriptions
Presentation Lookup Table - This DICOM standard for tonescaling attribute can be sent by the
SCU to help provide an optimum image. If checked, the SCP will negotiate PLUT Service if requested by the SCU.
Perception LUT - This is a Kodak standard that uses TFT sets to help provide optimum images.
It is used normally with Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS, but can be used also with the 1120 and 2180 LASER IMAGERS.
Curve Shape - This is a Kodak standard that uses curve shape to help provide optimum images.
It is used normally with 1120, 2180, and 160 IMAGERS/PRINTERS.
Indicates the minimum density of the image area of the film. Must be lower than Image Dmax.
Indicates the maximum density of the image area of the film. Must be higher than Image Dmin and cannot be higher than Border Density.
This field allows for a coarse adjustment in matching the film to the MONITOR. Curve shape 0 is linear. Increasing the value in this field enhances density differences in the dark areas of the image.
Used with Curve Shape to allow a fine adjustment in matching the film to the MONITOR.
8-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
Parameter
Modality Type
Body Part
Modality Group (1-11)
Interpolation Type
Convolution (kernel) Group
(0-11)
Gamma Table (0-1)
Descriptions
Selected to help provide an optimum image according to type of MODALITY (CT, MR, etc.).
Used only with 1120 and 2180 IMAGERS/PRINTERS.
Adjusts the image depending on body part. Used only by 1200 and 3600 DMI.
Does not apply to V_6.0 and above.
Used by the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER only. The number selects a ULUT from among a group:
1 = upmsv3kp.w8u
2 = u693c0p.8wu
3 = u713c0p.w8u
4 - gsdfp.w8u
5 = gsdfll0p.w8u
6 = gsdfaa0p.w8u
7-11 - upmsv3kp.w8u
Selected to help provide an optimum image by specifying characteristics of image pixels and image appearance. Options are Cubic, Replicate, Bi-linear, or None. Used only with the 1120 and 2180 PRINTERS.
Used only with the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER to select the smoothing group to be used.
Border DMAX
Smoothing Type (0-15)
Image polarity
Priority
Border
Film Base
Film Size
Film Output Destination
Send N-Event Reports
Warning Status
Annotation (Common Text)
Elements
Image Resizing
Negotiate Color Print
Used only with the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER to select either the Linear in Density (0) or
Linear in Transmittance (1) algorithm.
Limits the maximum density of the image border. Increasing the value increases the maximum density of the image border.
The value must be equal to or greater than the image dmax value.
Selects a “smoothing” value (level of smoothing/sharpness). Used only with Kodak DryView
LASER IMAGERS.
Determines whether image is normal or reversed in polarity.
Determines whether print priority is Low, Normal or Stat (high).
Selects either a Black or Clear image border.
Selects BLUE FILM, CLEAR FILM, or PAPER.
Selects a default size for the film.
Indicates film destination: Processor, Magazine, or (for 2180 PRINTER only) Bin 0-9
Enables SCP support of N-Event reporting for this SCU.
Enables or disables PRINTER warning messages to SCU.
Print Date - Prints the date the image file was received.
Print Time - Prints the time the image file was received.
Page Number - Prints page numbers on film.
Hospital Name - Prints the Hospital Name text field entered in the “Service Tracking Menu” of the “MIM Service Application.”
Modality ID - Prints the text entered in the adjacent field.
Image Resizing: The Requested Decimate / Crop DICOM element within DICOM Basic Print is supported and determines if an image should be cropped, minified, or scaled when the size or requested size of the image is greater than the printable area of the film. Images are automatically resized using a combination of Scaling, Minification, and Cropping. An icon is printed at the bottom right hand corner of the film indicating images were resized and the type of resizing method applied.
When enabled, the MIM SCP will attempt to negotiate color print SOP with the SCU.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-7
SERVICE MANUAL
Parameter
Minify/Scale
Descriptions
Select Minify/Scale to enable both minification and scale reduction and applies the appropriate method, where:
• Minify: reducing the raw physical image to a new smaller physical size maintaining the aspect ratio of the original image (removing pixel data). An image might be minified if the image size is larger than the media in the laser imager.
• Scale: reducing Requested Image Size to a smaller size that can be successfully printed. An image might be scaled if the requested image size cannot be magnified to the full size requested. The full image is printed but the size of the image is reduced to allow it to print on the media that is closest to the requested size.
Crop
Minify/Scale is the default.
Select Crop when using Requested Image Size to remove the image’s perimeter to allow the image to fit on the media and print the same scale as the anatomical area of interest.
Cropping: Removing image data from the outer edges of the image so that it fits on the printable film area maintaining aspect ratio. Cropping allows “true size” printing for larger images. True size printing provides a common scale between images captured on analog systems that use medical x-ray film exposed by phosphor screens in cassettes and printed digital images. The anatomical area of interest is printed at the same size that it is captured on the analog system.
Text Box Relocation
Caution
With cropping, the edges of the image file are removed. If anatomical areas of interest are near an outer image edge, they might be removed from the image when it is printed. Do not use cropping for images with areas of interest near the edges or corners.
Allows patient and exam information to be cut and placed back in a cropped image.
Caution
• When Top or Bottom is selected, the corners are cut and placed back into the cropped image.
If anatomical areas of interest are near the image corners, image data might be skewed or obscured if the corner areas are moved. If anatomical areas of interest are near an image corner, select None before you print.
• Patient and exam information in any area but the top or bottom corners is not supported.
Depending on the location, the information might be cropped from the image.
8-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
Using the DISPLAY KEYPAD to Set Up Image Parameters for the SCP
[1] Send an image from each SCU to record its IP Address with the MIM.
[2] Press [Menu] on the DISPLAY KEYPAD to display the Main Menu.
[3] Press [Down Arrow] until the cursor is at “Service Menu”.
[4] Press [Menu] to display the Service Menu.
> Exit Menu
Machine Setup Menu
Configuration Menu
Diagnostics Menu
SCP Services
[5] Press [Down Arrow] until the cursor is at “SCP Services”.
[6] Press [Menu]. The screen displays the IP Address and description of each SCU that is connected to the MIM.
> Exit Menu
149.98.202.203 MIM
10.211.23.129 Arrhus_DCP
129.176.155.74 Mayo_DCP
[7] Press [Down Arrow] until the cursor is at the IP Address of the first SCU to be set up.
[8] Press [Menu] to display the “SCP Services” screen.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-9
SERVICE MANUAL
[9] Use the [Down Arrow] or [Up Arrow] key to select parameters to be changed.
Note
For the parameter values that apply to the MODALITY, see Table 8–1 on page Page 8 – 5
and Table 8–2 on Page 8 – 6 . Full
descriptions of the parameters are available in the User Guide for the MIM.
[10] Use the [Arrow] and [Menu] keys to change parameter values when necessary.
Note
If “Always Apply” is set to “Y,” the system values will be used, not the parameter input from the SCU.
[11] After setting the parameter values, send an image from the SCU to the MIM and check quality of the image.
[12] Repeat steps
Step 11 for each SCU on the list displayed in step
Using the KEYPAD to Create Optimum Images for the SCU
For MOD SERVERS, parameters for the images can be set up using the TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD. Complete
• For a TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD: Display the “Keypad Svcs” menu. After making a selection, adjust within the “Imaging
Options” menu.
• For a PRINT KEYPAD: Display the “Machine Setup” menu. After making a selection, adjust within the “Imaging Options” menu.
Table 8–4 SCU Parameters for Images Set by KEYPAD
Parameter
TFT/ULUT
Curve Shape
Contrast
_
For Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS
TOUCHSCREEN KP
See Note below.
Enter a number from 1 to
15
PRINT KP
See Note below.
_
Enter a number from
1 to15
For other Kodak LASER IMAGERS/PRINTERS
TOUCHSCREEN KP PRINT KP
_
Enter a number from 0 to
6.9
Enter a number from -5 to
+5
_
Enter a number from 0 to
6.9
Enter a number from -5 to
+5
Dmax
Dmin
Interpolation
Border
Border Dmax
Polarity
Enter a number from 0.01 to 3.99
Enter a number from 0.00 to 3.98
Select Curve, Replicate,
Bilinear or None
Select Black or Clear
Enter 3.99
Select Normal or
Reverse
Enter a number from
0.01 to 3.99
Enter a number from
0 to 3.98
Enter a number from 0.01 to 3.99
Enter a number from 0.00 to 3.98
Select Curve,
Replicate, Bilinear,
None
Select Curve, Replicate,
Bilinear, None
Select Black or Clear Select Black or Clear
_
_
3.99
Select Normal or
Reverse
Enter a number from 0.01 to 3.99
Enter a number from 0 to
3.98
Select Curve, Replicate,
Bilinear, None
Select Black or Clear
_
_
Note: Selection varies by MODALITY. See information on TFTs and ULUTs on the following pages.
8-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
Setting Up Print Server for True Size Printing - Cropping of Images
When a DICOM modality such as CR or DR uses “requested image size” to send an image to the printer that is beyond the range of the printer, MIM can crop the image so that it fits on the film achieving true size. In some cases, a site may wish to print only some of the films from the modality using true size printing (cropping) and some films without cropping.
Caution
With cropping, the edges of the image file are removed. If anatomical areas of interest are near an outer edge of the image, they might be removed from the image when it is printed. Do not use cropping for images with the areas of interest near the edges or corners.
Important
To set up using both cropping and non cropping, it is necessary to create 2 destinations at the SCU with the same IP address and port, giving 2 unique AE Titles for the destinations. Determine if a customer wants to print using both cropping and non-cropping from a modality.
Setting Up the SCU for Cropping
[1] Send an image from each SCU to record its IP Address.
[2] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>SCP Services.
[3] From the “List of Connected SCUs”, select the correct SCU and click [Modify].
[4] Click [Other Printer Options], and select “Crop” under “Image Resizing”.
[5] Check “Always Apply”.
[6] Select “Top” or “Bottom” under “Text Box Relocation” depending on the location of the text, if text on image will be saved and relocated.
[7] Click [OK] to close the SCP Parameters screen.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-11
SERVICE MANUAL
Text Box Relocation
Important
This procedure needs to be done using pcANYWHERE and the Service Application that resides on the MIM.
Note
You can only relocate text from 2 places on the image.
Caution
When Top or Bottom is selected, the corners are cut and placed back into the cropped image. If anatomical areas of interest are near the image corners, image data might be skewed or obscured if the corners are moved. If anatomical areas of interest are near an image corner, select None before you print.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Text Box Relocation.
The “Configure Text Box Location” screen displays.
8-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
[2] Click [Refresh List] to see all the image sizes that have been sent to the Print Server.
Note
If you know the image size from the modality, and it does not appear in the list, click [Add] to directly add this image size for
Text Box Relocation configuration.
[3] Select an image size in “Columns x Rows”, and click [Modify] to edit Text Box Coordinates.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-13
SERVICE MANUAL
[4] Click [View Image] to view an image in MIM.
[5] Select the appropriate image, and click [Open].
8-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
[6] Move your mouse to the Text Area for the text box that you are relocating.
• Click to zoom an area of interest.
• Click and drag to select an area of interest and zoom.
Obtaining Optimum Images
Note
If you increase the image size too much and you can no longer determine coordinates, right-click to get the original image size.
[7] Position the mouse over the top left corner and bottom right corner of each text box and record the coordinates. The coordinates are displayed in “Pixel Value” by row and column.
[8] Enter the parameters in the “Configuration Text Box Coordinates” window.
a. At “Text Box Location” select “Top” or “Bottom”.
b. Type the values for the first text box in the “Left Text Box Coordinates”.
c. Type the values for the second text box in the “Right Text Box Coordinates”.
[9] Click [OK] to close “Configuration Text Box Coordinates”.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-15
SERVICE MANUAL
Transfer Function Table (TFT) Sets and User Lookup Tables (ULUTs)
References
This information is designed to help in the selection of the correct TFT set or ULUT during the process of image optimization.
• MPC (Maintenance Software Package) TFT Help file for LASER IMAGERS
• KHI Documentation Database (USLN331/US/EKC/IOL Product Info)
• TFTSV3.4 T S.Rev6.document
• meta_ULUTs.document
Definitions
Note
Do not confuse a TFT set with a TFT. Image quality is significantly affected by the single, specific TFT that was used in making a print. Image quality is totally unaffected by the other TFTs in the set. The TFT set is simply a container, and all of its contents may not be useful or correct for a given MODALITY or a given density setting. In fact, some TFT sets are quite diverse. They offer a wide variety of looks within a single set of 15 TFTs. Some TFTs in a given TFT set may be completely unacceptable to a customer for a specific MODALITY, while one may be just right. That is, it is preferable to any other TFT in any other TFT set.
TFT: A table (curve) used in closed-loop Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS that relates each digital input value to a corresponding target value of perceived brightness.
TFT Set: A set of 15 TFTs that represent 15 different curve shapes, each of which is associated with a corresponding userselectable contrast selection (1-15).
Contrast: A user-selectable setting from 1 through 15 on the LASER IMAGER that initiates the associated TFT for the current print.
Density: A user-selectable setting that determines the maximum density (Dmax) used in printing.
ULUT: The tables, or curves, that are used in Kodak DryView 8300, 8600, and 8610 LASER IMAGERS.
Selecting TFT Sets
When selecting a TFT for a given MODALITY, first try the contrast and density settings for the TFT set suggested in the following table. The selections shown there are recommended for the majority of users. Other selections are useful in certain situations, depending on radiologist preference, etc.
When determining with the customer which TFT set to select, it is important to print using all of the available TFTs, by using all 15 contrast settings or doing one contrast test film. It is equally important to note the specific contrast setting (i.e., the specific
TFT) and the TFT set that best satisfies the customer. Similar or identical individual TFTs may occur in multiple TFT sets. For example, in VER693C0, the popular perceived linear TFT 6 is essentially the same as TFT 9 of PMSV3K and is also similar to
TFT 8 of C3B5AX4. Where more than one TFT set contains a TFT that is satisfactory to the customer, deciding which set to install should be based on the set that gives the customer more usable choices on a contrast test.
8-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
AutoRad Workstation
(typical)
AutoRad Workstation
(others)
MODALITY
CT (typical)
CT (others)
DSA (typical)
DSA (others)
Fuji CR through 2210
CREIB or Analogic SD100
MR (typical)
MR (others)
TFT Set
VER693C0
C3B5AX4
C3B5AX4
WKSTN2A
VER693C0
VER713C0
SIECT87B
PMSV3K
VER693C0
VER713C0
VER723C0
VER713C0
VER713C0
PMSV3K
VER713C0
C3B5AX4
C3B5AX4
SFH301A4
SIEFL87B
FCR302C4
VER693C0
VER693C0
VER713C0
SIEMR87B
PMSV3K
VER693C0
AIRIS2A
Nuclear Medicine (typical) VER713C0
Nuclear Medicine (others): PMSV3K
MAXXUS
WRKSTN2A
B3C5AX4
Philips Easyvision
Philips Thoravision
Philips V3000/V4000
Picker Digital Reconstructed
Radiography (DRR)
Siemens Camera Server (Set to output linear-in-density)
VER693C0
WRKSTN2A
8E8820 – NOV 2003
9
7
8
7-8
9
6
8
10
PMSV3K
B3C5AX4
PMSV3K
6
3
6-8
6-8
9
8-12
2
8
Set to density
(1-15)
5
12
6
4
11
5
Contrast (TFT#) Density
6 3.0
Comments
Limited experience
8
10
2
6 or higher
6 or higher
6
9
8
6
3.0
3.0
3.0
Limited experience
GE Workstation with AutoRad BOARD
(limited experience)
Most CR’s (Kodak CR800, Agfa VIPs, Kodak
CR400): MagType = cubic; smoothing = 5; local PRINTER set for 12-bit
Head and body 3.0
3.0
2.8
Head and body
For Siemens, Europe. Contrast setting has little effect
Philips 3.0
2-8 Elscint
2.9-3.0 Picker PQ
GE CTi
2.7-3.0
2.9
3.0
3.0
3.0
GE DF5000 DSA
Philips DSI
3.0
2.9
ATS Dig. Fluoro
Siemens Fluorospot H (developed for HQ)
3.0
2.8
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.6
Siemens Fluorospot DSA
Picker MR
Lunar Arthroscan
For Siemens, Europe. Contrast setting has little effect
Philips Gyroscan
Elscint
Hitachi Airis
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.2
2.2
2.2
1.9
2.3
9
11
15
3.0
2.8
YMS (bone)
YMS (SPECT)
Toshiba. Limited experience
Picker (Limited Experience)
3.0
3.0
3.0
Note that TFTs 1-8 are designed for densities of 3.2 - 1.8, respectively
8-17
SERVICE MANUAL
MODALITY
Siemens Camera Server
(Others)
TFT Set
SIEWS87B
Contrast (TFT#) Density
3 2.8
10 3.0
Comments
A slight modification to WRKSTN2A, to match Siemens Sienet WS test requirements in
Europe
Equivalent To PMSV3K Siemens Polytron (TOP interface)
Ultrasound (typical)
Ultrasound (others):
SIEPOLY
PMSV3K
PMSV3K
PMSV3K
PMSV3K
8-13
9 (depends on radiologist)
12
9
2.4-2.8
2.4 - 2.8 Acuson Ultrasound
2.4
2.4
GE Ultrasound
Toshiba Ultrasound
TFT Set Descriptions
The following are the TFT set choices available for use with 969, 8500, 8700, 8100, and 8200 LASER IMAGER and 8800
MULTI-INPUT MANAGER applications.
AIRIS2A: Designed to meet Hitachi requirements for a TFT set which, when used for printing on Kodak DryView films, can perceptually match films printed on a 969 HQ (wet) LASER IMAGER when TFT Set VER693C0 (with Contrast=6 and
Dmax=3.0) is used in the HQ.
To accomplish this, the AIRIS2A TFT Set is designed for overall similarity to the VER693C0 TFT Set, but provides slightly lower measured densities in the darker part of the density range. Specifically, in the AIRIS2A Set, the Contrast=8 TFT is designed to provide dry prints which perceptually match the Contrast=6 wet prints made using VER693C0 on an HQ, with
Dmax=3.0 for both prints.
The plots of this TFT Set (see the chart below) show that all 15 of the tables have the same mid-tone brightness, with varying degrees of an S-shape which gives the strongest end-points contrast (slope) to Table 12 and the strongest mid-tone contrast to
Table 15. Note that this TFT Set provides a narrower range of curves than the VER693C0.
8-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
B3C5AX4: Allows moderate departures from the basic VER693C0 curves. Curves 2, 5, 8, 11 and 14 roughly cover the span of
VER693C0. The remaining curves provide more mid-tone brightness choices (curves 1, 4, 7, 10, and 13 = the brightest, and curves 3, 6, 9, 12, and 15 = the darkest). In all, there are 5 mid-tone contrast choices for each of 3 mid-tone brightness choices
The plots on the chart show the two-dimensional brightness/contrast combinations provided by this TFT Set. The numbering of the TFTS in the set is such that when a 3 (horizontally) x 5 (vertically) contrast test film is printed, the printed images are of decreasing brightness going from left to right and increasing mid-tone contrast going from top to bottom on the film.
C3B5AX4: Allows moderate-to-strong departures from the basic VER693C0 curves. Curves 7 through 9 cover roughly the span of VER693C0 and the remaining curves provide more choices of mid-tone brightness: Curves 1 through 3 = the brightest, and curves 13 through 15 = the darkest. In all, there are 3 mid-tone contrast choices for each of 5 mid-tone brightness choices.
The plots on the chart show the two-dimensional brightness/contrast combinations provided by this TFT Set. The numbering of the TFTS in the set is such that when a 3 (horizontally) x 5 (vertically) contrast test film is printed, the printed images are of decreasing brightness going from top to bottom and decreasing mid-tone contrast going from left to right on the film.
FCR302C4: Created specifically for use with the 3M Model 2210 CREIB interface to a Fuji Computed Radiography system.
This TFT set should not be used for any other application. The 15 TFTs in this set are designed to be used in correspondence with the 15 Dmax choices of the IMAGER (using Contrast 1 when the first Dmax setting is used, etc.). The plots in the chart
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-19
SERVICE MANUAL
below show a sagging shape, which is characteristic of a “linear in density” behavior, until maximum brightness (Dmin) is approached, at which point the curves become relatively flat.
8-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
GEHYB01: A hybrid (multi-MODALITY) TFT set that supports the various imaging MODALITIES which may be connected to a GE (Amber) Workstation. These MODALITIES include Fuji Computed Radiography (CR), CT, MR, Ultrasound and any
MODALITY that expects a linear-in-density PRINTER. The following table defines how the 15 TFTs can best be applied to the various MODALITIES supported by this TFT Set.
Contrast Setting
(TFT No.)
1
4
5
2
3
10
11
12
13
14
15
8
9
6
7
Application
Fuji CR, with Dmax = 2.6
Fuji CR, with Dmax = 2.7
Fuji CR, with Dmax = 2.8
Fuji CR, with Dmax = 2.9
Fuji CR, with Dmax = 3.0
Linear in Density, Dmax = 2.6
Linear in Density, Dmax = 2.6
Linear in Density, Dmax = 2.6
Linear in Density, Dmax = 2.6
Linear in Density, Dmax = 2.6
Ultrasound (highest mid-tone brightness)
Ultrasound (moderate mid-tone brightness)
Ultrasound, CT or MR
CT or MR
CT or MR
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-21
SERVICE MANUAL
GSDF0: A TFT set in which all 15 curves are designed to conform to the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function as applied to the case of transmissive film media under certain typical conditions. For optimum conformity with the standard, select the contrast setting in this TFT set based upon the Dmax density setting in the following table:
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
3.1
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Dmax
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
Optimum Contrast Setting
1
2
5
6
3
4
11
12
13
14
15
9
10
7
8
8-22 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
HYB60516: A hybrid (multi-MODALITY) TFT set that supports the diverse needs of several imaging MODALITIES, such as may be operating within a Lockheed (formerly Loral) network. These MODALITIES include Fuji Computed Radiography (CR),
Digital Subtraction Angiography (DSA or DSI), C-Arm applications, CT, MR, Ultrasound and Nuclear Medicine. The following table defines how these 15 individual TFTs can best be applied to the needs of various imaging modalities supported by this TFT set.
Imaging MODALITY Suitable Dmax Range
HYB60516 Applications
Preferred Dmax
Fuji CR
DSI (DSA)
C-Arm
CT
MR
Ultrasound
Nuclear Medicine
2.7 - 3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.3
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.3
Suitable TFTs
(Contrast Settings)
2
4-7
1-4
2-7
1-7
3, 5-7, 11-15
Preferred TFT
(Contrast Setting)
2
4
1
2
2
9
12
MAXXUS: Created specifically for use with the YMS SPECT to match Konica film. All 15 curves are very close to a single curve. The MAXXUS TFT Set provides a set of tables suitable for certain nuclear medicine applications, specifically, to provide a relatively flat (low contrast) curve shape in the brightest portions of an image. This minimizes the visibility of soft tissue in a bone nuclear medicine image in which bone is printed as black on a white background. This is a relatively tight TFT set, offering limited variation with contrast setting.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-23
SERVICE MANUAL
MSFDUP1: Designed to meet the density printing requirements of a TFT-based LASER IMAGER for Kodak that is used as the
PRINTER in a DUPLICATOR for Kodak equipped with a MULTI-SHEET FEEDER. The 15 individual TFTs of this TFT set are designed to map 15 different Dmin and Dmax nominal input ranges (original film) into the full density range of the imager
(approximately 0.2 to 3.1, for Kodak DryView Blue film).
Example: If the original film is a blue-based film from a LASER IMAGER, with a film Dmin of about 0.2 and a printed Dmax of about 3.0, a reasonable contrast setting for duplicating this film would be 11. However, since these input density ranges are approximate, other “similar” settings (6 in this example) could give optimal results from a user perspective. Refer to the following table of nominal contrast settings
Dmin
~ 0.05
~ 0.12
~ 0.20
Dmax ~ 3.0
C = 1
C = 6
C = 11
Nominal Contrast Settings*
Dmax ~ 3.2
C = 2
C = 7
C = 12
* For various original film density ranges.
Dmax ~ 3.4
C = 3
C = 8
C = 13
Dmax ~3.6
C = 4
C = 9
C = 14
Dmax ~ 3.8
C = 5
C = 10
C = 15
8-24 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
PMSB: Developed as a slight modification to the PMSV3K TFT Set that was previously developed for Philips Medical Systems.
This set was created by adjusting the t-values within the PMSV3K TFT Set so that when using Contrast 9 of the PMSB TFT Set match, the densities print, as accurately as possible, the latest target densities requested by Philips Medical Systems. All 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid-tone contrast (slope), but have a wide variety of brightnesses with contrast setting 1
= the darkest image and contrast setting 15 = the brightest.
PMSV3K: A set of non-S-curve TFTs, with mid-tone density gradually decreasing as the TFT number (contrast setting) is increased. This set was originally requested by Philips Medical Systems who preferred saggy curve shapes to the S-shaped curves of VER693C0 and VER713C0. All 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid-tone contrast (slope), but have a wide variety of brightnesses with contrast setting 1 = the darkest image and contrast setting 15 = the brightest.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-25
SERVICE MANUAL
SFH301A4: Composed of 15 non-S-curve curves, designed specifically for the Siemens Fluorospot H system. The plots on the chart below show a shape that is approximately “linear in brightness,” with the different minimum t-values corresponding to the different selectable Dmax values.
SIECT87: A set in which all 15 curves are very close to a single, Siemens-defined curve for CT. The following plots of this TFT
Set show a shape which is close to a “linear in brightness” shape and quite similar to the slightly S-shaped middle TFTs of the
VER693C0 TFT Set. But unlike the VER693C0 Set, this TFT Set is not designed to provide a significant range of variability to the user, but rather a small range of variability to allow a single predefined table to be matched as closely as possible.
8-26 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
SIECT87B: A slight modification to the SIECT87 TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements for CT.
SIEFC969: Designed to satisfy the requirements of Siemens for use with the Fluorospot Compact MODALITY. The t-values in this TFT Set are similar to the values defined for the SFH301A4 TFT Set, but the SIEFC969 values have been adjusted to optimally meet the needs of the Fluorscope Compact. The t-value plots below show a shape that is approximately ”linear in brightness,” with the different minimum t-values corresponding to the different selectable Dmax values.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-27
SERVICE MANUAL
SIEFL87B: A slight modification to the SFH301A4 TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements for Fluorospot DSA. The t-value plots below show a shape that is approximately ”linear in brightness,” with the different minimum t-values corresponding to the different selectable Dmax values.
SIEFL87C: A slight modification to the SIEFL87B TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the latest Siemens requirements for the Fluorospot DSA.
8-28 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
SIEFLTOP: A slight modification to the SIEWS87B TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements for Fluorospot Top systems.
SIEMR87: A set in which all 15 curves are very close to a single, Siemens-defined curve for MR. The t-value plots in the chart below show a shape which is somewhat like a “linear in brightness” shape, but with more undulations than the slightly S-shaped middle TFTs of the VER693C0 TFT Set. As with the SIECT87 TFT Set, the SIEMR87 TFT Set is not designed to provide a significant range of variability to the user, but rather a small range of variability to allow a single predefined table to be matched as closely as possible.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-29
SERVICE MANUAL
SIEMR87B: A slight modification to the SIEMR87 TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements for MR.
SIEPOLY: Equivalent to the PMSV3K TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements for
Siemens Polytron/8700 installations.
8-30 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
SIEWS87B: A slight modification to the WRKSTN2A TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements for the Sienet Workstation.
TLII: Created for use with the Toshiba Laser Imager Interface (TLII) for nuclear medicine applications. It provides several linear-in-density curves (5 with increasing density plus 5 with decreasing density). It also provides 5 approximately linear-inbrightness curves, similar to some of the VER693C0 curves, for an MR MODALITY (Toshiba Flexart). The combination of diverse curve shapes in this TFT Set, for different MODALITIES, makes it an example of a hybrid TFT Set.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-31
SERVICE MANUAL
VER693C0: A popular, general-purpose TFT set of S-shaped curves, widely used for CT, MR and certain other modalities.
Curve 6 of this set is designed to be linear-in-perceived-brightness. Contrast settings below 6 give increased contrast (slope) near the endpoints and decreased “mid-tone” (near 50% of digital input) contrast. Contrast settings above 6 give decreased contrast near the endpoints and increased mid-tone contrast. The following plots of this TFT Set show that all 15 of the tables have essentially the same mid-tone brightness, with varying degrees of an S-shape contribution which gives the strongest end-points contrast (slope) to Table 1 and the strongest mid-tone contrast (slope) to Table 15.
VER703C0: Created to provide a set of S-shaped curve choices that are intermediate-in-perceived- brightness, i.e., between those of VER693C0 TFT Set and those of VER713C0 TFT Set. All 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid-tone brightness, which is slightly brighter than the mid-tone brightness of the VER693C0 tables and slightly darker than the mid-tone brightness of the VER713C0 TFT Set. As with the VER693C0 and VER713C0 TFT Sets, there are varying degrees of an Sshape contribution which gives the strongest end-points contrast (slope) to Table 1 and the strongest mid-tone contrast (slope) to Table 15.
VER713C0: Nearly as popular as the VER693C0 Set, with a somewhat lower mid-tone density than the VER693C0 Set. This set is similar to the VER693C0 TFT Set, but with a slight increase in brightness (i.e., the VER713C0 TFT Set can be
8-32 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
characterized as having slightly lower “mid-tone density” than the VER693C0 TFT Set). All 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid-tone brightness, which is noticeably brighter than the mid-tone brightness of the VER693C0 tables. As with the
VER693C0 TFT Set, there are varying degrees of an S-shape contribution which gives the strongest end-points contrast (slope) to Table 1 and the strongest mid-tone contrast (slope) to Table 15.
VER723C0: Designed to offer another choice of curves, similar to the S-shaped curves of VER713C0, but at a brightness higher than VER713C0 (which, in turn, is brighter than VER703C0, which is brighter than VER693C0). This choice is needed at certain customer sites (e.g., at GE CT-I sites where higher brightness is desired for mid-brain gray/white matter and/or abdominal soft tissue).
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-33
SERVICE MANUAL
WRKSTN2A: Designed for post-processing imaging workstations in which curves 1 through 8 are designed to produce linear in optical density results on film, for density settings of 3.2 through 1.8, respectively. Curves 9 through 11 are the same as
VER693C0 curves 6 through 8. Curves 12 through 14 are designed for film digitizer applications. Curve 15 is the same as curve
9.
8-34 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
ULUT Set Selections for the 8300 LASER IMAGER
The following are the set choices available when using the ULUT set for 8300 LASER IMAGER applications.
GSDF6: Composed of 12 curves, all based on the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function, with parameters chosen to support the range of density (Dmax) settings available on the 8300 LASER IMAGER. The curves are designed so the contrast and density (Dmax) settings should be chosen according to the following table:
Recommended Contrast Settings
Maximum Density
See Note 1.
Recommended Contrast Setting
See Note 2.
2.0
2.1
3
4
1
2
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.7
2.9
2.6
7
8
5
6
9
10 3.1
3.3
3.5
11
12
1. As controlled by density setting.
2. For best conformance with Grayscale Standard Display Function.
GSDF6AA0: Composed of 12 curves, all based on the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function, applied to an 8300
LASER IMAGER printing at its highest density setting (Dmax = 3.5). All the curves in this ULUT set were designed based on an assumed film Dmin of 0.2 and an assumed light box luminance of 5500 cd/sq.m. The variable parameter in this family of curves is the assumed reflected ambient light for the different contrast settings. The following table shows the values used.
Assumed Reflected Ambient Light Values
Contrast Setting Assumed Reflected Ambient
Light (cd/sq.m)
1 5.5
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
10
11
12
11
16.5
22
27.5
33
38.5
44
49.5
55
60.5
66
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-35
SERVICE MANUAL
GSDF6LL0: Composed of 12 curves, all based on the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function, applied to an 8300 LASER
IMAGER printing at its highest density setting (Dmax = 3.5). All of the curves in this ULUT set were designed based on an assumed film Dmin of 0.2. In this family of curves (see the following table), the assumed light box luminance was set to different values for the different contrast settings, and, at each contrast setting, the reflected ambient light was set to be 0.5% of the light box luminance of that setting.
Assumed Light Box Luminance Values
Contrast Setting Assumed Light Box
Luminance (cd/sq.m)
1 2000
4
5
2
3
2210
2442
2699
2982
10
11
12
8
9
6
7
3295
3641
4024
4447
4914
5430
6000
LORAD03: A moderately “tight” ULUT set, intended for printing Lorad digital mammography images using an 8300 LASER
IMAGER in linear-in-transmittance 1/3 gamma mode. All of the curves of this ULUT set are close to each other and close to a single, central curve (curve 6), which was designed to provide printed densities that match as closely as possible a table of target densities desired by Lorad in order to match the density-vs-input characteristics of an Agfa printer. The table of densities (i.e., as measured on an Agfa film) is as follows:
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
Desired Densities vs. Step Numbers
Step Number Desired Optical Density
1
2
3.65
2.67
5
6
3
4
2.17
1.82
1.54
1.31
15
16
17
1.13
0.97
0.84
0.70
0.59
0.49
0.41
0.32
0.25
0.20
0.16
8-36 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
The desired densities are converted into desired t-values (for the “central” curve 6) by the WARP15 program import function.
In an actual 8610 print, t-values are mapped into the available density range of the 8300 LASER IMAGER (i.e., from approximately 0.20 film Dmin to approximately 3.5 using the highest density 8300 setting). A small range of brightness is provided in this ULUT set. Brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 through 12.
LORAD04: Similar to the LORAD03 ULUT Set that was created for Lorad, but with one difference. In the LORAD03 ULUT
Set, curve 12 is the brightest of all 12 ULUTs in the relatively tight set. In the LORAD04 ULUT Set, curve 12 is linear (i.e., a straight line). As a result, in the LORAD04 ULUT Set, curve 12 (contrast setting 12) can be used on an 8300 LASER IMAGER that is set to linear-in-density gamma mode to print images with a linear-in-density overall response.
SIECT83C: A “tight” ULUT set, with all of its curves close to each other and close to a single, central curve that was designed to provide printed densities which match, as accurately as possible, a table of target densities defined by Siemens for their CT systems.
There is a very small variation range provided in this ULUT set. Curves 1, 4, 7, and 10 give a slightly lowered mid-tone brightness. Curves 2, 5, 8, and 11 give the nominal or target mid-tone brightness, and curves 3, 6, 9, and 12 give a slightly elevated mid-tone brightness. Within each of these three groups, the mid-tone contrast increases very slightly as the contrast setting is increased (e.g., from 2 to 5 to 8 to 11).
SIEMR83C: A “tight” ULUT set, with all of its curves close to each other and close to a single, central curve that was designed to provide printed densities which match, as accurately as possible, a table of target densities defined by Siemens for their MR systems.
There is a very small variation range provided in this ULUT set. Curves 1, 4, 7, and 10 give a slightly lowered mid-tone brightness. Curves 2, 5, 8, and 11 give the nominal or target mid-tone brightness, and curves 3, 6, 9, and 12 give a slightly elevated mid-tone brightness. Within each of these three groups, the mid-tone contrast increases very slightly as the contrast setting is increased (e.g., from 2 to 5 to 8 to 11).
U1_109B: The original standard ULUT set for the 8300 LASER IMAGER. A recommended replacement for this ULUT set is the newer ULUT Set, U1_109S described below.
This ULUT Set has a diversity of curve shapes designed to accommodate the needs of a variety of imaging MODALITIES. Its
12 curves consist of 6 saggy curves that span a wide range of mid-tone brightnesses and 3 S-shaped curves at each of 2 mid-tone brightnesses. The saggy curves are often used for printing Ultrasound and nuclear medicine images, while the S-shaped curves are widely used for printing CT and MR images.
The number order of the curves (tables) in this set is designed so that when a contrast test is requested that yields 2 films with 3 columns of 2 images on each film, the first film shows the 6 images printed from upper left to lower right using the 6 saggy curves. On the second film, the left column shows the images printed using the first group of 3 S-curves and the right column shows the images printed using the second group of 3 S-curves. For these curves, overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 6. These curves are often preferred over S-shaped curves by radiologists who are working with MODALITIES such as Ultrasound or nuclear medicine.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-37
SERVICE MANUAL
Curves 7, 9, and 11 of this ULUT set are a subset of the U713C0 ULUT Set (see the graph below). A contrast setting of 7 gives the lowest mid-tone contrast in this group of 3, while a contrast setting of 11 gives the highest mid-tone contrast. These 3 curves have a higher mid-tone brightness than curves 8, 10, and 12 of this ULUT set.
Curves 8, 10, and 12 of this ULUT set are a subset of the U693C0 ULUT Set. A contrast setting of 8 gives the lowest mid-tone contrast in this group of 3, while a contrast setting of 12 gives the highest mid-tone contrast. These 3 curves have a lower midtone brightness than curves 7, 9, and 11 of this ULUT set.
Because this ULUT set has such a variety of curve shapes, with no simple relationship between contrast setting and either midtone brightness or mid-tone contrast, this set may be useful primarily as a “finder” set, to help a user decide on some other ULUT set as a final choice, within which the curve shape varies in a more continuous, intuitive way as the contrast setting is changed
(e.g., UPMSV3K, U693C0, or U713C0).
U1_109S: Like the U1_109B ULUT Set it replaces, this set has a diversity of curve shapes designed to accommodate the needs of a variety of imaging modalities. Its 12 curves consist of 6 saggy curves that span a wide range of mid-tone brightnesses, and
3 S-shaped curves at each of 2 mid-tone brightnesses. The saggy curves are often used for printing Ultrasound and nuclear medicine images, while the S-shaped curves are widely used for printing CT and MR images.
The number order of the curves (tables) in this set is designed so that when a contrast test is requested that yields 2 films with 3 columns of 2 images on each film, the first film shows the 6 images printed from upper left to lower right using the 6 saggy curves. On the second film, the left column of shows the images printed using the first group of 3 S-curves and the right column shows the images printed using the second group of 3 S-curves.
The U1_109S ULUT Set is a nearly identical replacement for the previously described U1_109B TFT Set. Whereas U1_109B had some tables that only reached 1020 instead of the full maximum scale value of 1023, all the tables of U1_109S do reach the maximum scale value. Therefore, printed densities can reach the lowest possible Dmin.
For these curves, overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 6. These curves are often preferred over S-shaped curves by radiologists who are working with modalities such as ultrasound or nuclear medicine.
Curves 7, 9, and 11 of this set are a subset of the U713C0 ULUT Set. A contrast setting of 7 gives the lowest mid-tone contrast in this group of 3, while a contrast setting of 11 gives the highest mid-tone contrast. These 3 curves have a higher mid-tone brightness than curves 8, 10, and 12 of this ULUT set.
Curves 8, 10, and 12 of this set are a subset of the U693C0 ULUT Set. A contrast setting of 8 gives the lowest mid-tone contrast in this group of 3, while a contrast setting of 12 gives the highest mid-tone contrast. These 3 curves have a lower mid-tone brightness than curves 7, 9, and 11 of this ULUT set.
8-38 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
Because this ULUT set has such a variety of curve shapes, with no simple relationship between contrast setting and either midtone brightness or mid-tone contrast, this set may be primarily useful as a “finder” set, to help a user decide on some other ULUT set as a final choice, within which the curve shape varies in a more continuous, intuitive way as the contrast setting is changed
(e.g., UPMSV3K, U693C0, or U713C0).
U693C0: Consists of “S-shaped” variations about a linear-in-perceived-brightness response. For this ULUT set, all curves intersect at the 50% point of maximum input, meaning that all contrast settings will give the same mid-tone brightness.
As the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12, the mid-tone contrast (i.e., the contrast in the middle part of the grayscale) is increased, while the contrast in the very dark and very light parts of the grayscale is decreased. This ULUT set is very suitable for CT, MR, and C-Arm applications and is also sometimes useful for nuclear medicine applications.
U713C0: Consists of S-shaped variations about a central curve which is somewhat brighter than the central linear-in-perceivedbrightness curve of the U693C0 ULUT Set. As with the U693C0 ULUT Set, all curves of this set also intersect at the 50% point of maximum input, but the mid-tone brightness of the curves in this set is somewhat higher than the mid-tone brightness of the
U693C0 ULUT Set.
As with the U693C0 ULUT Set, as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12, the mid-tone contrast (i.e., the contrast in the middle part of the grayscale) is increased, while the contrast in the very dark and very light parts of the grayscale is decreased.
This ULUT set has rather wide applicability and is often used for ultrasound, nuclear medicine and DSA. It may also be used for other MODALITIES when a brightness greater than that from the U693C0 ULUT Set is desired.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-39
SERVICE MANUAL
UPMSV3K: A relatively wide-ranging set of saggy curves. This set provides a wider choice of brightnesses than curves 1-6 of the U1_109S (or U1_109B) ULUT Set. This set is widely used in applications including ultrasound, nuclear medicine, and others where an S-shaped response curve is not desired.
For these curves, overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12. The brighter curves in this set are often preferred by radiologists who are working with modalities such as Ultrasound or nuclear medicine.
WKSTN83A: Most of the curves in this set are designed to give a linear-in-density response, while the remaining curves are designed to give an approximately linear-in-perceived-brightness response. This is assuming that in both cases, the subsequent gamma table processing in the imager is of the linear-in-transmittance 1/3 type, as is always the case in the 8300 LASER
IMAGER.
Because of its linear-in-density curves, this ULUT set can be used, even on an 8300 LASER IMAGER, with certain
MODALITIES or workstations (e.g., Toshiba nuclear medicine or some Siemens workstations) that are designed to work with an IMAGER that has a linear-in-density characteristic. Overall this ULUT set offers the choices shown below:
The linear in density in this ULUT Set are associated with contrast settings of 1 through 8 as shown below.
The best curve (contrast setting) to use to obtain a linear-in-density response depends on the current Dmax density setting, as indicated in the following table.
8-40 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Obtaining Optimum Images
Preferred Pairings of Density and Contrast Settings (See Note 1
Density Setting Contrast Setting for Linearin-Density Response
15,16 1
13,14
11,12
9,10
7,8
2
3
4
5
5,6
3,4
6
7
1,2 8
1. When using linear-in-density curves from WKSTN83A on an 8300
LASER IMAGER operating in linear-in-transmittance 1/3 mode.
When you choose the contrast setting from this table, the density printed by an 8300 LASER IMAGER should decrease in approximately equal steps of Optical Density as the digital input is increased by a given step size.
The approximate linear-in-brightness curves in this ULUT set are obtained at Contrast settings of 9 through 12. As the Contrast setting is increased from 9 to 11, mid-tone contrast is increased slightly while the contrast in the near-black and near-white portions of the image is decreased slightly. Curve 12 is a repeat of curve 9. For further details on these U693C0-type curves, see the description of the U693C0 ULUT Set.
ULUT Set Selections for the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER
The current MODALITY (Contrast Table) Groups, contained in the file “Luts86-G5B-1.txt,” include the following 11 ULUT sets.
Group 1, UPMSV3K: A relatively wide-ranging set of saggy curves. This set provides a wider choice of brightnesses than curves 1-6 of the U1_109S (or U1_109B) ULUT Set. This set is widely used in applications including Ultrasound, nuclear medicine, and others where an S-shaped response curve is not desired.
For these curves, overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12. The brighter curves in this set are often preferred by radiologists who are working with modalities such as ultrasound or nuclear medicine.
Group 2, U693C0: Consists of “S-shaped” variations about a linear-in-perceived-brightness response. For this ULUT set, all curves intersect at the 50% point of maximum input, meaning that all contrast settings will give the same mid-tone brightness.
As the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12, the mid-tone contrast (i.e., the contrast in the middle part of the grayscale) is increased, while the contrast in the very dark and very light parts of the grayscale is decreased. This ULUT set is very suitable for CT, MR, and C-Arm applications and is also sometimes used for nuclear medicine.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-41
SERVICE MANUAL
Group 3, U713C0: Consists of S-shaped variations about a central curve which is somewhat brighter than the central linear-inperceived-brightness curve of the U693C0 ULUT Set. As with the U693C0 ULUT Set, all curves of this set also intersect at the
50% point of maximum input, but the mid-tone brightness of the curves is somewhat higher than the mid-tone brightness of the
U693C0 ULUT Set.
As with the U693C0 ULUT Set, as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12, the mid-tone contrast (i.e., the contrast in the middle part of the grayscale) is increased, while the contrast in the very dark and very light parts of the grayscale is decreased.
This ULUT set has rather wide applicability and is often used for Ultrasound, nuclear medicine and DSA. It may also be used for other MODALITIES when a brightness greater than that from the U693C0 ULUT Set is desired.
Group 4, GSDFP - All the contrast tables of this set are based on the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function, parameterized with a D-min of 0.2, a lightbox luminance of 2000 cd/sq.m., and an ambient light fraction of 0.005. "Light fraction" is the amount of reflected ambient light coming off the film, expressed as a fraction of the lightbox luminance. For this
ULUT Set, the parameter which varies as the contrast setting is changed is D-max. As the contrast setting is changed from 1 through 12, the D-max parameter goes through the following sequence of values: 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.9, 3.1,
3.3, 3.5.
Group 5, GSDFLL0P - All the contrast tables of this set are based on the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function, parameterized with a D-max of 3.5 and a D-min of 0.2. For this ULUT Set, the parameter which varies as the contrast setting is changed is the measured luminance of the lightbox in cd/sq.m. As the contrast setting is changed from 1 through 12, the luminance is varied through the following sequence of values: 2000, 2210, 2442, 2699, 2982, 3295, 3641, 4024, 4447, 4914,
5430, 6000 cd/sq.m., respectively.
Group 6, GSDFAA0P - All the contrast tables of this set are based on the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function, parameterized with a D-max of 3.5, a D-min of 0.2, and a lightbox luminance of 5500 cd/sq.m. For this ULUT Set, the parameter which varies as the contrast setting is changed is the ambient light fraction, i.e., the amount of reflected ambient light coming off the film, expressed as a fraction of the lightbox luminance. As the contrast setting is changed from 1 through 12, the ambient light fraction parameter goes through the following sequence of values: .001, .002, .003, .004, .005, .006, .007, .008, .009, .010,
.011, .012.
Groups 7 through 11 - These include the UPMS3VK set.
8-42 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Completing the Installation
Section 9: Completing the Installation
Introduction
This section includes procedures for installing a:
• Kodak LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)
• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)
The procedures include:
Saving the setup
Checking MIM basic functions
Training the customer
Sending service feedback through SCAN
Final Procedures
[1] After setting up the SYSTEM, save the setup on a DISKETTE and store it in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM.
[2] From the “MIM Service Application,” make some test images: select Diagnostics>System.
[3] If necessary for this site, use the KEYPAD or Autofilming Link to store some clinical images.
[4] Make some prints to the destination and check the image quality.
[5] For PRINT SERVERS: print a grayscale test image.
[6] Set the MIM for Remote Service. See Section 2, Tools.
[7] Have the TSC check that the MODEM operates correctly.
[8] Provide the TSC with the MODEM number.
[9] For a MIM 100 and MIM 200 with a TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD, do the Customer Profile. See the User Guide for the
MIM.
Note
For each interface for the MIM, insert the User Guide for the interface in the site User Guide. Each interface has a section (e.g.,
KEYPAD). Use the tab dividers in the binder for the User Guide.
[10] Enable or disable the Privacy feature according to the customer’s request and verify operation of the Privacy functions.
[11] Train the customer.
[12] For an unqualified MODALITY only, send the FILM MAILER (Mod 1) with test films enclosed.
[13] Provide feedback for your service time.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 9-1
SERVICE MANUAL
Training the Operator and Key Operator
General
The FE installing the MIM must instruct the customer’s operators, key operator and, if the Privacy Feature is used, the customer’s
Security Administrator. Use the attached “Proficiency Checklist” to check that all necessary topics are reviewed with the customer.
Objectives
At the end of the first 4 Modules, the Operator should be able to do the following:
• Describe a MIM and some of its benefits and features.
• Identify components of the MIM.
• Energize the MIM, start and shut down the software application, and de-energize the MIM.
• Operate the KEYPAD.
• Understand when to use the main screens of the KEYPAD.
• Select a profile.
• Change imaging options.
• Store and make images.
• Do image transfer.
• Make or edit a profile.
At the end of the first 6 Modules, the Key Operator should be able to do all of the Operator tasks and the following:
• Adjust Tone Scaling.
• Maintain the MIM.
• Make a back up of the SYSTEM setup.
• Set the SYSTEM time.
• Troubleshoot simple problems and ask for service, if necessary.
• Clean the KEYPAD and FILTER.
9-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Completing the Installation
Training Modules
The training time is:
• Operator - 60 minutes
• Key Operator - 90 minutes
Module
1. Overview:
• Overview of the User Guide
– Chapter Layout
– Appendices
• What is the MIM?
– Introducing the MIM
– Benefits and Features
• Components
– SYSTEM Setup
– COMPUTER
– KEYPAD
– FOOTSWITCH or MINI KEYPAD
– BULKHEAD
– POWER SWITCH and CORD
– Power On LED
– FAN
2. Basic Operations
• Turning on the MIM
• Shutting Down the MIM
• Using the KEYPAD
• Privacy Feature - UserName and Password, functions protected by the Privacy Feature
• Selecting and Entering Information
• Overview of the Main Screens
• Setting SYSTEM Preferences
3. Working with Images:
• Choosing a Profile
• Adjusting Imaging Options
• Storing Images
• Deleting Images and Pages
• Printing the Page
• Managing Image Transfer
Duration
5 minutes
Key/Basic Operator
Operator / Key Operator
20 minutes Operator / Key Operator
25 minutes Operator / Key Operator
8E8820 – NOV 2003 9-3
SERVICE MANUAL
Module
4. Creating and Managing Profiles:
• Understanding Profiles
• Planning Profiles
• Viewing Profiles
• Creating Profiles
• Editing Profiles
• Renaming Profiles
• Deleting Profiles
5. Tone Scaling:
• Overview
• Tone Scaling Options
• Selecting Tone Scaling Options
• Adjusting Tone Scaling Options
6. Maintaining the MIM
• Backing Up the SYSTEM Setup
• Setting the SYSTEM Time
• Troubleshooting
– Viewing SYSTEM Information
– Viewing Error Logs
– Sending Test Images
• Care and Maintenance
– Cleaning the KEYPAD
– Removing and cleaning the FILTER
Duration Key/Basic Operator
10 minutes Operator / Key Operator
15 minutes Key Operator
15 minutes Key Operator
9-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Operator Training Checklist for the MIM
Overview
Identify Components
Basic Operations
Turn On/Shut Down
Privacy Feature - Username and Password
Select and Enter Information using the KEYPAD
Use the Screens: Acquisition, Main, Imaging Options, and Manage Profiles
Set SYSTEM Preferences
Working with Images
Choose a profile
Adjust imaging options
Store images
Delete images and pages
Print the page
Manage image transfer
Creating and Managing Profiles
Plan the profile
View the profile
Create the profile
Edit and Rename the profile
Delete the profile
Tone Scaling- Key Operator
Tone Scaling options
Select the Tone Scaling option
Adjust the Tone Scaling option
Maintaining the MIM - Key Operator
Make a Back Up of the SYSTEM Setup
Set the SYSTEM time
View the SYSTEM information and error logs
Send a test image
Clean the KEYPAD
Clean the FILTER
Signatures
Technologist:
Apps. Con.
Date:
Date:
Completing the Installation
8E8820 – NOV 2003 9-5
SERVICE MANUAL
Training the Security Administrator
If the customer uses the privacy feature added to MIM products in V_6.0 and above, the customer must appoint a security administrator who is responsible for setting up user accounts for operators and key operators.
Training Outline:
• Enabling the privacy feature
• Accessing the “Security Administrator Console”
• Entering “System Settings”
“Password Rules”
“Login Rules”
“Privacy Warning Notice”
• Entering Device Information
• Adding users
• Editing user information
• Changing the Security Administrator password
• Logging off the “Security Administrator Console”
• Enabling/disabling Kodak Service Access
• Backing up the MIM configuration after changing the Security Administrator password or Operator passwords.
Note
Setting up user accounts and training key operators on the log in procedures is the responsibility of the Security Administrator.
Leave Publication 8E9002 SECURITY AND PRIVACY FEATURES with the Security Administrator. This manual serves as training reference and detailed user guide for the privacy features.
9-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Completing the Installation
Mod 1 FILM MAILER for Unqualified MODALITIES
The Mod 1 FILM MAILER is a pre-paid, addressed, express mailer for use when servicing the MIM 100 or the MIM 200 for an unqualified MODALITY.
Important
Include the following items in the Mod 1 FILM MAILER:
• 2 clinical images from the MODALITY that you have printed using the MIM.
• One test print from the PRINTER.
• The “MODALITY Parameter Worksheet,” with any changes documented.
Providing Service Feedback
SCAN Feedback
Refer to the Service Reporting Guide to find the proper feedback codes for the tasks you completed during the MIM installation.
Use the codes in Table 9–1 to complete the feedback.
Use the codes in to complete service feedback.
• Send the installation time using the XN code.
• Send the troubleshooting time using the RAM code.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 9-7
SERVICE MANUAL
Service Codes
Table 9–1 MIM Product Service Codes
MIM 200
MIM 100
25 PS
Product
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
VIDEO 150 INPUT PACKAGE
VIDEO 150LC INPUT PACKAGE
VIDEO 60 INPUT PACKAGE
DIGITAL INPUT PACKAGE
MIM OPTICAL INTERFACE
COPCIL INTERFACE
FOPCIL INTERFACE
COMMON PROTOCOL OPTICAL
INTERFACE
NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD
Group
Code
TBD
2551
Service
Code Notes
1539 Serialized Mainframe
3433 Serialized Mainframe
3754 Serialized Mainframe
1547 Used for 160 LASER IMAGER
3467 NSA for MIM 100
4399 SA for MIM 100, NSA for MIM 200
3743 SA for MIM 200
3468 SA for MIM
3469 SA for MIM 200
3469 SA for MIM 200 and 25 PS
3469 SA for MIM 200 and 25 PS
3746 NSA for 1120 AND 2180 LASER PRINTERS
1532 SA for MIM 200 in Western Europe
9-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Conversions
Section 10: Conversions
Converting Optical Interface to Fiber Optic Interface for MIM 200
Important
This conversion is only supported on the MIM 200 on the 2.4 GHz and 1 GHz enclosures.
[1] From the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Destination.” The “Installed Destination Window” displays.
[2] From the “Installed Destination” window, highlight the KELP 2180 or KELP 1120 destination and select “Delete.”
Note
The 2180 or 1120 must be removed as a destination from any referenced profiles before it can be deleted.
[3] Exit the “MIM Service Application.”
[4] De-energize the MIM.
Warning
Dangerous Voltage.
[5] Disconnect the main power for the MIM.
[6] Remove the side COVER for the MIM.
[7] Disconnect the cable to the OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD.
[8] Remove the existing OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD.
[9] Install the FOPCIL BOARD into:
(a) Slot 7 in the MIM 200, 1 GHz
(b) Slot 7 in the MIM 200, 2.4 GHz
[10] Connect FIBER OPTIC CABLES as indicated in Figure 3–34 on Page 3 – 40 .
[11] Replace the COVER for the MIM.
[12] Energize the MIM.
[13] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Destination.” The “Installed Destination” window displays.
[14] Configure the MIM for the new LASER PRINTER by completing the following procedures:
Section 5 - “Setting up a Printer”
Section 6 - “Configuring a Print Server,” “Setting up the Destination”
Section 8 - “Obtaining Optimum Images”
Section 9 - “Completing the Installation”
Note
A 30 day warranty ONLY is included with the new FIBER OPTIC BOARD and the MIM.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 10-1
SERVICE MANUAL
This page is intentionally blank.
10-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Section 11: Troubleshooting
Introduction
This section provides instructions for troubleshooting the:
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)
• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)
Troubleshooting includes:
Identification and location of field replaceable parts inside the MIM 100 and MIM 200 1.2 GHz enclosure.
Procedures for using the “MIM Service Application” to run diagnostics
Instructions for using the Activity History Log, Error History Log, and Console Log
Samples of logs
Procedures for using pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE to run diagnostics
Information on Power-On Self Test (beep codes, power-on problems)
Instructions for troubleshooting the Common Protocol Optical Interface
Replacing the MIM HARD DRIVE, CD ROM DRIVE, or FLOPPY DRIVE
ESD
Possible damage from electrostatic discharge.
The parts inside the MIM are sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge. Use proper grounding equipment during all service procedures.
[1] Loosen the screw securing the MIM COVER and it as shown.
H180_3042AC
[2] If removing the HARD DRIVE only, remove the 4 SCREWS securing the HARD DRIVE to the DRIVE BAY. If removing the CD ROM DRIVE or FLOPPY DRIVE, remove all 6 SCREWS.
[3] Detach the RIBBON CABLE(S) and POWER CABLE(S) from the drive. See Figure 0–1.
[4] Lift the DRIVE out of the DRIVE BAY. Position the new DRIVE in the DRIVE BAY.
[5] Secure the DRIVE to the DRIVE BAY with the SCREWS.
[6] Replace the MIM COVER and secure it with the SCREW.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-1
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 0–1 Replacing the Hard Drives
H180_3041GC
Connecting to a MIM
To use the troubleshooting procedures in this section, you must connect your Laptop Computer to the MIM using the
“SecureLink” authentication and encryption software. For step-by-step connection procedures, see “Connecting Your LAPTOP
COMPUTER to a MIM” on Page 2 – 23 .
Finding an Unknown MIM IP Address
[1] Use pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE or a MONITOR KIT to access the MIM Windows 2000 desktop.
[2] Log on to Windows:
• Press the C-A-D icon for the pcAnywhere application.
• Press Ctrl-Alt-Del for the MONITOR KIT.
[3] Enter:
• Username: PACSLinkIP
• Password: NetServer
Note
A SecureLink session ID is not required.
[4] Click [OK].
The “ipconfig” utility will run and display current network settings for the MIM.
[5] Press C-A-D to return to the Windows log on screen.
Tools for Troubleshooting
The main tools for troubleshooting MIMs are the “MIM Service Application” and “pcAnywhere.”
• The “MIM Service Application” is the primary tool for troubleshooting. See the next paragraph for descriptions of its functions.
• pcAnywhere is the secondary tool for troubleshooting, but it includes some features that the “MIM Service Application” does not. For procedures to start pcAnywhere and communicate with the MIM, see “Using pcAnywhere” on Page 2 – 33 .
11-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting with the “MIM Service Application”
Running a Test Print Using the “MIM Service Application”
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”
[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.
[3] Select Diagnostics>System.
Troubleshooting
[4] Select the “Print Test Image” box only. Then click [Run].
[5] Select the “Pattern” type from the 7 options to be printed and the “Image Size.”
[6] Click [OK].
Note
If a MIM has more than 1 destination, the test print will be sent to the currently selected or default print destination.
[7] Check the quality of the print.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-3
SERVICE MANUAL
Running a Test Print Using the DISPLAY KEYPAD
[1] Select the [Menu] button on the KEYPAD.
[2] Using the Arrow keys, advance from the “Service” menu to the “Diagnostic” menu to the “Test Print” menu.
[3] Select “Grayscale Print.”
[4] Check the quality of the test print.
Running a Network “Ping” Test from the “MIM Service Application”
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”
[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.
[3] Select Diagnostics>Network.
[4] Select the “Ping” field only and click [Run].
[5] Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to enter the IP Address of the network target.
[6] Click [OK].
[7] Check that Ping was successful.
11-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Running Network Ping from the DISPLAY KEYPAD
[1] Select the [Menu] button on the KEYPAD.
[2] Using the Arrow keys, advance from the “Service” menu to the “Diagnostic” menu.
[3] Select “Network Ping.”
[4] Check that Ping was successful.
Running a Network “DICOM Echo” Test
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and launch the “MIM Service Application.”
[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.
[3] Select Diagnostics>Network.
Troubleshooting
[4] Select the “DICOM Echo” field only and click [Run].
[5] Enter the IP Address, Port Number, and AE Title of the network target. Then click [OK].
[6] Check that DICOM Echo was successful.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-5
SERVICE MANUAL
Running Diagnostics of the INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS
The procedure includes tests for the following INTERFACE BOARDS:
• The DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD
• The VIDEO INTERFACE BOARDS
• The OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD, COPPER INTERFACE (COPCIL) BOARD, and FIBER OPTIC INTERFACE
(FOPCIL) BOARD
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”
[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.
[3] Select Diagnostics.
[4] Select tests as follows:
• For tests of the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD, select Digital.
• For tests of a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD, select Video.
• For tests of an OUTPUT BOARD, select Delivery. The options are Optical, COPCIL, and FOPCIL.
[5] Select as necessary from the options and click [OK].
[6] Observe the following notes about DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD tests:
Important
The OPTO-ISOLATOR test fails if the OPTO-ISOLATOR BOARD is not installed.The diagnostics for the DIGITAL
INTERFACE BOARD include tests of the:
• Registers & Interrupts
• FIFO & RAM
• MODALITY INTERFACE
• OPTO-ISOLATOR
[7] Observe the following notes about VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD tests:
Important
If MODALITY Capture Tests fail, the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD is not necessarily defective:
• The Input Video may not be present.
• The parameters entered in the MIM may not match the parameters for the MODALITY, or they may be incorrect.
The diagnostics for the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD include the following tests:
• General Tests
• Memory Tests
• MODALITY Capture Tests
• Simulated Capture Tests
11-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Changing Level of a Log for Troubleshooting
The range of detail level for all log subsystems is 0 -7. The higher the level, the more detail in the log for any subsystem. The levels should be changed only for troubleshooting. See the table below for the communication purposes of the logs and the optimum logging levels for troubleshooting:
Log Communication Purpose
Delivery PRINT SERVER to PRINTER communications
General/Hardware HIS/RIS, communications to Kodak DryView LASER
IMAGERS
KEYPAD Auxiliary KEYPADS
Network Services DICOM input/output
Service Service functions
Source
Storage
Autofilming, KEYPAD acquisition and print commands
Disk space, aging algorithm
Optimum Log Level for V_6.0 and above
5
All: 3
5
5
5
3
6
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”
[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.
[3] Select Logs.
[4] Select Logging Levels from the pull-down menu.
[5] To change a “Logging Level” for any subsystem:
(a) Click the Increment or Decrement button next to the name and level number of the subsystem.
(b) Click [Set].
Important
• See the table above for recommended log levels for each subsystem.
• Changing Log Levels only impacts active history after the time of the change.
[6] After completing troubleshooting, reset the log level by selecting “Default” and clicking [Reset].
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-7
SERVICE MANUAL
Retrieving the Activity History Log
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and launch the “MIM Service Application.”
[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.
[3] Select Logs.
[4] Set the Logging Level as instructed in the preceding procedure.
[5] From the “Logs” pull-down menu, select Activity History.
Note
The date/time of the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM should match to enable correct time selections.
[6] Enter “View From” and “View Through” dates and times for the log to be retrieved, according to the time set at the MIM.
Note
The right 2 boxes in the “View” fields specify time in hours and minutes using the military system of 1 to 24 hours. For example,
23 and 41 corresponds to 11:41 PM.
[7] Use the “Filter” drop-down menus to select the “Input” and the “Subsystem” log you want to retrieve.
[8] Click [OK].
[9] Select the mode of retrieval:
• To view the log on the MONITOR of the LAPTOP COMPUTER, click [View Log].
• To store the log on the HARD DRIVE of the LAPTOP COMPUTER, click [Save As].
11-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Interpreting the Activity History Log
The retrieved Activity History Log includes data from all subsystems that were operating during the time selected for retrieval, except for subsystems that were filtered out. The log will display this data at the selected level of detail. Following is a sample section of an Activity History Log.
Date
Time Log Class Object Source File Line No. Comment
Level ID ID Name
Key to Columns in the Sample Log:
• Date - Date of log is selected on “Get Activity History” window.
• Time - Time is in military (24 hour) day.
• Log Level - Level of detail. Where the letter “I” (Information), “W” (Warning), or “E” (Error) is displayed in the Log Level field, this line is included in the Error Log.
• Class ID - This information identifies the subsystem logged and is used by development for troubleshooting.
• Object ID - This information is used by development for troubleshooting.
• Source Name - Name of the input that generated the log information.This could be DICOM or the name of the directly connected video or digital input. Each DICOM SCU will have a unique source name.
• File - Name of the file for this line in the program.
• Line No. - Number of the line in the file.
• Comment - Description of the function in the program of this line.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-9
SERVICE MANUAL
Retrieving the Error History Log
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”
[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.
[3] Select Logs.
[4] From the “Logs” pull-down menu, select Error History.
Note
Log Levels do not apply to the Error History Log. All errors are logged.
[5] Enter “View From” and “View Through” dates and times for the log to be retrieved.
Note
The right 2 boxes in the “View” fields specify time in hours and minutes using the military system of 1 to 24 hours. For example,
23 and 41 corresponds to 11:41 PM
[6] Click [OK].
[7] Select the mode of retrieval:
• To view the log on the MONITOR of the LAPTOP COMPUTER, click [View Log].
• To store the log on the HARD DRIVE of the LAPTOP COMPUTER, click [Save As].
11-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Interpreting the Error History Log
Troubleshooting
Key to Columns in the Error Log
• Severity - “Info” = Information only (no error). “Fatal” = Error condition causes system to stop. “Warning” = Error condition, but system continues to run.
• Error Code - Series of digits to the left of the (-) is the error code. Series of 3 digits to the right of the hyphen is the source code. See the table below for categories of errors.
• Date/Time - Date/Time can be selected by user. Time is in military (24 hour clock) days.
• Description - Describes the error.
Table 11–1 Error Code Categories
Error Codes
0-599
600-699
1000-1999
2000-2999
3000-3999
4000-4999
5000-5999
6000-6999
General
Subsystem
Hardware
Service
Source
Delivery
Network Services
Storage
KEYPAD
Object or operation not found
Types of Error
Buffer too small. Invalid firmware. Memory test error.
Diagnostic not found. DAD message error.
Command device not ready. Error reading or writing image.
Page full. Invalid curve shape. Failure sending image to PRINTER.
Problem in DICOM delivery. Wrong information for MIM.
Memory access error. “Disk Low Water Mark” not reached.
KEYPAD cannot send the message. KEYPAD test failure.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-11
SERVICE MANUAL
Retrieving the Error Frequency Log
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”
[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.
[3] Select Logs.
[4] From the “Logs” pull-down menu, select Error Frequency.
[5] In the “Retrieve” panel, select one of the following:
• “System” (Windows NT Operating System)
• “MIM Application” (all logging subsystems for MIM)
• “KELI-160 Application”
[6] If you chose “MIM Application,” enter “Error Code From” and “Error Code To” numbers.
[7] Click [OK].
[8] At the prompt, click [View Log].
[9] To save the log, click [Save As].
11-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Clearing the Error Frequency Log
Important
Use this function after repairing a problem to observe if the “Error Frequency Log” indicates the error again.
[1] From the “MIM Service Application” window, select Logs>Clear Error Frequency Log.
[2] Click [Clear].
[3] At the prompt “Are you sure?” click [Yes].
Viewing Printing Statistics
The MIM uses print counters:
• For PRINT SERVERS: From a source on DICOM.
• For MODALITY SERVERS: From direct input from a MODALITY, video or digital.
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”
[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.
[3] Select Admin.
[4] From the Admin pull-down menu, select Printing Statistics Database.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-13
SERVICE MANUAL
Note
The MIM has the ability to reset a particular counter or all counters.
11-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting with pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE
Using “Live Console Logs”
The preceding procedures describe use of the Activity History Log and the Error History Log, which allow the FE to view logs of system operations that have occurred in the past. The following paragraphs provide information for viewing logs of operations
indicates the sources of data for the logs.
Figure 11–2 Console Log Data Sources
MODALITY
Grayscale
Video
Autofilming
Link
Service
MODALITY
SERVER
DICOM over
Ethernet
FORMAT= 24
END
EXAM
COPIES= 1
MAIN
MENU
Keypad
SERVER
Service
PRINTER
Keypad
Source
(Import)
Storage
Network
Services
Network
Services
Service
Routing/
Delivery
System
General
MODALITY
Grayscale
Video
Service
MODALITY
SERVER
H180_3031DC
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-15
SERVICE MANUAL
To View the Logs:
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM.
[2] Start the pcAnywhere application and connect with the MIM.
The MIM desktop will display on the LAPTOP COMPUTER.
Remote Network Interface
Menu Bar
[3] From the “Remote Network Interface” menu bar, select Logging.
Important
Do not use any features on the “Remote Network Interface” menu bar except “Logging”.
[4] Select Start AppConsoleLogger.
The log displays.
11-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Note
The defaults for Log Level are preset to the correct level for troubleshooting purposes as shown.
[5] At the “Remote Network Interface” menu bar, select SetLogLevel.
[6] At the “Console” menu bar, select View.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-17
SERVICE MANUAL
[7] In the “Format” panel of the ‘Settings” window, select the fields you wish to display in the log.
Note
For troubleshooting, the most useful fields are Comment, Log Level, Time, and SRC Name. With these fields selected, a log line appears as indicated below:
09:55:05:058 2 [ ] SCU Assoc#29022 Up (XRAY 8200)
| | | | |
Time Log Level SRC Name Comment
[8] After “filtering” the fields, click [OK].
[9] When finished, at the “Remote Network Interface” menu bar, select Logging.
[10] Select Stop AppConsoleLogger.
11-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Network Services Log
DICOM communications between an SCU and an SCP normally occur in the sequence indicated in the table below. Each of the command functions is described following the table.
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Sequence Command Function
Negotiations between SCU and SCP.
Get PRINTER status.
Create a film session.
Create a film box.
Set the image box.
Print.
End the job.
End the session.
Command
Open an association prNGet fsNCreate fbNCreate ibNSet fbNAction fbNDelete fsNDelete
1. Negotiation Phase - A new connection is opened and communication between SCU and SCP occurs as in the sample printout below:
11/29/01 13:32:38:839 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,836] - SCP Assoc#4:===> NEW CONNECTION OPENED <===
11/29/01 13:32:38:859 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,840] - SCP Assoc#4: SCU/Modality AE Title = MIMP
11/29/01 13:32:38:889 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,845] - SCP Assoc#4: SCU/Host IP Address = 149.98.199.86
11/29/01 13:32:38:919 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,846] - SCP Assoc#4: SCU/Implement Version Name =
11/29/01 13:32:38:939 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,847] - SCP Assoc#4: SCU/Implement UID = 1.2.840.113564.3.1.3
11/29/01 13:32:38:970 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1466] - SCP Assoc#4: Destination AE Title = MIM
11/29/01 13:32:39:000 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1504] - SCP Assoc#4: Destination Name = MIM
11/29/01 13:32:39:030 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1523] - SCP Assoc#4: The Default Printer is 83
11/29/01 13:32:39:050 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1538] - SCP Assoc#4: No perfect Name match for MIM
11/29/01 13:32:39:080 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1603] - SCP Assoc#4: No unique ShortName match for MIM
11/29/01 13:32:39:110 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1730] - SCP Assoc#4: No unique Type match for Destination MIM
11/29/01 13:32:39:140 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1734] - SCP Assoc#4: Using the Default Printer for Destination MIM
11/29/01 13:32:39:160 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1743] - SCP Assoc#4: The Printer being used for this session is 83
11/29/01 13:32:39:270 3 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,710] - SCP Assoc#4: Verification SOP negotiated.
11/29/01 13:32:39:300 3 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,694] - SCP Assoc#4: Basic Grayscale Print Meta SOP negotiated.
11/29/01 13:32:39:330 3 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,706] - SCP Assoc#4: Presentation LUT SOP negotiated.
11/29/01 13:32:39:360 2 [ ] [MIMDicomDevice.cpp,59] - SCP Assoc#4 Up for 83 from modality MIMP
2. prNGet - Get PRINTER status. The MODALITY (SCU) asks for the status and characteristics of the PRINTER that is connected to the PRINT SERVER.
11/29/01 13:32:40:321 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3753] - SCP Assoc#4: Sending Printer SOP [N-GET]
11/29/01 13:32:40:352 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3792] - SCP Assoc#4: Sending status for 83=> Severity:NORMAL Status:NORMAL. (N-Get)
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-19
SERVICE MANUAL
3. fsNCreate - Create a film session. Information about the film is communicated between the MODALITY (SCU) and the
PRINT SERVER (SCP). This includes number of copies, priority, type of medium, film destination, and status.
11/29/01 13:32:39:711 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1670] - SCP Assoc#4: Creating Film Session (FS) [N-CREATE]
11/29/01 13:32:39:761 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1689] - SCP Assoc#4: FS default Contrast: 0 (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:39:831 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1746] - SCP Assoc#4: FS default Modality: CT (from Dicom)
11/29/01 13:32:39:891 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1817] - SCP Assoc#4: Setting Film Session (FS) [N-SET]
11/29/01 13:32:39:921 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1826] - SCP Assoc#4: FS Copies: 1
11/29/01 13:32:39:961 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1888] - SCP Assoc#4: FS Print Priority: MED
11/29/01 13:32:39:991 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1982] - SCP Assoc#4: FS Using FilmBase from Connection DB
11/29/01 13:32:40:021 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2002] - SCP Assoc#4: FS Value received for FilmBase was BLUE FILM
4. fbNCreate - Create a film box. The command to create a film box defines how the image will appear on film. The information communicated includes: film size, type, orientation, format, contrast, density, trim, configuration information (TFT/ULUT), etc.
11/29/01 13:32:42:625 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,848] - SCP Assoc#4: Setting Image Box (IB) for Position 1 [N-SET]
11/29/01 13:32:42:655 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3566] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Rows: 480
11/29/01 13:32:42:685 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3576] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Columns: 748
11/29/01 13:32:42:715 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3583] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Bits Allocated: 8
11/29/01 13:32:42:745 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3601] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Bits Per Pixel (stored): 8
11/29/01 13:32:42:775 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3632] - SCP Assoc#4: IB High Bit: 7
11/29/01 13:32:42:805 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3649] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Pixel Aspect Ratio: 13:15
11/29/01 13:32:42:835 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3679] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Photometric Interpretation: MONOCHROME2
11/29/01 13:32:42:885 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1166] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Polarity: NORMAL (from Dicom)
11/29/01 13:32:42:915 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1197] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Magnification Type: CUBIC
11/29/01 13:32:42:945 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1215] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Smoothing Type: 15
11/29/01 13:32:42:975 4 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1333] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Configuration Information: LUT=Ver693c0.w87,0
11/29/01 13:32:43:005 3 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1452] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Set TFT: Ver693c0.w87
11/29/01 13:32:43:035 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1453] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Set Dry Contrast: 6
11/29/01 13:32:43:065 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1515] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Body Part: DEFAULT (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:43:156 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1583] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Color Profile: @DEF0 (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:43:196 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1616] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Image Tone Adjustment: 0 (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:43:246 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1040] - SCP Assoc#4: IB found an Image's PLUT
11/29/01 13:32:43:276 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1063] - SCP Assoc#4: IB uses PLUT uid: 1.2.840.113564.3.5040.2001.11.29
11-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
5. ibNSet - Set the image box. This command sends image data to a defined location on film. The MODALITY transfers the image data along with position and size information and assigns a job number. Information provided includes: rows and columns, bit depth, aspect ratio, polarity, magnification and smoothing type, etc.
11/29/01 13:32:42:625 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,848] - SCP Assoc#4: Setting Image Box (IB) for Position 1 [N-SET]
11/29/01 13:32:42:655 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3566] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Rows: 480
11/29/01 13:32:42:685 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3576] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Columns: 748
11/29/01 13:32:42:715 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3583] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Bits Allocated: 8
11/29/01 13:32:42:745 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3601] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Bits Per Pixel (stored): 8
11/29/01 13:32:42:775 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3632] - SCP Assoc#4: IB High Bit: 7
11/29/01 13:32:42:805 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3649] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Pixel Aspect Ratio: 13:15
11/29/01 13:32:42:835 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3679] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Photometric Interpretation: MONOCHROME2
11/29/01 13:32:42:885 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1166] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Polarity: NORMAL (from Dicom)
11/29/01 13:32:42:915 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1197] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Magnification Type: CUBIC
11/29/01 13:32:42:945 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1215] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Smoothing Type: 15
11/29/01 13:32:42:975 4 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1333] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Configuration Information: LUT=Ver693c0.w87,006
11/29/01 13:32:43:005 3 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1452] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Set TFT: Ver693c0.w87
11/29/01 13:32:43:035 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1453] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Set Dry Contrast: 6
11/29/01 13:32:43:065 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1515] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Body Part: DEFAULT (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:43:156 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1583] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Color Profile: @DEF0 (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:43:196 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1616] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Image Tone Adjustment: 0 (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:43:246 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1040] - SCP Assoc#4: IB found an Image's PLUT
11/29/01 13:32:43:276 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1063] - SCP Assoc#4: IB uses PLUT uid: 1.2.840.113564.3.5040.2001.11.29.13.32.2
6. fbNAction and 8. fsNDelete - Print the job and delete the session. The MODALITY asks that the job be printed and the session be deleted.
11/29/01 13:32:43:596 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,677] - SCP Assoc#4: Printing Film Box (FB) [N-ACTION]
11/29/01 13:32:43:806 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,375] - SCP Assoc#4: Deleting Film Session (FS) [N-DELETE]
11/29/01 13:32:43:957 2 [ ] [MIMDicomDevice.cpp,78] - SCP Assoc#4 Down
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-21
SERVICE MANUAL
Example Subsystem Logs
The following pages include sample logs of communications that occur during the following operations:
• MIM power on - Logged activity from all subsystems.
• KEYPAD to MODALITY SERVER - Source Subsystem.
• MODALITY SERVER to PRINT SERVER - Network Services Subsystem.
• DISPLAY KEYPAD to PRINT SERVER - KEYPAD Subsystem.
• MIM Storage - Storage Subsystem.
• PRINT SERVER to PRINTER - Delivery Subsystem.
• PRINT SERVER to PRINTER (952 Command Set) - Idle State - System/General Subsystem.
• PRINT SERVER to PRINTER (952 Command Set) - Job Transfer - System/General Subsystem.
• PRINT SERVER to PRINTER (Superset) - Idle State - System/General Subsystem.
• PRINT SERVER to PRINTER (Superset) - Job Transfer - System/General Subsystem.
• MODALITY SERVER to PRINT SERVER to Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER - Network and Delivery
Subsystems.
Sample Log 1 - MIM Power On - This log shows the power-on process of a MIM. The log level for all subsystems is set at 2, as indicated in the first 6 lines of the log.
11/30/01 10:02:21:041 2 [ ] [ReporterImpl.cpp,247] - Log Level for Service set to LOGLEVEL2
11/30/01 10:02:21:061 2 [ ] [ReporterImpl.cpp,247] - Log Level for Import set to LOGLEVEL2
11/30/01 10:02:21:072 2 [ ] [ReporterImpl.cpp,247] - Log Level for Routing set to LOGLEVEL2
11/30/01 10:02:21:092 2 [ ] [ReporterImpl.cpp,247] - Log Level for Network set to LOGLEVEL2
11/30/01 10:02:21:112 2 [ ] [ReporterImpl.cpp,247] - Log Level for Storage set to LOGLEVEL2
11/30/01 10:02:21:122 2 [ ] [ReporterImpl.cpp,247] - Log Level for Keypad set to LOGLEVEL2
11/30/01 10:02:21:142 2 [ ] [RNISystem.cpp,387] - System starting up on machine MIMSMALL
11/30/01 10:02:21:162 2 [ ] [RNISystem.cpp,393] - MIM Application Version 5.0.b10
11/30/01 10:02:21:182 2 [ ] [RNISystem.cpp,402] - StatRecorder activated
11/30/01 10:02:23:635 2 [ ] [StorageClass.cpp,583] - Activated chkdsk
11/30/01 10:02:26:239 2 [ ] [PortManager.cpp,138] - Model Type - 25
11/30/01 10:02:26:299 2 [ ] [PortManager.cpp,285] - Mapped/Added PortID = 0x101
11/30/01 10:02:26:309 W [ ] [PortManager.cpp,289] - Could not MapSerialPort for: 2 (#308)
11/30/01 10:02:26:499 2 [ ] [PortManager.cpp,285] - Mapped/Added PortID = 0x1305
11/30/01 10:02:26:509 2 [ ] [PortManager.cpp,285] - Mapped/Added PortID = 0x104
11/30/01 10:02:26:529 2 [ ] [PortManager.cpp,1565] - Found board: copcil0
11/30/01 10:02:26:539 2 [ ] [PortManager.cpp,2475] - COPCIL/FOPCIL Card 0 Hardware Rev 0
11/30/01 10:02:26:559 2 [ ] [PortManager.cpp,2484] - COPCIL/FOPCIL Card 0 Driver Version 0.1.5
11/30/01 10:02:26:569 2 [ ] [PortManager.cpp,1691] - Added Output Port ID: 0x601
11/30/01 10:02:26:589 2 [ ] [PortManager.cpp,1700] - High Speed COPCIL Interface Card at Slot #18
11/30/01 10:02:27:401 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,112] -DVPI::MIMDryViewPrintInterface() start
11/30/01 10:02:27:511 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,2384] - DVPI::StartDVReportingInstance() start
11/30/01 10:02:27:531 E [ ] [DVReporting.cpp,30] - DVPrintserver logging is up! (#99)
11/30/01 10:02:27:561 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,128] - DVPI::m_pLaserImager Created
11/30/01 10:02:27:621 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1867] - DVPI::createDVDiagnosticInstance() start
11/30/01 10:02:27:641 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,212] - DVPI::MIMDryViewPrintInterface() end
11/30/01 10:02:27:881 2 [ ] [KisManager.cpp,118] - KisManager Activated
11/30/01 10:02:27:991 E [ ] [ImgDevExt.cpp,176] - Something wrong with channelNum (#300)
11/30/01 10:02:28:021 1 [ ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,137] - mutex string = NETWORK_0
11/30/01 10:02:28:052 2 [ ] [NetImgCapDevExt.cpp,103] - NetworkImageCaptureDeviceExt AttachAndLoad()...
11/30/01 10:02:28:132 2 [ ] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,104] - Conventional Keypad constructed!!
11/30/01 10:02:28:162 2 [DICOM] [MIMPrintSCP.cpp,249] - PrintSCP listener is activated on port: 5040
11/30/01 10:02:28:192 2 [DICOM] [KeypadBase.cpp,85] - Loaded a new Resource DLL: .\RniResources.dll
11/30/01 10:02:29:434 2 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,789] - Conventional Keypad Activated!!
11-22 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
11/30/01 10:02:29:454 1 [DICOM] [CKMainDisplayScreen.cpp,226] - Initialized the hint list
11/30/01 10:02:29:474 1 [DICOM] [CKMainDisplayScreen.cpp,233] - Attached to the ViewManager
11/30/01 10:02:29:714 2 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,1183] - Conventional Spooler Keypad firmware version: 5
11/30/01 10:02:29:744 2 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,1104] - A print spooler conventional keypad has been detected.
11/30/01 10:02:44:004 2 [ ] [DryViewStatusEvent.cpp,454] - DVPS Printer[1] FP Status: = FP_Unknown/FP_Normal
11/30/01 10:02:44:035 2 [ ] [DryViewStatusEvent.cpp,464] - DVPS Printer[1] mapped status: NORMAL/NORMAL
(End of log.)
Sample Log 2 - KEYPAD to MODALITY SERVER - This log monitors acquisition and print commands from a
TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD to a MODALITY SERVER. Logs have been filtered to include only the Source
(Import) Subsystem.
MODALITY
Source
MODALITY SERVER
VID. I/F
BOARD
DISK
Network
Target
Devices
KEYPAD
Note
The bold text in () is not part of the log.
11/30/01 13:09:38:818 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [Scorpion60ImgCapDev.cpp,1340] -Scorpion60ImageCaptureDevice Grayscale Store Start
11/30/01 13:09:38:828 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,221] - ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Complete
11/30/01 13:09:38:828 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,206] - ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Start
(VIDEO I/F BOARD is set to capture images.)
11/30/01 13:09:38:988 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,701] - DiskArbiter: Writing image to queue (Image from
MODALITY is to be written into queue on VIDEO I/F BOARD.)
11/30/01 13:09:38:988 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,2453] - Image submittal started
11/30/01 13:09:39:018 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,352] - DiskArbiter: Run(): done checking queue
11/30/01 13:09:39:028 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,302] - DiskArbiter: Run(): checking queue
11/30/01 13:09:39:028 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,2525] - Image submittal finished
(
11/30/01 13:09:39:028 2 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,2406] - Image Stored Columns = 548, Rows = 512, BitsPerPixel = 8
STORE button on KEYPAD has been pressed.)
11/30/01 13:09:39:028 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,306] - DiskArbiter: Run(): popping data from queue
11/30/01 13:09:39:038 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,221] - ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Complete
11/30/01 13:09:39:038 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,772] - DiskArbiter: Writing image to disk
(Image data is written onto DISK.)
11/30/01 13:09:39:038 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,206] - ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Start
11/30/01 13:09:39:048 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,352] - DiskArbiter: Run(): done checking queue
11/30/01 13:09:39:048 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [Scorpion60ImgCapDev.cpp,1491] - Scorpion60ImageCaptureDevice Grayscale Store
Complete
(Image storage is complete.)
11/30/01 13:09:39:058 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,302] - DiskArbiter: Run(): checking queue
11/30/01 13:09:53:539 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [Scorpion60ImgCapDev.cpp,1340] - Scorpion60ImageCaptureDevice Grayscale Store Start
11/30/01 13:09:53:549 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,221] - ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Complete
11/30/01 13:09:53:549 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,206] - ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Start
(Start image transfer process again.
)
11/30/01 13:09:53:700 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,2453] - Image submittal started
11/30/01 13:09:53:700 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,701] - DiskArbiter: Writing image to queue
11/30/01 13:09:53:740 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,302] - DiskArbiter: Run(): checking queue
11/30/01 13:09:53:740 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,2525] - Image submittal finished
11/30/01 13:09:53:740 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,352] - DiskArbiter: Run(): done checking queue
11/30/01 13:09:53:750 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,306] - DiskArbiter: Run(): popping data from queue
11/30/01 13:09:53:750 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,206] - ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Start
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-23
SERVICE MANUAL
11/30/01 13:09:53:750 2 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,2406] - Image Stored Columns = 548, Rows = 512, BitsPerPixel = 8
11/30/01 13:09:53:760 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,772] - DiskArbiter: Writing image to disk
11/30/01 13:09:53:760 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [Scorpion60ImgCapDev.cpp,1491] - Scorpion60ImageCaptureDevice Grayscale Store
Complete
11/30/01 13:09:53:760 5 [2056,01210904] [vid1 ] [ImgCapDev.cpp,221] - ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Complete
11/30/01 13:09:53:770 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,302] - DiskArbiter: Run(): checking queue
11/30/01 13:09:53:770 5 [2051,01211160] [ ] [DiskArbiter.cpp,352] - DiskArbiter: Run(): done checking queue
11/30/01 13:09:59:398 5 [2017,00000278] [vid1 ] [ImagePixelVersion.cpp,716] - ImagePixelVersion::GetImageData Stop
11/30/01 13:09:59:398 5 [2017,00000278] [vid1 ] [ImagePixelVersion.cpp,683] - ImagePixelVersion::GetImageData Start
11/30/01 13:10:00:149 5 [2017,00000279] [vid1 ] [ImagePixelVersion.cpp,683] - ImagePixelVersion::GetImageData Start
11/30/01 13:10:00:159 5 [2017,00000279] [vid1 ] [ImagePixelVersion.cpp,716] - ImagePixelVersion::GetImageData Stop
(End of log.)
Sample Log 3 - MODALITY SERVER to PRINT SERVER - This log monitors input from a DICOM SCU to an SCP for printing. It has been filtered to include only the log for the Network Services Subsystem, set at level 5. (All other subsystems are set at 0.)
Network
Services
MODALITY
MODALITY
SERVER
SERVER
11/29/01 13:32:38:839 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,836] - SCP Assoc#4:===> NEW CONNECTION OPENED
11/29/01 13:32:38:859 5 [ ] MIMPrintAcse.cpp,840] - SCP Assoc#4: SCU/Modality AE Title = MIMP
11/29/01 13:32:38:889 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,845] - SCP Assoc#4: SCU/Host IP Address = 149.98.199.86
11/29/01 13:32:38:919 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,846] - SCP Assoc#4: SCU/Implement Version Name =
11/29/01 13:32:38:939 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,847] - SCP Assoc#4: SCU/Implement UID = 1.2.840.113564.3.1.3
11/29/01 13:32:38:970 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1466] - SCP Assoc#4: Destination AE Title = MIM
11/29/01 13:32:39:000 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1504] - SCP Assoc#4: Destination Name = MIM
11/29/01 13:32:39:030 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1523] - SCP Assoc#4: The Default Printer is 83
(The default printer is an 8300 LASER IMAGER.)
11/29/01 13:32:39:050 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1538] - SCP Assoc#4: No perfect Name match for MIM
11/29/01 13:32:39:080 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1603] - SCP Assoc#4: No unique ShortName match for MIM
11/29/01 13:32:39:110 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1730] - SCP Assoc#4: No unique Type match for Destination MIM
11/29/01 13:32:39:140 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1734] - SCP Assoc#4: Using the Default Printer for Destination MIM
11/29/01 13:32:39:160 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1743] - SCP Assoc#4: The Printer being used for this session is 83
11/29/01 13:32:39:270 3 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,710] - SCP Assoc#4: Verification SOP negotiated.
11/29/01 13:32:39:300 3 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,694] - SCP Assoc#4: Basic Grayscale Print Meta SOP negotiated.
11/29/01 13:32:39:330 3 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,706] - SCP Assoc#4: Presentation LUT SOP negotiated.
11/29/01 13:32:39:360 2 [ ] [MIMDicomDevice.cpp,59] - SCP Assoc#4 Up for 83 from modality MIMP
(At this point, “negotiation” between Mod Server and Print Server has been completed. A film session to print to an 8300 from Print
Server MIMP will now be created.)
11/29/01 13:32:39:711 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1670] - SCP Assoc#4: Creating Film Session (FS) [N-CREATE] (Begin to set parameters for the film session.)
11/29/01 13:32:39:761 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1689] - SCP Assoc#4: FS default Contrast: 0 (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:39:831 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1746] - SCP Assoc#4: FS default Modality: CT (from DICOM)
11/29/01 13:32:39:891 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1817] - SCP Assoc#4: Setting Film Session (FS) [N-SET]
11/29/01 13:32:39:921 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1826] - SCP Assoc#4: FS Copies: 1
11/29/01 13:32:39:961 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1888] - SCP Assoc#4: FS Print Priority: MED
11/29/01 13:32:39:991 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1982] - SCP Assoc#4: FS Using FilmBase from Connection DB
11/29/01 13:32:40:021 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2002] - SCP Assoc#4: FS Value received for FilmBase was BLUE FILM
11-24 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
11/29/01 13:32:40:321 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3753] - SCP Assoc#4: Sending Printer SOP [N-GET]
11/29/01 13:32:40:352 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3792] - SCP Assoc#4: Sending status for 83=> Severity:NORMAL
Status:NORMAL. (N-Get)
11/29/01 13:32:40:692 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2193] - SCP Assoc#4: Creating Film Box (FB)
[N-CREATE]
(Begin to set parameters for the film box.)
11/29/01 13:32:40:772 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2234] - SCP Assoc#4: FB get FilmSize from ConnectionDB = 14INX17IN
11/29/01 13:32:40:802 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2265] - SCP Assoc#4: FB get FilmSize from Dicom = 8INX10IN
11/29/01 13:32:40:842 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2302] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Using FilmSize from Dicom
11/29/01 13:32:40:872 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2317] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Checking the FilmSize value of 8INX10IN
11/29/01 13:32:40:962 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2426] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Using FilmType of 8INX10IN with Base of BLUE FILM
11/29/01 13:32:41:002 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2445] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Film Orientation: PORTRAIT
11/29/01 13:32:41:032 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2505] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Image Display Format: STANDARD\2,2
11/29/01 13:32:41:063 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2560] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Contrast: 0 (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:41:103 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2576] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Set default contrast to 0
11/29/01 13:32:41:263 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2772] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Max Density: 3.99 (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:41:333 2 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2796] - SCP Assoc#4: FB all DRYVIEW use Min Density of 0.21
11/29/01 13:32:41:383 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2884] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Border Density: BLACK
11/29/01 13:32:41:443 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2981] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Trim: NO
11/29/01 13:32:41:473 4 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3056] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Configuration Information: LUT=VER693C0.W87,006
11/29/01 13:32:41:503 3 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3356] - SCP Assoc#4: FB set to TFT by default
11/29/01 13:32:41:533 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3380] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Magnification Type: CUBIC
11/29/01 13:32:41:563 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3392] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Smoothing Type: 15
11/29/01 13:32:41:633 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3497] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Illumination: 2000
11/29/01 13:32:41:683 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3526] - SCP Assoc#4: FB Reflected Ambient Light: 10
11/29/01 13:32:42:084 5 [DICOM] [MIMPresentationLUTSCP.cpp,118] - SCP Assoc#4: PLUT Creating Presentation LUT (PLUT) [N-
CREATE]
11/29/01 13:32:42:154 5 [DICOM] [MIMPresentationLUTSCP.cpp,274] - SCP Assoc#4: PLUT uid:1.2.840.113564.3.5040.2001.11.29.13.32.21.39
11/29/01 13:32:42:625 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,848] - SCP Assoc#4: Setting Image Box (IB) for Position 1 [N-SET]
(Begin to set parameters for the image box in position 1 of the film box.)
11/29/01 13:32:42:655 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3566] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Rows: 480
11/29/01 13:32:42:685 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3576] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Columns: 748
11/29/01 13:32:42:715 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3583] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Bits Allocated: 8
11/29/01 13:32:42:745 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3601] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Bits Per Pixel 0 (stored): 8
11/29/01 13:32:42:775 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3632] - SCP Assoc#4: IB High Bit: 7
11/29/01 13:32:42:805 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3649] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Pixel Aspect Ratio: 13:15
11/29/01 13:32:42:835 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3679] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Photometric Interpretation: MONOCHROME2
11/29/01 13:32:42:885 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1166] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Polarity: NORMAL (from Dicom)
11/29/01 13:32:42:915 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1197] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Magnification Type: CUBIC
11/29/01 13:32:42:945 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1215] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Smoothing Type: 15
11/29/01 13:32:42:975 4 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1333] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Configuration Information: LUT=Ver693c0.w87,006
11/29/01 13:32:43:005 3 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1452] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Set TFT: Ver693c0.w87
11/29/01 13:32:43:035 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1453] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Set Dry Contrast: 6
11/29/01 13:32:43:065 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1515] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Body Part: DEFAULT (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:43:156 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1583] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Color Profile: @DEF0 (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:43:196 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1616] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Image Tone Adjustment: 0 (from Connection DB)
11/29/01 13:32:43:246 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1040] - SCP Assoc#4: IB found an Image's PLUT
11/29/01 13:32:43:276 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1063] - SCP Assoc#4: IB uses PLUT uid:
1.2.840.113564.3.5040.2001.11.29.13.32.21.39
11/29/01 13:32:43:596 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,677] - SCP Assoc#4: Printing Film Box (FB)
[N-ACTION] (Print the film box.)
11/29/01 13:32:43:806 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,375] - SCP Assoc#4: Deleting Film Session (FS) [N-DELETE]
(Close the film session.)
11/29/01 13:32:43:957 2 [ ] [MIMDicomDevice.cpp,78] - SCP Assoc#4 Down
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-25
SERVICE MANUAL
(End of log.)
Sample Log 4 - DISPLAY KEYPAD to PRINT SERVER - This log includes communication and keystrokes between a
DISPLAY KEYPAD and a MIM SCP. It has been filtered to include only the log for the Keypad Subsystem. All other logs are set to 0 level.
MODALITY
MODALITY
SERVER
SERVER
KEYPAD
KEYPAD
11/29/01 13:36:29:371 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x41 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:36:29:401 6 [DICOM] [CKScreen.cpp,374] - CKScreen::OnDownButtonPressed() called.
11/29/01 13:36:29:551 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,1504] - CK received the command 0xffffffc1 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:36:32:135 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x38 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:36:32:185 6 [DICOM] [CKMenuScreen.cpp,52] - CKMenuScreen constructor called.
11/29/01 13:36:32:215 6 [DICOM] [CKMenuScreen.cpp,2727] - CKSDisplayJobs constructor called.
11/29/01 13:36:32:355 6 [DICOM] [CKMenuScreen.cpp,3399] - CKSDisplayActiveJobs constructor called.
11/29/01 13:36:32:385 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0xb8 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:36:32:425 4 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,468] - Unknown command received. (0xb8)
11/29/01 13:36:36:050 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x38 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:00:205 7 [DICOM] [CKMainDisplayScreen.cpp,88] - CK MainDisplayScreen::OnMenuSelect() called.
11/29/01 13:37:00:245 6 [DICOM] [CKMenuScreen.cpp,52] - CKMenuScreen constructor called.
11/29/01 13:37:00:285 6 [DICOM] [CKMenuScreen.cpp,1037] - CKSMainMenu constructor called.
11/29/01 13:37:03:129 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x41 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:03:169 6 [DICOM] [CKScreen.cpp,374] - CKScreen::OnDownButtonPressed() called.
11/29/01 13:37:03:340 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,1504] - CK received the command 0xffffffc1 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:04:832 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x39 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:04:872 6 [DICOM] [CKScreen.cpp,327] - CKScreen::OnUpButtonPressed() called.
11/29/01 13:37:05:042 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,1504] - CK received the command 0xffffffb9 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:06:364 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x41 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:06:404 6 [DICOM] [CKScreen.cpp,374] - CKScreen::OnDownButtonPressed() called.
11/29/01 13:37:06:574 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,1504] - CK received the command 0xffffffc1 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:07:175 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x39 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:07:215 6 [DICOM] [CKScreen.cpp,327] - CKScreen::OnUpButtonPressed() called.
11/29/01 13:37:07:385 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,1504] - CK received the command 0xffffffb9 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:18:001 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x41 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:18:031 6 [DICOM] [CKScreen.cpp,374] - CKScreen::OnDownButtonPressed() called.
11/29/01 13:37:18:181 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,1504] - CK received the command 0xffffffc1 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:19:783 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x38 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:19:813 6 [DICOM] [CKMenuScreen.cpp,52] - CKMenuScreen constructor called.
11/29/01 13:37:19:853 6 [DICOM] [CKSServiceMenu.cpp,62] - CKSServiceMenu constructor called.
11/29/01 13:37:20:004 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0xb8 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:20:044 4 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,468] - Unknown command received. (0xb8)
11/29/01 13:37:24:901 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x41 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:24:941 6 [DICOM] [CKScreen.cpp,374] - CKScreen::OnDownButtonPressed() called.
11/29/01 13:37:25:111 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,1504] - CK received the command 0xffffffc1 from the frame processor.
11-26 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
11/29/01 13:37:26:273 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x38 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:26:313 6 [DICOM] [CKMenuScreen.cpp,52] - CKMenuScreen constructor called.
11/29/01 13:37:26:343 7 [DICOM] [CKSServiceMenu.cpp,196] - CKSMachineSetupMenu constructor called.
11/29/01 13:37:26:473 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0xb8 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:26:513 4 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,468] - Unknown command received. (0xb8)
11/29/01 13:37:29:988 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x41 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:30:018 6 [DICOM] [CKScreen.cpp,374] - CKScreen::OnDownButtonPressed() called.
11/29/01 13:37:30:178 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,1504] - CK received the command 0xffffffc1 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:31:210 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x38 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:31:250 6 [DICOM] [CKMenuScreen.cpp,52] - CKMenuScreen constructor called.
11/29/01 13:37:31:290 6 [DICOM] [CKSServiceMenu.cpp,898] - CKSSystemInfo constructor called.
11/29/01 13:37:31:450 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0xb8 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:31:490 4 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,468] - Unknown command received. (0xb8)
11/29/01 13:37:36:527 6 [DICOM] [ConventionalKeypad.cpp,355] - CK received the command 0x38 from the frame processor.
11/29/01 13:37:36:567 6 [DICOM] [CKSServiceMenu.cpp,1059] - CKSSystemInfo destructor called.
11/29/01 13:37:36:608 6 [DICOM] [CKMenuScreen.cpp,567] - CKDisplayScreen destructor called.
11/29/01 13:37:36:638 6 [DICOM] [CKMenuScreen.cpp,77] - CKMenuScreen destructor called.
(Log continues....)
Sample Log 5 - MIM Storage - This log indicates the storage space available on the MIM, and any storage algorithms that are being implemented. It has been filtered to include only the Storage Subsystem, at log level 5.
11/29/01 13:42:10:692 6 [ ] [DatabasePersistence.cpp,2892] - Storage Recovery, Available Disk Space : 100%
11/29/01 13:42:40:725 6 [ ] [DatabasePersistence.cpp,2892] - Storage Recovery, Available Disk Space : 100%
11/29/01 13:43:10:808 6 [ ] [DatabasePersistence.cpp,2892] - Storage Recovery, Available Disk Space : 100%
11/29/01 13:43:40:811 6 [ ] [DatabasePersistence.cpp,2892] - Storage Recovery, Available Disk Space : 100%
(End of Log.)
Sample Log 6 - PRINT SERVER to PRINTER - This log is for “delivery” from an SCP to a destination. It has been filtered to include only the log for the Delivery Subsystem, set at level 5. This subsystem does not show all communication between the
MIM and the PRINTER, but only internal processing such as image rendering in the MIM.
MODALITY
MODALITY
SERVER
SERVER
PRINTER
Delivery
11/29/01 13:46:18:959 2 [DICOM] [RoutingAndDeliveryFactory.cpp,744] - Entering CreateOneShotRouting.
11/29/01 13:46:18:989 3 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,10789] - RoutingContext ctor
11/29/01 13:46:19:129 3 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,10838] - context State = EXECUTING
11/29/01 13:46:19:189 5 [DICOM] [Page.cpp,1122] - Entering Page::SetContrastSetting()
11/29/01 13:46:19:870 4 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,9021] - Routing::SetStandardFormat()
11/29/01 13:46:19:980 4 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,9021] - Routing::SetStandardFormat()
11/29/01 13:46:20:050 4 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,4556] - Handling: SetPageOrientation()
11/29/01 13:46:20:080 4 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,4556] - Handling: SetPageOrientation()
11/29/01 13:46:20:100 5 [DICOM] [Page.cpp,1122] - Entering Page::SetContrastSetting()
11/29/01 13:46:20:140 2 [DICOM] [Page.cpp,3522] - Set a Pivot Density to DRYVIEW type. Action is complete but has no effect.
11/29/01 13:46:20:190 4 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,9021] - Routing::SetStandardFormat()
11/29/01 13:46:20:291 4 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,4556] - Handling: SetPageOrientation()
11/29/01 13:46:21:923 2 [DICOM] [Page.cpp,546] - Page Closed.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-27
SERVICE MANUAL
11/29/01 13:46:21:973 1 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,774] - PrintPages
11/29/01 13:46:22:023 3 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,2315] - #11 rcs 0 2 2 ImageStored
11/29/01 13:46:22:053 4 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,2870] - DeliveryJob state = PJ_CLOSED
11/29/01 13:46:22:103 3 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,2315] - #11 rcs 1 1 0 PageClosed
11/29/01 13:46:22:153 3 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,2315] - #11 rcs 1 4 15 DocumentClosed
11/29/01 13:46:22:183 5 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,513] - Queueing DOCUMENT
11/29/01 13:46:22:203 4 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,2870] - DeliveryJob state = PJ_REQ_ACTIVATION
11/29/01 13:46:22:243 2 [DICOM] [NetworkArbiter.cpp,269] - NetworkArbiter::QueueAdd - 83 is activating
11/29/01 13:46:22:263 3 [ ] [DestinationState.cpp,93] - RCS NextState = READY JOBREADY 3 PRINTING
11/29/01 13:46:22:293 5 [ ] [DestinationState.cpp,466] - NotifyPermanent
11/29/01 13:46:22:374 4 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,2870] - DeliveryJob state = ACTIVATED_STUDY
11/29/01 13:46:22:434 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,2120] - DVPI::init()
11/29/01 13:46:22:464 5 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,2104] - Giving printer DOCUMENT
11/29/01 13:46:22:494 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,640] - DVPI::sendDocument() start
11/29/01 13:46:22:524 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,641] - DVPI::Job # = 11
11/29/01 13:46:22:574 4 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,1201] - Routing EndOfExam()
11/29/01 13:46:22:594 3 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,10838] - context State = END_OF_EXAM
11/29/01 13:46:22:624 3 [ ] [PhotonDeliveryJob.cpp,120] - complete job #10
11/29/01 13:46:22:664 4 [ ] [DeliveryJob.cpp,1254] - send complete to routing
11/29/01 13:46:22:694 5 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,10917] - Entering JobComplete()
11/29/01 13:46:22:714 5 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,11019] - JobComplete() - this routing is still in use
11/29/01 13:46:22:744 5 [ ] [Destination.cpp,1325] - Destination handling JobComplete
11/29/01 13:46:22:774 5 [ ] [Destination.cpp,1360] - JobComplete is adding job 10 to the to-be-deleted list
11/29/01 13:46:22:804 4 [ ] [DeliveryJob.cpp,2870] - DeliveryJob state = ACTIVATED_STUDY
11/29/01 13:46:23:876 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,680] - DVPI::Unknown Currently Loaded Film Type, Ignored
11/29/01 13:46:23:906 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,691] - DVPI::pageCount = 1
11/29/01 13:46:23:936 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,696] - DVPI::numCopies = 1
11/29/01 13:46:23:966 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,755] - DVPI::UnCollated Printing!
11/29/01 13:46:23:996 4 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,467] - Render the page: smoothing number is out of range for 8300/8610
11/29/01 13:46:24:026 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,775] - DVPI::PATH 3: PAGE BUILDER, Images are processed and resized, retry = 1
11/29/01 13:46:24:056 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1197] - DVPI::printPageWithPageBuilder() start
11/29/01 13:46:24:096 4 [ ] [ChainBuilder.cpp,123] - ChainBuilder constructed
11/29/01 13:46:24:116 4 [ ] [DryViewChainBuilder.cpp,61] - DryViewChainBuilder constructed
11/29/01 13:46:24:146 4 [ ] [TonescaleResolver.cpp,473] - TonescaleResolve - PLUT : TonescaleResolver Constructed
11/29/01 13:46:24:176 4 [ ] [TonescaleResolver.cpp,313] - TonescaleResolve - PLUT : PrinterTonescaleResol Constructed
11/29/01 13:46:24:206 4 [ ] [PageBuilder.cpp,105] - PageBuilder constructed
11/29/01 13:46:24:236 4 [ ] [PageBuilder.cpp,1408] - SetPrinterDensity: 3.,0.21
11/29/01 13:46:24:266 3 [DICOM] [FormatValidator.cpp,3675] - ... Row 1, Column 1: Image X Position........ 0
11/29/01 13:46:24:296 3 [DICOM] [FormatValidator.cpp,3676] - ... Row 1, Column 1: Image Y Position........ 251
11/29/01 13:46:24:326 3 [DICOM] [FormatValidator.cpp,3677] - ... Row 1, Column 1: Image Scale Factor...... 1.49198
11/29/01 13:46:24:356 3 [DICOM] [FormatValidator.cpp,3678] - ... Row 1, Column 1: Image Width............. 1116
11/29/01 13:46:24:386 3 [DICOM] [FormatValidator.cpp,3679] - ... Row 1, Column 1: Image Height............ 826
11/29/01 13:46:24:667 3 [DICOM] [ImageBox.cpp,2255] - Accept a valid PLUT of size:256
11/29/01 13:46:24:727 3 [DICOM] [FormatValidator.cpp,3675] - ... Row 1, Column 1: Image X Position........ 0
11/29/01 13:46:24:757 3 [DICOM] [FormatValidator.cpp,3676] - ... Row 1, Column 1: Image Y Position........ 251
11/29/01 13:46:24:787 3 [DICOM] [FormatValidator.cpp,3677] - ... Row 1, Column 1: Image Scale Factor...... 1.49198
11/29/01 13:46:24:807 3 [DICOM] [FormatValidator.cpp,3678] - ... Row 1, Column 1: Image Width............. 1116
11/29/01 13:46:24:847 3 [DICOM] [FormatValidator.cpp,3679] - ... Row 1, Column 1: Image Height............ 826
11/29/01 13:46:24:877 4 [ ] [DryViewChainBuilder.cpp,154] - PhotometricInterpretation: 1
11/29/01 13:46:24:897 4 [ ] [DryViewChainBuilder.cpp,155] - Polarity: 0
11/29/01 13:46:24:927 4 [ ] [ChainBuilder.cpp,453] - Input Bit Depth: 8
11/29/01 13:46:24:957 4 [ ] [ChainBuilder.cpp,461] - WindowWidth: 256
11/29/01 13:46:24:987 4 [ ] [ChainBuilder.cpp,462] - WindowLevel: 128
11-28 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
11/29/01 13:46:25:508 3 [DICOM] [FormatValidator.cpp,3707] - Getting image annotation box information. Row = 1 Column = 1
11/29/01 13:46:25:538 3 [DICOM] [FormatValidator.cpp,3828] - Checking for image annotations...
11/29/01 13:46:25:568 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1276] - DVPI::m_pLaserImager->NewPrintJob()
11/29/01 13:46:25:598 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1312] - DVPI::Film Destination is not supported, MAGAZINE is used
11/29/01 13:46:25:628 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1336] - DVPI::pDVPrintJob->SetJobInfo()
11/29/01 13:46:26:850 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1689] - DVPI::placeRenderedImage() start
11/29/01 13:46:26:880 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1692] - DVPI::pDVPrintJob->NewImageBox()
11/29/01 13:46:26:910 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1728] - DVPI::Kernel Group is set to 2
11/29/01 13:46:26:940 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1729] - DVPI::InterpolationNumber is set to 1
11/29/01 13:46:26:970 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1734] - DVPI::Modality Group is set to 1
11/29/01 13:46:27:000 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1735] - DVPI::Contrast is set to 6
11/29/01 13:46:27:040 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1746] - DVPI::pDVImageBox->SetImageInfo()
11/29/01 13:46:27:441 3 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1768] - DVPI::pDVImageBox->PrintData(pRiROMem)
11/29/01 13:46:34:912 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1777] - DVPI::placeRenderedImage() end
11/29/01 13:46:36:103 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,1365] - DVPI::printPageWithPageBuilder() end. DVPS JobID[0] has been sent to the printer.
11/29/01 13:46:36:133 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,116] - PageBuilder destructed
11/29/01 13:46:36:163 4 [ ] [DryViewChainBuilder.cpp,72] - DryViewChainBuilder destructed
11/29/01 13:46:36:203 4 [ ] [TonescaleResolver.cpp,486] - TonescaleResolve - PLUT : TonescaleResolver Destructed
11/29/01 13:46:36:233 4 [ ] [TonescaleResolver.cpp,328] - TonescaleResolve - PLUT : PrinterTonescaleResolver Destructed
11/29/01 13:46:36:263 4 [ ] [ChainBuilder.cpp,141] - ChainBuilder destructed
11/29/01 13:46:36:294 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,800] - DVPI::UnCollated Printing Complete!
11/29/01 13:46:36:324 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,802] - DVPI::sendDocument() end
11/29/01 13:46:36:354 3 [DICOM] [PhotonDeliveryJob.cpp,120] - complete job #11
11/29/01 13:46:36:404 4 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,1254] - send complete to routing
11/29/01 13:46:36:434 5 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,10917] - Entering JobComplete()
11/29/01 13:46:36:464 2 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,10966] - JobComplete #11- PJ_FINISHED
11/29/01 13:46:36:494 3 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,8309] - ContextFinished()
11/29/01 13:46:36:524 5 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,696] - Entering DeActivate()
11/29/01 13:46:36:554 3 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,10838] - context State = IDLE
11/29/01 13:46:36:584 2 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,735] - JobComplete - PJ_IDLE
11/29/01 13:46:36:614 2 [ ] [RoutingAndDeliveryFactory.cpp,1804] - RemoveRouting
11/29/01 13:46:36:644 3 [DICOM] [RoutingClass.cpp,10799] - RoutingContext dtor
11/29/01 13:46:36:674 5 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,513] - Queueing DONE
11/29/01 13:46:36:704 5 [DICOM] [Destination.cpp,1325] - Destination handling JobComplete
11/29/01 13:46:36:784 2 [ ] [MIMDryViewPrintInterface.cpp,2125] - DVPI::release()
11/29/01 13:46:36:824 3 [ ] [DeliveryJob.cpp,396] - DeliveryJob Destructing - job #10 address = 0x03467E70
11/29/01 13:46:36:864 5 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,2104] - Giving printer DONE
11/29/01 13:46:36:904 3 [ ] [DestinationState.cpp,93] - RCS NextState = PRINTING JOB_FIN 11 READY
11/29/01 13:46:36:934 5 [ ] [DestinationState.cpp,466] - NotifyPermanent
11/29/01 13:46:36:995 3 [DICOM] [DeliveryJob.cpp,396] - DeliveryJob Destructing - job #11 address = 0x033AEC00
(End of log.)
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-29
SERVICE MANUAL
Sample Log 7 - PRINT SERVER to PRINTER (952_cmdset, Idle State)- This log is for a MIM SCP communicating with a
Kodak DryView LASER IMAGER during an “idle” situation, using 952_cmdset. The logs have been filtered to include only the log for the System/General Subsystem, set at log level 6.
MODALITY
MODALITY
SERVER
SERVER
PRINTER
System/
General
11/29/01 13:17:27:148 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,624] - CLaserImager::PollJobStatusChange() starts -----(Begin routine to poll PRINTER status.)
11/29/01 13:17:27:178 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,660] - CLaserImager::PollJobStatusChange() ends ******
11/29/01 13:17:27:218 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,668] - CLaserImager::PollPrinterStatusChange() starts -----
11/29/01 13:17:27:249 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1174] - PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper() starts -----
11/29/01 13:17:27:289 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1207] - GetPrinterStatusHelper() starts -----
11/29/01 13:17:27:319 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,702] - CLaserImager::Open() starts, maxRetries = 100retryWaitSeconds = 7
11/29/01 13:17:27:359 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,740] - Got LIT Open Mutex!
11/29/01 13:17:27:399 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,745] - lit_init() is done
11/29/01 13:17:27:429 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,768] - lit_open() successful
11/29/01 13:17:27:469 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,770] - CLaserImager::Open() returns true ******
11/29/01 13:17:27:509 5 [ ] [m952.cpp,387] - m952_GetIMSStatus called
11/29/01 13:17:27:549 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():RQS
(Request status of the IMS in the IMAGER.)
11/29/01 13:17:27:589 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: RQS
11/29/01 13:17:27:799 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged receiving IMS status request.)
11/29/01 13:17:27:829 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask().
Adding item STA,1,RDY to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:17:27:859 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: STA,1,RDY
(IMS status is “Ready.”)
11/29/01 13:17:27:899 5 [ ] [m952.cpp,804] - m952_GetAvailableMemory()
(
11/29/01 13:17:27:930 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():INQ
Inquire status of memory in IMAGER.)
|
11/29/01 13:17:27:960 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: INQ
11/29/01 13:17:28:210 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged receiving inquiry.)
11/29/01 13:17:28:250 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item ANQ,504,504,0,0 to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:17:28:280 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: ANQ,504,504,0,0
(IMAGER responded that available memory is 16 meg [504 blocks x 32K], all contiguous. with no holes or bad blocks.)
11/29/01 13:17:28:310 5 [ ] [m952.cpp,48] - m952_GetPrinterStatus called Printer: 1
11/29/01 13:17:28:350 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():RQS
(Request status of the PRINTER.)
11/29/01 13:17:28:380 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: RQS
11/29/01 13:17:28:600 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged.)
11/29/01 13:17:28:631 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item STA,1,RDY to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:17:28:671 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: STA,1,RDY
(IMAGER responded that status is “Ready.”)
11/29/01 13:17:28:741 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: ALI
11-30 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
(Allocate LASER IMAGER.)
11/29/01 13:17:28:891 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged.)
11/29/01 13:17:28:931 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PAS to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:17:28:961 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: PAS
(Command from SCP executed properly.)
11/29/01 13:17:29:001 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand(): MSZ
(Show and set the media size.)
11/29/01 13:17:29:041 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: MSZ
11/29/01 13:17:29:332 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged.)
11/29/01 13:17:29:372 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PAS,0810,0810,0810 to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:17:29:402 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: PAS,0810,0810,0810
(Command executed properly. Media size is 8 x 10 inches.)
11/29/01 13:17:29:432 5 [ ] [m952.cpp,485] - m952_GetFPStatus called
11/29/01 13:17:29:462 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():RQS
(Request status of the Film Processor.)
11/29/01 13:17:29:502 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: RQS
11/29/01 13:17:29:712 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged.)
11/29/01 13:17:29:742 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item STA,1,RDY to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:17:29:772 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: STA,1,RDY
(Film Processor status is “Ready.”)
11/29/01 13:17:29:812 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,778] - CLaserImager::Close() starts, thread 0x2013929351258 ------
(Begin to close session, and print summary.)
11/29/01 13:17:29:842 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,1786] - Dim:Stop() starts ------
11/29/01 13:17:29:882 6 [ ] [SMessage.cpp,80] - in SMessage::close().
11/29/01 13:17:29:912 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,845] - M952::startPacketTask. Quitting!
11/29/01 13:17:29:942 6 [ ] [SMessage.cpp,72] - in SMessage::~SMessage().
11/29/01 13:17:29:982 6 [ ] [SMessage.cpp,80] - in SMessage::close().
11/29/01 13:17:30:013 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,1288] - Dim:DeleteDataConnection() starts ------
11/29/01 13:17:30:053 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,791] - CLaserImager::Close() ends ******
11/29/01 13:17:30:083 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1353] - currentFilmSize = E8X10
11/29/01 13:17:30:113 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1356] - currentFilmType = FTUnknown
11/29/01 13:17:30:143 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1358] - sheetsLeft= 99
11/29/01 13:17:30:183 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1361] - printerStatus = PR_Normal
11/29/01 13:17:30:213 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1364] - fpStatus =
11/29/01 13:17:30:243 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1367] - imsStatus = IMS_Normal
11/29/01 13:17:30:283 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1370] - availableMemory = 16515072 bytes
11/29/01 13:17:30:313 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1373] - CLaserImager::GetPrinterStatusHelper() returns S_SUCCESS ******
11/29/01 13:17:30:343 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1200] - PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper() ends ******
11/29/01 13:17:30:383 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,672] - CLaserImager::PollPrinterStatusChange() ends ******
(End of log.)
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-31
SERVICE MANUAL
Sample Log 8 - PRINT SERVER to PRINTER (952_cmdset, Job Transfer) - This log is for a MIM SCP communicating with a Kodak DryView LASER IMAGER during a job transfer, using 952_cmdset. The logs have been filtered to include only the log for the System/General Subsystem, set at level 6.
DICOM
Network
MODALITY
MODALITY
SERVER
SERVER
PRINTER
System/
General
The 952 command set is used in communications with the 8100, 8300, 8600, and 8610 LASER IMAGERS. The following table includes the typical sequence of commands in a job transfer.
RQS
ALI
Autofilmer
Command
LASER IMAGER
Response
-
STA,1,RDY
-
PAS
INQ
AQU,1
-
ANQ,1024,1024,0,0
-
PAS
AQU,2
CLA -
PAS
ARS
DZ0,1200,6,1,0,0,0,1,D -
-
PAS
STP,1,D
-
FAI,SET,AQU 2
ALM,68
EXP
CLR ALL
-
STC
-
EOE
PTC
-
PAS
Function
Ask status of PRINTER.
PRINTER is ready.
Set PRINTER to 952 protocol.
Command passed.
Check available memory.
PRINTER reports memory size.
Acquire first image.
Passed. Image acquired.
Acquire second image.
Acquire failed.
Acquired timed out.
Clear the alarm status.
Command passed.
All alarms reset.
Define zones, No. of images, mag., interpolation, contrast.
Command passed.
Start the print cycle.
Print cycle successful.
Start exposure.
Image exposed.
Print cycle completed.
Clear all images.
Passed. Images deleted.
-
Comment
Can be sent anytime.
Will terminate print if sent before
EXP command.
To be stored in image position 1.
To be stored in image position 2.
Host must clear alarm, reacquire.
Host must wait for ARS command
Repeated for all zones on film.
11/29/01 13:25:17:344 6 [ ] [Patient.cpp,1175] - Entering Patient::Patient(worklist,pIF)
(The following lines obtain patient data to be delivered with the print job.)
11/29/01 13:25:17:375 6 [ ] [Patient.cpp,151] - Entering Patient::GetContainingStudy()
11/29/01 13:25:17:405 6 [ ] [Patient.cpp,1003] - Entering Patient::GetKey()
11/29/01 13:25:17:445 6 [ ] [Patient.cpp,1034] - Entering Patient::AddRef()
11/29/01 13:25:17:475 6 [ ] [Patient.cpp,460] - Entering Patient:: GetCommaDelimitedPatientName()
11/29/01 13:25:17:495 6 [ ] [Patient.cpp,920] - Entering Patient::GetSetFields()
11/29/01 13:25:17:525 6 [ ] [Patient.cpp,1003] - Entering Patient::GetKey()
11/29/01 13:25:17:555 6 [ ] [Patient.cpp,960] - Entering Patient::SetStudyKey()
11/29/01 13:25:17:675 6 [DICOM] [Patient.cpp,1050] - Entering Patient::ReleaseRef()
11/29/01 13:25:17:705 3 [ ] [DeliveryJob.cpp,313] - DeliveryJob Created #4
11-32 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
11/29/01 13:25:17:755 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2728] - GetMinBandSeparation(), linesPerPage=2670, linesPerBand=2670, numBandsPerPage=1 (
Get band separation data from Database for a Format 1 page. Band separation is the number of pixels between bands on film. Format 1 is a sheet of film with only 1 band and 1 image.)
(11/29/01 13:25:17:785 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2733] - GetMinBandSeparation() calculated band separation of 0 overridden by MIMDUI mimimum setting.
11/29/01 13:25:17:815 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 1, returns 2
(Band separation is the number of pixels between bands on film.)
11/29/01 13:25:17:845 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2956] - GetMinImageSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
(MIMDUI is the MIM Service Application. Image separation is the number of pixels between images on film.)
11/29/01 13:25:17:865 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 1, returns 2
11/29/01 13:25:18:656 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2728] - GetMinBandSeparation(), linesPerPage=2670, linesPerBand=2670, numBandsPerPage=1
11/29/01 13:25:18:686 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2733] - GetMinBandSeparation() calculated band separation of 0 overridden by MIMDUI minimum setting.
11/29/01 13:25:18:716 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 1, returns 2
11/29/01 13:25:18:747 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2956] - GetMinImageSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
11/29/01 13:25:18:777 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 1, returns 2
11/29/01 13:25:18:807 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2728] - GetMinBandSeparation(), linesPerPage=2670, linesPerBand=2670, numBandsPerPage=1
11/29/01 13:25:18:837 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2733] - GetMinBandSeparation() calculated band separation of 0 overridden by MIMDUI minimum setting.
11/29/01 13:25:18:867 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 1, returns 2
11/29/01 13:25:18:897 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2956] - GetMinImageSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
11/29/01 13:25:18:917 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 1, returns 2
11/29/01 13:25:19:017 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2728] - GetMinBandSeparation(), linesPerPage=2670, linesPerBand=2670, numBandsPerPage=1
11/29/01 13:25:19:047 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2733] - GetMinBandSeparation() calculated band separation of 0 overridden by MIMDUI minimum setting.
11/29/01 13:25:19:077 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 1, returns 2
11/29/01 13:25:19:107 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2956] - GetMinImageSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
11/29/01 13:25:19:137 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 1, returns 2
11/29/01 13:25:19:177 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2728] - GetMinBandSeparation(), linesPerPage=2670, linesPerBand=2670, numBandsPerPage=1
11/29/01 13:25:19:207 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2733] - GetMinBandSeparation() calculated band separation of 0 overridden by MIMDUI minimum setting.
11/29/01 13:25:19:237 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 1, returns 2
11/29/01 13:25:19:267 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2956] - GetMinImageSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
11/29/01 13:25:19:297 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 1, returns 2
11/29/01 13:25:19:327 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2728] - GetMinBandSeparation(), linesPerPage=2670, linesPerBand=2670, numBandsPerPage=1
11/29/01 13:25:19:357 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2733] - GetMinBandSeparation() calculated band separation of 0 overridden by MIMDUI minimum setting.
11/29/01 13:25:19:387 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 1, returns 2
(Separation between bands is 2 pixels.)
11/29/01 13:25:19:417 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2956] - GetMinImageSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
11/29/01 13:25:19:458 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 1, returns 2
(Separation between images is 2 pixels.)
11/29/01 13:25:19:558 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2728] - GetMinBandSeparation(), linesPerPage=2670, linesPerBand=1326, numBandsPerPage=2
(Get band separation from Database for a Format 4 page, which has 2 bands per page and 2 images per band.)
11/29/01 13:25:19:588 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 4, returns 18
(Separation between bands is 18 pixels.)
11/29/01 13:25:19:618 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2945] - GetMinImageSeparation(), colsPerBand=2736, colsPerImage=1356, numImagesPerBand=2
11/29/01 13:25:19:648 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 4, returns 24 (
Separation between images is 24 pixels.)
11/29/01 13:25:19:718 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2728] - GetMinBandSeparation(), linesPerPage=2670, linesPerBand=1326, numBandsPerPage=2
11/29/01 13:25:19:748 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 4, returns 18
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-33
SERVICE MANUAL
11/29/01 13:25:19:778 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2945] - GetMinImageSeparation(), colsPerBand=2736, colsPerImage=1356, numImagesPerBand=2
11/29/01 13:25:19:818 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 4, returns 24
(At this point 2 different page formats are set up for print jobs.)
11/29/01 13:25:21:320 3 [ ] [DeliveryJob.cpp,3984] - DeliveryJob Created #5
11/29/01 13:25:21:430 4 [ ] [PhotonPrinter.cpp,497] - 83 PrintingEvent is signaled
11/29/01 13:25:21:460 4 [ ] [PhotonPrinter.cpp,512] - 83 deliveryJobReadySemaphore is signaled
11/29/01 13:25:21:490 6 [ ] [Destination.cpp,4391] - Destination Class is Handling: GetAllDirectDestinations()
11/29/01 13:25:21:581 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1207] - GetPrinterStatusHelper() starts -----
11/29/01 13:25:21:611 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,702] - CLaserImager::Open() starts, maxRetries = 100retryWaitSeconds = 7
11/29/01 13:25:21:641 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,740] - Got LIT Open Mutex!
11/29/01 13:25:21:671 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,745] - lit_init() is done
11/29/01 13:25:21:701 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,768] - lit_open() successful (New job is opened.)
11/29/01 13:25:21:731 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,770] - CLaserImager::Open() returns true ******
11/29/01 13:25:21:761 5 [ ] [m952.cpp,387] - m952_GetIMSStatus called
11/29/01 13:25:21:781 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():RQS
(Request status of IMS in IMAGER.)
11/29/01 13:25:21:821 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: RQS
11/29/01 13:25:21:851 6 [ ] [Destination.cpp,4391] - Destination Class is Handling: GetAllDirectDestinations()
11/29/01 13:25:21:961 6 [ ] [Destination.cpp,4391] - Destination Class is Handling: GetAllDirectDestinations()
11/29/01 13:25:22:011 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged request.)
11/29/01 13:25:22:051 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item STA,1,RDY to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:22:081 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: STA,1,RDY
(Response from IMAGER is that IMS is “Ready.”)
11/29/01 13:25:22:121 5 [ ] [m952.cpp,804] - m952_GetAvailableMemory()
11/29/01 13:25:22:151 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():INQ
(Request status of IMAGER memory.)
11/29/01 13:25:22:181 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: INQ
11/29/01 13:25:22:432 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged request.)
11/29/01 13:25:22:462 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item ANQ,504,504,0,0 to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:22:492 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: ANQ,504,504,0,0
(IMAGER responded that available memory is 16 meg [504 blocks x 32K), all contiguous, with no holes or bad blocks.)
11/29/01 13:25:22:512 5 [ ] [m952.cpp,48] - m952_GetPrinterStatus called Printer: 1
11/29/01 13:25:22:542 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():RQS
(Request status of the PRINTER.)
11/29/01 13:25:22:572 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: RQS
11/29/01 13:25:22:772 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(PRINTER acknowledged request.)
11/29/01 13:25:22:802 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item STA,1,RDY to packet List. #Items=1
(
11/29/01 13:25:22:832 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: STA,1,RDY
(PRINTER is “Ready.”)
11/29/01 13:25:22:862 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():ALI
Allocate LASER IMAGER for printing.)
11/29/01 13:25:22:882 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: ALI
11/29/01 13:25:23:033 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged command.)
11/29/01 13:25:23:053 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PAS to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:23:083 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: PAS
(Command executed properly.)
11/29/01 13:25:23:113 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():MSZ
(Show and set the media size.)
11/29/01 13:25:23:143 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: MSZ
11/29/01 13:25:23:443 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged command.)
11/29/01 13:25:23:473 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PAS,0810,0810,0810 to packet List. #Items=1
11-34 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
11/29/01 13:25:23:503 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: PAS,0810,0810,0810
(Command executed properly. Media size is 8 x 10 inches.)
11/29/01 13:25:23:533 5 [ ] [m952.cpp,485] - m952_GetFPStatus called
11/29/01 13:25:23:563 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():RQS
(Request status of Film Processor.)
11/29/01 13:25:23:593 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: RQS
11/29/01 13:25:23:784 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged request.)
11/29/01 13:25:23:814 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item STA,1,RDY to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:23:844 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: STA,1,RDY
(Film Processor status is “Ready.”)
11/29/01 13:25:23:874 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,778] - CLaserImager::Close() starts, thread 0x2013929351160 ------
(Begin to close setup session and print summary.)
11/29/01 13:25:23:894 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,1786] - Dim:Stop() starts ------
11/29/01 13:25:23:924 6 [ ] [SMessage.cpp,80] - in SMessage::close().
11/29/01 13:25:23:954 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,845] - M952::startPacketTask. Quitting!
11/29/01 13:25:23:984 6 [ ] [SMessage.cpp,72] - in SMessage::~SMessage().
11/29/01 13:25:24:014 6 [ ] [SMessage.cpp,80] - in SMessage::close().
11/29/01 13:25:24:044 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,1288] - Dim:DeleteDataConnection() starts ------
11/29/01 13:25:24:064 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,791] - CLaserImager::Close() ends ******
11/29/01 13:25:24:094 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1353] - currentFilmSize = E8X10
11/29/01 13:25:24:124 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1356] - currentFilmType = FTUnknown
11/29/01 13:25:24:154 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1358] - sheetsLeft= 99
11/29/01 13:25:24:184 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1361] - printerStatus = PR_Normal
11/29/01 13:25:24:204 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1364] - fpStatus =
11/29/01 13:25:24:234 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1367] - imsStatus = IMS_Normal
11/29/01 13:25:24:264 5 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1370] - availableMemory = 16515072 bytes
11/29/01 13:25:24:294 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1373] - CLaserImager::GetPrinterStatusHelper() returns S_SUCCESS ******
11/29/01 13:25:24:325 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2728] - GetMinBandSeparation(), linesPerPage=2670, linesPerBand=1326, numBandsPerPage=2
11/29/01 13:25:24:355 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 4, returns 18
11/29/01 13:25:24:375 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2945] - GetMinImageSeparation(), colsPerBand=2736, colsPerImage=1356, numImagesPerBand=2
11/29/01 13:25:24:405 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 4, returns 24
11/29/01 13:25:24:445 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,136] - Render() Begin (Begin to render page.)
11/29/01 13:25:24:475 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,137] - Media Size: 1/29/01 13:25:24:505 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,138] - Film
Base: 1
11/29/01 13:25:24:535 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,139] - Number of Planes: 1
11/29/01 13:25:24:555 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,140] - Pixel Depth: 8
11/29/01 13:25:24:585 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,141] - Print Quality: 2
11/29/01 13:25:24:615 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,178] - BorderDensity (*100): 399.
11/29/01 13:25:24:635 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,394] - PrepareRenderedPage() Begin
11/29/01 13:25:24:665 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2728] - GetMinBandSeparation(), linesPerPage=2670, linesPerBand=1326, numBandsPerPage=2
11/29/01 13:25:24:695 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 4, returns 18
11/29/01 13:25:24:725 4 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2945] - GetMinImageSeparation(), colsPerBand=2736, colsPerImage=1356, numImagesPerBand=2
11/29/01 13:25:24:755 3 [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8300, pageFormat 4, returns 24
11/29/01 13:25:24:785 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,468] - Portrait Mode
11/29/01 13:25:24:995 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,589] - PrepareRenderedPage() End
11/29/01 13:25:25:026 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,1325] - RenderImageAnnotation() Begin
11/29/01 13:25:25:056 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,1379] - RenderImageAnnotation() End
11/29/01 13:25:25:086 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,611] - RenderImage(): 0, 0
11/29/01 13:25:25:106 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,616] - Image Columns: 748
11/29/01 13:25:25:136 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,617] - Image Rows: 480
11/29/01 13:25:25:166 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,618] - Bits Stored: 8
11/29/01 13:25:25:196 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,619] - Interpolation Type: 3
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-35
SERVICE MANUAL
11/29/01 13:25:25:216 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,622] - Aspect Ratio (H): 13
11/29/01 13:25:25:246 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,623] - Aspect Ratio (V): 15
11/29/01 13:25:25:336 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,708] - Position of Image on Page (x, y): 0,251
11/29/01 13:25:25:366 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,709] - Scaled Size (h, w): 826,1116
11/29/01 13:25:25:857 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,750] - RenderImage() End
11/29/01 13:25:25:877 4 [DICOM] [PageBuilder.cpp,364] - Render() End
11/29/01 13:25:25:907 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,324] - CLaserImager::NewPrintJob() starts ------
(Begin new print job.)
11/29/01 13:25:25:937 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,702] - CLaserImager::Open() starts, maxRetries = 100retryWaitSeconds = 9
11/29/01 13:25:25:967 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,740] - Got LIT Open Mutex!
11/29/01 13:25:25:997 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,745] - lit_init() is done
11/29/01 13:25:26:017 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,768] - lit_open() successful
11/29/01 13:25:26:047 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,770] - CLaserImager::Open() returns true ******
11/29/01 13:25:26:077 4 [ ] [PrintJob.h,47] - CPrintJob::FinalConstruct() this = 0x20139293513153056
11/29/01 13:25:26:107 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,369] - CLaserImager::NewPrintJob() returns S_SUCCESS ******
11/29/01 13:25:26:137 6 [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,16] - CPrintJob::SetJobInfo() starts ------
11/29/01 13:25:26:167 5 [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,19] - inJobInfo->numCopies = 1
11/29/01 13:25:26:187 5 [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,22] - inJobInfo->filmDestination = FDCURRENT
11/29/01 13:25:26:217 5 [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,25] - inJobInfo->maxDensity = 300
11/29/01 13:25:26:247 5 [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,28] - inJobInfo->borderDensity = 0
11/29/01 13:25:26:277 5 [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,31] - inJobInfo->numImages = 1
11/29/01 13:25:26:297 5 [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,34] - inJobInfo->gammaTable = 1
11/29/01 13:25:26:327 5 [ ] [m952.cpp,48] - m952_GetPrinterStatus called Printer: 1
11/29/01 13:25:26:357 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():RQS
(Request status of PRINTER.)
11/29/01 13:25:26:387 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: RQS
11/29/01 13:25:26:598 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(PRINTER acknowledged request.)
11/29/01 13:25:26:628 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item STA,1,RDY to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:26:658 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: STA,1,RDY
(PRINTER status is “Ready.”)
11/29/01 13:25:26:678 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():ALI
(Allocate LASER imager for printing.)
11/29/01 13:25:26:708 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: ALI
11/29/01 13:25:26:848 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged command.)
11/29/01 13:25:26:868 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PAS to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:26:898 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: PAS
(Command executed properly.)
11/29/01 13:25:26:928 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():MSZ (Rquest size of media.)
11/29/01 13:25:26:958 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: MSZ
11/29/01 13:25:27:229 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged request.)
11/29/01 13:25:27:259 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PAS,0810,0810,0810 to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:27:289 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: PAS,0810,0810,0810
(Command executed properly. Media size is 8 x 10 inches.)
11/29/01 13:25:27:319 6 [ ] [m952_sendPageInfo.cpp,322] - m952_sendPageInfo called
11/29/01 13:25:27:339 5 [ ] [m952_sendPageInfo.cpp,332] - pageInfo: formatID=-1 numImages=1 borderDensity=0 maxDensity=300 gammaTable=1
11/29/01 13:25:27:369 5 [ ] [m952_sendPageInfo.cpp,342] - numCopies=1 filmType=1 filmSize=1 filmDest=1 orientation=1
11/29/01 13:25:27:399 5 [ ] [m952_sendPageInfo.cpp,347] - annoFomrat=1 annoText=4544680
11/29/01 13:25:27:429 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():ALI
(Allocate LASER IMAGER for printing.)
11/29/01 13:25:27:459 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: ALI
(
11/29/01 13:25:27:589 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
IMAGER acknowledged command.)
11/29/01 13:25:27:619 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PAS to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:27:649 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: PAS
(Command executed properly.)
11-36 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
11/29/01 13:25:27:679 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():ORI,P
(Set page orientation to Portrait.)
11/29/01 13:25:27:699 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: ORI,P
11/29/01 13:25:27:880 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged command.)
11/29/01 13:25:27:900 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PAS to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:27:930 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: PAS
(Command executed properly.)
11/29/01 13:25:27:960 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():CLR ALL
(Clear all pages from memory.)
11/29/01 13:25:27:990 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,624] - CLaserImager::PollJobStatusChange() starts ------
11/29/01 13:25:27:990 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: CLR ALL
11/29/01 13:25:28:020 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,660] - CLaserImager::PollJobStatusChange() ends ******
11/29/01 13:25:28:050 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,668] - CLaserImager::PollPrinterStatusChange() starts -----
11/29/01 13:25:28:080 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1174] - PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper() starts -----
11/29/01 13:25:28:110 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1207] - GetPrinterStatusHelper() starts -----
11/29/01 13:25:28:140 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,702] - CLaserImager::Open() starts, maxRetries = 100retryWaitSeconds = 7
11/29/01 13:25:28:170 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,732] - LIT in use by thread 0x2013929351212, wait and retry #1
11/29/01 13:25:28:200 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged command.)
11/29/01 13:25:28:230 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PAS to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:28:260 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: PAS
(Command executed properly.)
11/29/01 13:25:28:290 6 [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,147] - CPrintJob::SetJobInfo() returns 0 ******
11/29/01 13:25:28:310 6 [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,157] - CPrintJob::NewImageBox() starts ------
11/29/01 13:25:28:340 6 [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,176] - CPrintJob::NewImageBox() returns 0 ******
11/29/01 13:25:28:370 6 [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,20] - CImageBox::SetImageInfo() starts ------
11/29/01 13:25:28:400 5 [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,35] - kernelGroup = 2interp# = 1modalityGroup = 1contrast = 6trim = 0rotate = 0
11/29/01 13:25:28:430 5 [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,47] - columns = 2256rows =2676bitsAllocated = 8bitsStored = 8highBit = 7pixelRep = 1
11/29/01 13:25:28:460 5 [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,53] - x0 = 0 y0 = 0 width = 2256 height = 2676
11/29/01 13:25:28:491 6 [ ] [m952_sendImageInfo.cpp,424] - m952_sendImageInfo called
11/29/01 13:25:28:521 5 [ ] [m952_sendImageInfo.cpp,410] - LIT::adjBox mimageID=1index=1 X=0 Y=0 W=2256 H=2676 Cols=2256
Rows=2676 con=6
11/29/01 13:25:28:551 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():INQ
(Request status of IMAGER memory.)
11/29/01 13:25:28:581 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: INQ
11/29/01 13:25:28:841 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged request.)
11/29/01 13:25:28:871 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item ANQ,504,504,0,0 to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:28:901 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: ANQ,504,504,0,0 (
IMAGER responded that available memory is 16 meg [504 blocks x 32K], all contiguous, with no holes or bad blocks.)
11/29/01 13:25:28:931 5 [ ] [m952_sendImageInfo.cpp,555] - LIT::Send Command AQU,1
(Acquire Image number 1.)
11/29/01 13:25:28:961 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: AQU,1
11/29/01 13:25:29:091 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged command.)
11/29/01 13:25:29:121 5 [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,283] - CImageBox::SetImageInfo() returns 0x = 20139293510
11/29/01 13:25:29:151 6 [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,311] - CImageBox::PrintData() starts ------
11/29/01 13:25:35:170 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,732] - LIT in use by thread 0x2013929351212, wait and retry #2
11/29/01 13:25:36:572 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PAS to packet List. #Items=1
(
11/29/01 13:25:36:602 5 [ ] [m952_sendImageData.cpp,303] - m952_sendImageInfo: LIT::Get Response returns PAS
Image transfer executed properly.)
11/29/01 13:25:36:632 5 [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,394] - lit_sendImageData() time = 7.45 seconds
(Transfer took 7.45 seconds.)
11/29/01 13:25:36:662 6 [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,186] - CPrintJob::PrintPage() starts ------
(Set up for printing.)
11/29/01 13:25:36:692 6 [ ] [m952_printPage.cpp,902] - m952_printPage called
11/29/01 13:25:36:722 5 [ ] [m952_printPage.cpp,421] - m952_printPage:used page width= 2256 & height=2676
11/29/01 13:25:36:752 5 [ ] [m952_printPage.cpp,443] - m952_printPage:PrintPage add FID[1]=0
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-37
SERVICE MANUAL
11/29/01 13:25:36:782 5 [ ] [m952_printPage.cpp,474] - m952_printPage:PrintPage: Setup free format: 2
11/29/01 13:25:36:812 5 [ ] [m952_printPage.cpp,483] - m952_printPage:PrintPage: FID[0]=2
11/29/01 13:25:36:843 5 [ ] [m952_printPage.cpp,493] - m952_printPage:PrintPage: FID[1]=0
11/29/01 13:25:36:863 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand(): DZO,2676,6,1,1.000,1.000,17,1,6
(Define zone on the sheet of film: 2676 lines, 6 top border lines, 1 image in zone, horizontal mag of 1.000, vertical mag. of 1.000, 5th order interpolation, Image id is 1, contrast setting is 6.)
11/29/01 13:25:36:893 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: DZO,2676,6,1,1.000,1.000,17,1,6
11/29/01 13:25:37:253 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged command.)
11/29/01 13:25:37:353 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PAS to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:37:383 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: PAS
(Command executed properly.)
11/29/01 13:25:37:413 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():STP,1,16
(Set up to print: 1 copy at a density setting of 6.)
11/29/01 13:25:37:433 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: STP,1,16
11/29/01 13:25:37:624 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged command.)
11/29/01 13:25:37:654 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item STC to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:37:684 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: STC (Film is staged, ready for printing.)
11/29/01 13:25:37:714 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():EXP (Start exposing film.)
11/29/01 13:25:37:744 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: EXP
11/29/01 13:25:37:884 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged command.)
11/29/01 13:25:37:914 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item EOE to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:37:944 2 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1122] - m952_sendCommand() receiveResponse() received: EOE try again
(End of Exposure. Image acquisition can continue.)
11/29/01 13:25:37:994 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PTC to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:38:024 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: PTC
(Printing completed successfully.)
11/29/01 13:25:38:054 5 [ ] [m952_printPage.cpp,980] - m952_printPage(): Job ID = 0
11/29/01 13:25:38:074 6 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1080] - m952_sendCommand():CLR ALL
(Clear all images from memory.)
11/29/01 13:25:38:104 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: CLR ALL
(
11/29/01 13:25:38:325 5 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
IMAGER acknowledged command.)
11/29/01 13:25:38:355 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,799] - M952::getPacketTask(). Adding item PAS to packet List. #Items=1
11/29/01 13:25:38:385 5 [ ] [m952_sendCommand.cpp,1144] - LIT::Get Response: PAS
(Command executed properly.)
11/29/01 13:25:38:415 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,778] - CLaserImager::Close() starts, thread 0x2013929351212 ------
(Begin to close job.)
11/29/01 13:25:38:445 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,1786] - Dim:Stop() starts ------
11/29/01 13:25:38:465 6 [ ] [SMessage.cpp,80] - in SMessage::close().
11/29/01 13:25:38:495 6 [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,845] - M952::startPacketTask. Quitting!
11/29/01 13:25:38:525 6 [ ] [SMessage.cpp,72] - in SMessage::~SMessage().
11/29/01 13:25:38:555 6 [ ] [SMessage.cpp,80] - in SMessage::close().
11/29/01 13:25:38:585 6 [ ] [dim.cpp,1288] - Dim:DeleteDataConnection() starts ------
11/29/01 13:25:38:615 6 [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,791] - CLaserImager::Close() ends ******
11/29/01 13:25:38:645 6 [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,218] - CPrintJob::PrintPage() returns 0 ******
11/29/01 13:25:38:665 4 [ ] [PrintJob.h,55] - CPrintJob::FinalRelease() this = 0x20139293513153056
11/29/01 13:25:38:725 2 [ ] [NetworkArbiter.cpp,350] - NetworkArbiter::QueueRemove - no print jobs pending on idle printers
11/29/01 13:25:38:785 5 [ ] [PhotonPrinter.cpp,483] - Ding is removing job 4 from the to-be-deleted list
11/29/01 13:25:38:815 6 [ ] [Destination.cpp,4391] - Destination Class is Handling: GetAllDirectDestinations()
11/29/01 13:25:38:865 4 [ ] [PhotonPrinter.cpp,503] - 83 ReadyEvent is signaled
(Log Continues.)
(Sample Log 9 - PRINT SERVER to PRINTER (Superset_cmdset, Idle State)- This log is for a MIM PRINT SERVER
(SCP) communicating with a Kodak DryView LASER IMAGER during an idle situation, using Superset_cmdset. The logs have been filtered to include only the log for the System/General Subsystem, set at level 6.
11-38 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
DICOM
Network
MODALITY
MODALITY
SERVER
SERVER
PRINTER
System/
General
09:44:48:123 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,624] - CLaserImager:: PollJobStatusChange() starts ------
09:44:48:153 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,660] - CLaserImager::PollJobStatus Change() ends ******
09:44:48:183 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,668] - CLaserImager::PollPrinterStatus Change() starts -----
(Begin routine to poll PRINTER status.)
09:44:48:213 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1174] - PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper() starts -----
09:44:48:243 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1207] - GetPrinterStatusHelper() starts -----
09:44:48:273 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,702] - CLaserImager::Open() starts, maxRetries = 100retryWaitSeconds = 7
09:44:48:303 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,740] - Got LIT Open Mutex!
09:44:48:343 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,745] - lit_init() is done
09:44:48:373 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,768] - lit_open() successful
09:44:48:403 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,770] - CLaserImager::Open() returns true ******
09:44:48:433 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss.cpp,238] - ss_GetIMSStatus() started
09:44:48:463 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Sta IMS
(Request status of the IMS in the IMAGER.)
09:44:48:493 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Sta IMS
09:44:48:523 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Sta IMS0dc5
09:44:48:563 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:44:48:593 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged receiving request.)
09:44:48:624 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Sta Y0B13
09:44:48:654 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Sta Y
(Status of IMS has not changed. It is “Ready.”)
09:44:48:684 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss.cpp,557] - ss_getAvailableMemory() started
09:44:48:714 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Show Mem
(Show status of memory in IMAGER.)
09:44:48:754 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Show Mem
09:44:48:784 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Show Mem0e75
09:44:48:814 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:44:48:844 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged request.)
09:44:49:014 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Show Y Mem=32768,32768,1,6,02255
09:44:49:044 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Show Y Mem=32768,32768,1,6,0
(IMAGER responded that available memory is 33 megapixels, all in one block, 1 hole in memory, 6 bad pixels, 2255 used pixels.)
09:44:49:084 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss.cpp,36] - ss_getPrinterStatus() started
09:44:49:114 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Sta Pr=1
(Get the status of PRINTER 1.)
09:44:49:144 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Sta Pr=1
09:44:49:174 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Sta Pr=10e0d
09:44:49:204 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:44:49:234 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged command.)
09:44:49:274 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Sta Y LT 103
Media=BWDryB,E14x17267A
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-39
SERVICE MANUAL
09:44:49:305 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Sta Y LT 103 Media=BWDryB,E14x17
(LASER
IMAGER has 103 sheets of black and white 14 x 17 in. Kodak DryView film.)
09:44:49:335 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss.cpp,301] - ss_getFPStatus() started
09:44:49:365 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Sta FP=1
(Get status of FILM PROCESSOR 1.)
09:44:49:395 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Sta FP=1
09:44:49:425 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Sta FP=10ee1
09:44:49:455 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:44:49:495 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
(IMAGER acknowledged request.)
09:44:49:525 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Sta Y Ready LT14DB
09:44:49:555 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Sta Y Ready LT
(LASER IMAGER is “Ready.”)
09:44:49:585 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,778] - CLaserImager::Close() starts, thread 0x2013929351297 ------
09:44:49:615 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,1786] - Dim:Stop() starts ------
09:44:49:655 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [SMessage.cpp,80] - in SMessage::close().
09:44:49:685 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [SMessage.cpp,72] - in SMessage::~SMessage().
09:44:49:715 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [SMessage.cpp,80] - in SMessage::close().
09:44:49:745 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,1288] - Dim:DeleteDataConnection() starts ------
09:44:49:775 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,791] - CLaserImager::Close() ends ******
09:44:49:805 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1353] - currentFilmSize = E14X17
09:44:49:835 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1356] - currentFilmType = BLUE
09:44:49:875 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1358] - sheetsLeft= 103
09:44:49:905 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1361] - printerStatus = PR_Normal
09:44:49:935 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1364] - fpStatus = FP_Ready
09:44:49:965 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1367] - imsStatus = IMS_Normal
09:44:49:995 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1370] - availableMemory = 33548288 bytes
09:44:50:026 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1373] - CLaserImager::GetPrinterStatusHelper() returns S_SUCCESS *
09:44:50:056 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1200] - PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper() ends ******
09:44:50:086 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,672] - CLaserImager::PollPrinterStatusChange() ends ******
(End of log.)
11-40 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Sample Log 10 - PRINT SERVER to PRINTER (Superset_cmdset, Job Transfer) - This log is for a MIM SCP communicating with a Kodak DryView LASER IMAGER during a job transfer, using Superset_cmdset. The logs have been filtered to include only the log for the System/General Subsystem, set at level 6.
DICOM
Network
MODALITY
MODALITY
SERVER
SERVER
PRINTER
System/
General
Superset command set is used in communications with the 8500, 8700 and 969 LASER IMAGERS, and the 8800 MULTI-
INPUT MANAGER. The following table indicates the normal sequence of commands in a print job transfer between PRINT
SERVER and PRINTER:
Host Command
Sta Pr=[x]
Del Fmt
Del Def Img
Set Density xxx
FMT ID
Box ID
Res Imgs
STO Img
Pr FMT
Del Def Img
Del FMT
Sta Job
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
LASER IMAGER
Del Y
Del Y
Set Y
Fmt Y
Box Y
Res Y
Sto Y
Pri Y
Del Y
Del Y
Response
Sta Y LT 35
Media=BWDryB,E14x17
Wait or Done
Comment
Ask status of PRINTER.
Status of LT PRINTER is Ready. 35 sheets of black and white DryView Blue film, size 14 x 17 in.
Delete all defined print formats.
Formats deleted.
Delete images in memory.
Images deleted.
Set Maximum density value.
Density value set.
Assign an ID to page format
ID assigned.
Define an image box.
Image box defined.
Reserve memory for images.
Memory reserved.
Store an image in memory.
Image stored.
Print a job.
Job printed.
Delete images in memory.
Images deleted.
Delete all defined formats.
Formats deleted.
Ask job status.
Not finished or finished.
09:49:51:028 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1358] - sheetsLeft= 103
09:49:51:068 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1361] - printerStatus = PR_Normal
09:49:51:108 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1364] - fpStatus = FP_Ready
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-41
SERVICE MANUAL
09:49:51:139 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1367] - imsStatus = IMS_Normal
09:49:51:179 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1370] - availableMemory = 33548288 bytes
09:49:51:219 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1373] - CLaserImager::GetPrinterStatusHelper() returns S_SUCCESS
09:49:51:249 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1200] - PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper() ends ******
09:49:51:289 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,672] - CLaserImager::PollPrinterStatusChange() ends
09:49:56:146 W [8191,000000000] [ ] [MIMUIDGeneration.cpp,128] - Invalid K-Number: recorded. (#99)
09:49:56:196 6 [8191,000695382] [ ] [Patient.cpp,1175] - Entering Patient::Patient(worklist,pIF)
09:49:56:256 6 [8191,000695382] [ ] [Patient.cpp,151] - Entering Patient::GetContainingStudy()
09:49:56:286 6 [8191,000695382] [ ] [Patient.cpp,1003] - Entering Patient::GetKey()
09:49:56:346 6 [8191,000695382] [ ] [Patient.cpp,1034] - Entering Patient::AddRef()
09:49:56:386 6 [8191,000695382] [ ] [Patient.cpp,460] - Entering Patient::GetCommaDelimitedPatientName()
09:49:56:416 6 [8191,000695382] [ ] [Patient.cpp,920] - Entering Patient::GetSetFields()
09:49:56:456 6 [8191,000695382] [ ] [Patient.cpp,1003] - Entering Patient::GetKey()
09:49:56:496 6 [8191,000695382] [ ] [Patient.cpp,960] - Entering Patient::SetStudyKey()
09:49:56:616 W [8191,000000000] [ ] [MIMUIDGeneration.cpp,128] - Invalid K-Number: recorded. (#99)
09:49:56:727 6 [8191,000695382] [DICOM] [Patient.cpp,1050] - Entering Patient::ReleaseRef()
09:49:56:767 3 [8191,000000000] [ ] [DeliveryJob.cpp,313] - DeliveryJob Created #0
09:49:56:857 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2739] - GetMinBandSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
09:49:56:897 3 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8700, pageFormat 1, returns 2
09:49:56:927 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2956] - GetMinImageSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
09:49:56:967 3 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8700, pageFormat 1, returns 2
09:49:57:087 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2739] - GetMinBandSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
09:49:57:117 3 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8700, pageFormat 1, returns 2
09:49:57:157 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2956] - GetMinImageSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
09:49:57:197 3 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8700, pageFormat 1, returns 2
09:49:57:237 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2739] - GetMinBandSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
09:49:57:267 3 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8700, pageFormat 1, returns 2
09:49:57:307 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2956] - GetMinImageSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
09:49:57:347 3 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8700, pageFormat 1, returns 2
09:49:57:388 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2739] - GetMinBandSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
09:49:57:428 3 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8700, pageFormat 1, returns 2
09:49:57:458 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2956] - GetMinImageSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
09:49:57:498 3 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8700, pageFormat 1, returns 2
09:49:57:728 W [8191,000000000] [ ] [MIMUIDGeneration.cpp,128] - Invalid K-Number: recorded. (#99)
09:49:57:878 3 [8191,000000000] [ ] [DeliveryJob.cpp,3984] - DeliveryJob Created #1
09:49:57:978 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [PhotonPrinter.cpp,497] - Pecan PrintingEvent is signaled
09:49:58:028 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [PhotonPrinter.cpp,512] - Pecan deliveryJobReadySemaphore is signaled
09:49:58:089 5 [8191,000677206] [ ] [PhotonPrinter.cpp,483] - Ding is removing job 0 from the to-be-deleted list
09:49:58:149 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1207] - GetPrinterStatusHelper() starts -----
09:49:58:189 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [Destination.cpp,4391] - Destination Class is Handling: GetAllDirectDestinations()
09:49:58:189 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,702] - CLaserImager::Open() starts, maxRetries = 100retryWaitSeconds = 7
09:49:58:239 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,740] - Got LIT Open Mutex!
09:49:58:279 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,745] - lit_init() is done
09:49:58:279 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [Destination.cpp,4391] - Destination Class is Handling: GetAllDirectDestinations()
09:49:58:329 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,768] - lit_open() successful
09:49:58:369 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,770] - CLaserImager::Open() returns true ******
09:49:58:409 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss.cpp,238] - ss_GetIMSStatus() started
09:49:58:409 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [Destination.cpp,4391] - Destination Class is Handling: GetAllDirectDestinations()
09:49:58:459 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Sta IMS
09:49:58:459 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [Destination.cpp,4391] - Destination Class is Handling: GetAllDirectDestinations()
09:49:58:499 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Sta IMS
09:49:58:539 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Sta IMS0dc5
09:49:58:579 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:49:58:619 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
11-42 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
09:49:58:659 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Sta Y0B13
09:49:58:699 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Sta Y
09:49:58:729 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss.cpp,557] - ss_getAvailableMemory() started
09:49:58:769 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Show Mem
09:49:58:810 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Show Mem
09:49:58:850 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Show Mem0e75
09:49:58:890 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:49:58:920 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:49:59:090 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Show Y Mem=32768,32768,1,6,02255
09:49:59:130 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Show Y Mem=32768,32768,1,6,0
09:49:59:170 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss.cpp,36] - ss_getPrinterStatus() started
09:49:59:210 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Sta Pr=1
09:49:59:240 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Sta Pr=1
09:49:59:280 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Sta Pr=10e0d
09:49:59:320 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:49:59:360 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:49:59:400 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Sta Y LT 103
Media=BWDryB,E14x17267A
09:49:59:440 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Sta Y LT 103 Media=BWDryB,E14x17
09:49:59:471 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss.cpp,301] - ss_getFPStatus() started
09:49:59:511 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Sta FP=1
09:49:59:551 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Sta FP=1
09:49:59:591 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Sta FP=10ee1
09:49:59:621 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:49:59:661 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:49:59:701 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Sta Y Ready LT14DB
09:49:59:741 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Sta Y Ready LT
09:49:59:771 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,778] - CLaserImager::Close() starts, thread 0x2013929351200 ------
09:49:59:811 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,1786] - Dim:Stop() starts ------
09:49:59:851 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [SMessage.cpp,80] - in SMessage::close().
09:49:59:891 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [SMessage.cpp,72] - in SMessage::~SMessage().
09:49:59:931 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [SMessage.cpp,80] - in SMessage::close().
09:49:59:961 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,1288] - Dim:DeleteDataConnection() starts ------
09:50:00:001 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,791] - CLaserImager::Close() ends ******
09:50:00:041 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1353] - currentFilmSize = E14X17
09:50:00:071 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1356] - currentFilmType = BLUE
09:50:00:111 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1358] - sheetsLeft= 103
09:50:00:151 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1361] - printerStatus = PR_Normal
09:50:00:182 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1364] - fpStatus = FP_Ready
09:50:00:232 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1367] - imsStatus = IMS_Normal
09:50:00:262 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1370] - availableMemory = 33548288 bytes
09:50:00:302 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1373] - CLaserImager::GetPrinterStatusHelper() returns S_SUCCESS *
09:50:00:352 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2739] - GetMinBandSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
09:50:00:392 3 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8700, pageFormat 1, returns 2
09:50:00:422 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2956] - GetMinImageSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
09:50:00:462 3 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8700, pageFormat 1, returns 2
09:50:00:502 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,324] - CLaserImager::NewPrintJob() starts ------
09:50:00:542 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,702] - CLaserImager::Open() starts, maxRetries = 100retryWaitSeconds = 9
09:50:00:572 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,740] - Got LIT Open Mutex!
09:50:00:612 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,745] - lit_init() is done
09:50:00:652 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,768] - lit_open() successful
09:50:00:692 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,770] - CLaserImager::Open() returns true ******
09:50:00:732 4 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.h,47] - CPrintJob::FinalConstruct() this = 0x20139293513153104
09:50:00:772 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,369] - CLaserImager::NewPrintJob() returns S_SUCCESS ******
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-43
SERVICE MANUAL
09:50:00:812 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2739] - GetMinBandSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
09:50:00:842 3 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2745] - GetMinBandSeparation(), model 8700, pageFormat 1, returns 2
09:50:00:883 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2956] - GetMinImageSeparation() using MIMDUI separation.
09:50:00:923 3 [8191,000677206] [ ] [Destination.cpp,2962] - GetMinImageSeparation(), model 8700, pageFormat 1, returns 2
09:50:00:963 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,16] - CPrintJob::SetJobInfo() starts ------
09:50:01:003 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,19] - inJobInfo->numCopies = 1
09:50:01:043 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,22] - inJobInfo->filmDestination = FDCURRENT
09:50:01:083 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,25] - inJobInfo->maxDensity = 309
09:50:01:123 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,28] - inJobInfo->borderDensity = 0
09:50:01:153 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,31] - inJobInfo->numImages = 1
09:50:01:193 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,34] - inJobInfo->gammaTable = 1
09:50:01:233 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss.cpp,36] - ss_getPrinterStatus() started
09:50:01:273 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Sta Pr=1
09:50:01:313 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Sta Pr=1
09:50:01:353 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Sta Pr=10e0d
09:50:01:383 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:01:423 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:01:463 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Sta Y LT 103
Media=BWDryB,E14x17267A
09:50:01:503 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Sta Y LT 103 Media=BWDryB,E14x17
09:50:01:543 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendPageInfo.cpp,356] - ss_sendPageInfo() started
09:50:01:574 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Del Fmt=99 Box=All
09:50:01:614 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Del Fmt=99 Box=All
09:50:01:654 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Del Fmt=99 Box=All1813
09:50:01:694 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:01:734 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:01:764 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Del N BadVal=Fmt,991939
09:50:01:804 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Del N BadVal=Fmt,99
09:50:01:844 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Del Fmt=99
09:50:01:884 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Del Fmt=99
09:50:01:914 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Del Fmt=99106c
09:50:01:954 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:01:994 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:02:034 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Del N BadVal=Fmt,991939
09:50:02:074 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Del N BadVal=Fmt,99
09:50:02:104 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Del Def Img=All
09:50:02:144 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Del Def Img=All
09:50:02:184 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Del Def Img=All153d
09:50:02:214 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:02:255 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:02:295 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Del Y0B00
09:50:02:335 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Del Y
09:50:02:375 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Set Density=16 Size=0,0
09:50:02:405 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Set Density=16 Size=0,0
09:50:02:445 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Set Density=16 Size=0,01de9
09:50:02:485 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:02:525 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:03:376 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,624] - CLaserImager::PollJobStatusChange() starts ------
09:50:03:406 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,660] - CLaserImager::PollJobStatusChange() ends ******
09:50:03:446 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,668] - CLaserImager::PollPrinterStatusChange() starts -----
09:50:03:486 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1174] - PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper() starts -----
09:50:03:526 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,1207] - GetPrinterStatusHelper() starts -----
09:50:03:556 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,702] - CLaserImager::Open() starts, maxRetries = 100retryWaitSeconds = 7
09:50:03:596 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,732] - LIT in use by thread 0x201392935145, wait and retry #1
11-44 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
09:50:03:797 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Set Y0B17
09:50:03:837 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Set Y
09:50:03:867 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Fmt Id=99 DMax=309 Media=BWGen,E14X17
09:50:03:907 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Fmt Id=99 DMax=309 Media=BWGen,E14X17
09:50:03:947 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Fmt Id=99 DMax=309
Media=BWGen,E14X172b20
09:50:03:987 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:04:027 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:04:077 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Fmt Y0B12
09:50:04:117 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Fmt Y
09:50:04:147 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,147] - CPrintJob::SetJobInfo() returns 0 ******
09:50:04:187 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,157] - CPrintJob::NewImageBox() starts ------
09:50:04:227 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,176] - CPrintJob::NewImageBox() returns 0 ******
09:50:04:297 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,20] - CImageBox::SetImageInfo() starts ------
09:50:04:337 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,35] - kernelGroup = 1interp# = 5modalityGroup = 6contrast = 6trim = 0rotate = 0
09:50:04:378 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,47] - columns = 1024rows =1024bitsAllocated = 8bitsStored = 8highBit = 7pixelRep
= 1
09:50:04:418 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,53] - x0 = 0 y0 = 563 width = 4096 height = 4096
09:50:04:458 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendImageInfo.cpp,211] - ss_sendImageInfo() started
09:50:04:498 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendImageInfo.cpp,292] - RES, Free-form Format, imageID=2 index=0
09:50:04:538 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Res Imgs=2,1024,1024
09:50:04:578 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Res Imgs=2,1024,1024
09:50:04:608 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Res Imgs=2,1024,10241ac1
09:50:04:648 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:04:688 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:04:808 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Res Y0B15
09:50:04:848 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Res Y
09:50:04:888 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendImageInfo.cpp,297] - BOX, Free-form Format, boxID=2
09:50:04:928 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Box Id=2 Fmt=99 Loc=132,666 Size=4096,4096
Beta=5,5 Con=6
09:50:04:968 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Box Id=2 Fmt=99 Loc=132,666 Size=4096,4096
Beta=5,5 Con=6
09:50:04:998 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Box Id=2 Fmt=99 Loc=132,666
Size=4096,4096 Beta=5,5 Con=63fbf
09:50:05:039 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:05:079 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:05:189 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Box Y0B14
09:50:05:229 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Box Y
09:50:05:269 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendImageInfo.cpp,302] - STO, Free-form Format
09:50:05:299 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendImageInfo.cpp,303] - LIT::Send Command: Sto Img=2 Depth=8
09:50:05:339 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Sto Img=2 Depth=8
09:50:05:379 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Sto Img=2 Depth=817d4
09:50:05:419 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:05:459 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:05:499 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,283] - CImageBox::SetImageInfo() returns 0x = 20139293510
09:50:05:539 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,311] - CImageBox::PrintData() starts ------
09:50:06:350 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Sto Y Size=1024,10241AD3
09:50:06:431 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendImageData.cpp,161] - LIT::Get Response: Sto Y Size=1024,1024
09:50:06:461 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ImageBox.cpp,394] - lit_sendImageData() time = 0.88649 seconds
09:50:06:501 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,186] - CPrintJob::PrintPage() starts ------
09:50:06:541 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_printPage.cpp,22] - ss_printPage() started
09:50:06:581 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Sto Test=3 DPatch
09:50:06:621 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Sto Test=3 DPatch
09:50:06:651 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Sto Test=3 DPatch1722
09:50:06:691 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-45
SERVICE MANUAL
09:50:06:731 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:07:212 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Sto Y Size=280,23173A
09:50:07:252 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Sto Y Size=280,23
09:50:07:282 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Pri Fmt=99 Img=2 Cps=1 Dens=3
09:50:07:322 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Pri Fmt=99 Img=2 Cps=1 Dens=3
09:50:07:362 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Pri Fmt=99 Img=2 Cps=1 Dens=32300
09:50:07:402 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:07:442 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:07:722 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Pri Y Job=1112E1
09:50:07:762 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Pri Y Job=11
09:50:07:802 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_printPage.cpp,217] - ss_printPage(): Job ID = 11
09:50:07:843 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Del Def Img=3,2
09:50:07:883 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Del Def Img=3,2
09:50:07:923 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Del Def Img=3,215b5
09:50:07:953 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:07:993 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:08:033 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Del Y0B00
09:50:08:073 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Del Y
09:50:08:113 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Del Fmt=99 Box=All
09:50:08:153 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Del Fmt=99 Box=All
09:50:08:193 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Del Fmt=99 Box=All1813
09:50:08:223 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:08:263 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:08:303 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Del Y0B00
09:50:08:343 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Del Y
09:50:08:383 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,233] - LIT::Send Command: Del Fmt=99
09:50:08:413 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,2065] - SendCommand(). To ccpacket: Del Fmt=99
09:50:08:453 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,595] - SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet _Del Fmt=99106c
09:50:08:493 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,89] - Packet::clearAck() Clearing Ack/Nack flags
09:50:08:534 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,57] - Packet::signalAck() Ack received
09:50:08:574 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ccpacket.cpp,402] - Warn SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet Del Y0B00
09:50:08:614 5 [8191,000000000] [ ] [ss_sendCommand.cpp,270] - LIT::Get Response: Del Y
09:50:08:644 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,683] - CLaserImager::AddJobID() starts ------
09:50:08:684 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,695] - CLaserImager::AddJobID() ends ******
09:50:08:724 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,778] - CLaserImager::Close() starts, thread 0x201392935145 ------
09:50:08:764 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,1786] - Dim:Stop() starts ------
09:50:08:804 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [SMessage.cpp,80] - in SMessage::close().
09:50:08:834 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [SMessage.cpp,72] - in SMessage::~SMessage().
09:50:08:874 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [SMessage.cpp,80] - in SMessage::close().
09:50:08:914 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [dim.cpp,1288] - Dim:DeleteDataConnection() starts ------
09:50:08:954 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,791] - CLaserImager::Close() ends ******
09:50:08:984 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.cpp,218] - CPrintJob::PrintPage() returns 0 ******
09:50:09:024 4 [8191,000000000] [ ] [PrintJob.h,55] - CPrintJob::FinalRelease() this = 0x20139293513153104
09:50:09:104 2 [8191,000675670] [ ] [NetworkArbiter.cpp,350] - NetworkArbiter::QueueRemove - no print jobs pending on idle printers
09:50:09:144 4 [8191,000677206] [ ] [PhotonPrinter.cpp,503] - Pecan ReadyEvent is signaled
09:50:09:675 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [Destination.cpp,4391] - Destination Class is Handling: GetAllDirectDestinations()
09:50:09:755 6 [8191,000695382] [DICOM] [Patient.cpp,1050] - Entering Patient::ReleaseRef()
09:50:09:795 6 [8191,000695382] [DICOM] [Patient.cpp,1019] - Entering Patient::~Patient()
09:50:09:825 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [Destination.cpp,4391] - Destination Class is Handling: GetAllDirectDestinations()
09:50:10:596 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,740] - Got LIT Open Mutex!
09:50:10:627 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,745] - lit_init() is done
09:50:10:667 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,768] - lit_open() successful
09:50:10:707 6 [8191,000000000] [ ] [LaserImager.cpp,770] - CLaserImager::Open() returns true ******
11-46 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
(Log continues....)
Sample Log 11 - MODALITY SERVER to PRINT SERVER to Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER - This log is for an SCP receiving DICOM input from an SCU and sending it to a Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER for printing. The logs have been filtered to include only the log for the Network and Delivery Subsystems, set at level 5.
DICOM
Network
MODALITY
MODALITY
SERVER
SERVER
8200 LASER
IMAGER
Network
Delivery
11/30/01 16:19:04:501 3 [3058,00036611] [ ] [MIMDicomInterface.cpp,334] - SCU Assoc#10247 8200: Reporting status is stale (no longer being updated)
11/30/01 16:19:04:501 4 [3058,23691267] [ ] [MIMPrintService.cpp,3678] - Printer Status Request End (Received)
11/30/01 16:19:04:501 4 [3058,00036611] [ ] [MIMDicomInterface.cpp,275] - SCU Assoc#10247 8200: Releasing (8200)...
11/30/01 16:19:04:501 2 [3058,00036611] [ ] [MIMDicomInterface.cpp,333] - SCU Assoc#10247 Down (8200)
11/30/01 16:19:04:501 5 [3058,23691267] [ ] [MIMPrintService.cpp,1376] - SCU Assoc#10247 8200: Received status for 8200=>
Severity:NORMAL Status:NORMAL. (Get)
11/30/01 16:19:09:508 4 [3049,23691523] [ ] [TonescaleResolver.cpp,163] - TonescaleResolve - PLUT : DicomTonescaleResolver
Destructed
11/30/01 16:19:09:508 5 [3058,23691267] [ ] [MIMPrintService.cpp,276] - MIMPrintService destructing for 8200
11/30/01 16:19:09:508 4 [3056,23690755] [ ] [TonescaleResolver.cpp,486] - TonescaleResolve - PLUT : TonescaleResolver Destructed
11/30/01 16:19:09:508 4 [3056,23691779] [ ] [TonescaleResolver.cpp,486] - TonescaleResolve - PLUT : TonescaleResolver Destructed
11/30/01 16:19:09:508 4 [3049,23690499] [ ] [TonescaleResolver.cpp,163] - TonescaleResolve - PLUT : DicomTonescaleResolver
Destructed
11/30/01 16:19:09:508 5 [3058,23690243] [ ] [MIMPrintService.cpp,276] - MIMPrintService destructing for 8200
11/30/01 16:19:14:516 4 [3056,23693059] [ ] [TonescaleResolver.cpp,473] - TonescaleResolve - PLUT : TonescaleResolver Constructed
11/30/01 16:19:14:516 4 [3049,23692803] [ ] [TonescaleResolver.cpp,148] - TonescaleResolve - PLUT : DicomTonescaleResolver
Constructed
11/30/01 16:19:14:516 5 [3058,23692547] [ ] [MIMPrintService.cpp,208] - MIMPrintService constructing for 8200
11/30/01 16:19:14:516 4 [3058,00036611] [ ] [MIMDicomInterface.cpp,130] - SCU Assoc#10248 Job # **** Dest-8200
11/30/01 16:19:14:516 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,322] - Pinging 100.100.100.40 with 12 bytes of data
11/30/01 16:19:14:516 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,350] - Reply (1) from 100.100.100.40: bytes=12 time=0 ms
11/30/01 16:19:14:516 5 [3058,00036611] [ ] [MIMDicomInterface.cpp,98] - SCU Starts connection to 8200 AE:NER_ANY
IP:100.100.100.40 Port:1025 MyAE:MIMBLACK
11/30/01 16:19:14:516 5 [3058,00036611] [ ] [MIMDicomInterface.cpp,141] - Successfully PINGED 100.100.100.40
11/30/01 16:19:14:516 5 [3058,23693571] [ ] [MIMPrintService.cpp,238] - MIMPrintService constructing for 8200
11/30/01 16:19:14:516 4 [3056,23694083] [ ] [TonescaleResolver.cpp,473] - TonescaleResolve - PLUT : TonescaleResolver Constructed
11/30/01 16:19:14:516 4 [3049,23693827] [ ] [TonescaleResolver.cpp,148] - TonescaleResolve - PLUT : DicomTonescaleResolver
Constructed
11/30/01 16:19:14:526 5 [3058,00036611] [ ] [MIMDicomPrintInterface.cpp,446] - SCU Assoc#10248 8200: PresentationLUTService,
ImplicitVRLittleEndian was not accepted.
11/30/01 16:19:14:526 4 [3058,00036611] [ ] [MIMDicomInterface.cpp,323] - SCU Assoc#10248 Up (8200)
11/30/01 16:19:14:526 4 [3058,23693571] [ ] [MIMPrintService.cpp,3673] - Printer Status Request Start
11/30/01 16:19:14:526 5 [3058,00036611] [ ] [MIMDicomPrintInterface.cpp,431] - SCU Assoc#10248 8200: grayscale print,
ImplicitVRLittleEndian accepted.
11/30/01 16:19:33:243 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,350] - Reply (1) from 100.100.100.40: bytes=12 time=0 ms
11/30/01 16:19:33:243 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,322] - Pinging 100.100.100.40 with 12 bytes of data
11/30/01 16:19:52:270 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,322] - Pinging 100.100.100.40 with 12 bytes of data
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-47
SERVICE MANUAL
11/30/01 16:19:52:270 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,350] - Reply (1) from 100.100.100.40: bytes=12 time=0 ms
11/30/01 16:20:09:695 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,350] - Reply (1) from 100.100.100.40: bytes=12 time=0 ms
11/30/01 16:20:09:695 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,322] - Pinging 100.100.100.40 with 12 bytes of data
11/30/01 16:20:29:724 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,350] - Reply (1) from 100.100.100.40: bytes=12 time=0 ms
11/30/01 16:20:29:724 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,322] - Pinging 100.100.100.40 with 12 bytes of data
11/30/01 16:20:48:651 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,350] - Reply (1) from 100.100.100.40: bytes=12 time=0 ms
11/30/01 16:20:48:651 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,322] - Pinging 100.100.100.40 with 12 bytes of data
11/30/01 16:21:07:879 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,322] - Pinging 100.100.100.40 with 12 bytes of data
11/30/01 16:21:07:879 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,350] - Reply (1) from 100.100.100.40: bytes=12 time=0 ms
11/30/01 16:21:18:624 5 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1528] - SCP Assoc#10255: Find the perfect Name match for 8200
11/30/01 16:21:18:624 5 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,840] - SCP Assoc#10255: SCU/Modality AE Title = MIM150
11/30/01 16:21:18:624 5 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,845] - SCP Assoc#10255: SCU/Host IP Address = 149.98.199.90
11/30/01 16:21:18:624 5 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,846] - SCP Assoc#10255: SCU/Implement Version Name = not specified
11/30/01 16:21:18:624 5 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,847] - SCP Assoc#10255: SCU/Implement UID = 1.2.840.113564.3.1.3
11/30/01 16:21:18:624 5 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1466] - SCP Assoc#10255: Destination AE Title = NER_8200
11/30/01 16:21:18:624 5 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1504] - SCP Assoc#10255: Destination Name = 8200
11/30/01 16:21:18:624 5 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1523] - SCP Assoc#10255: The Default Printer is 8200
11/30/01 16:21:18:624 5 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,836] - SCP Assoc#10255:===> NEW CONNECTION OPENED <===
11/30/01 16:21:18:624 5 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1743] - SCP Assoc#10255: The Printer being used for this session is 8200
11/30/01 16:21:19:986 3 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,710] - SCP Assoc#10255: Verification SOP negotiated.
11/30/01 16:21:19:986 5 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,911] - SCP Assoc#10255: N-Event Reporting (NER) is ON
11/30/01 16:21:19:996 3 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,702] - SCP Assoc#10255: Basic Annotation Box SOP negotiated.
11/30/01 16:21:19:996 3 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,706] - SCP Assoc#10255: Presentation LUT SOP negotiated.
11/30/01 16:21:19:996 3 [4031,23708675] [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,694] - SCP Assoc#10255: Basic Grayscale Print Meta SOP negotiated.
11/30/01 16:21:20:016 5 [4045,23712515] [ ] [SCPPrinter.cpp,202] - SCP Assoc#10255: Sending status for 8200=> Severity:NORMAL
Status:NORMAL. (NER)
11/30/01 16:21:20:026 2 [4042,23708931] [ ] [MIMDicomDevice.cpp,59] - SCP Assoc#10255 Up for 8200 from modality MIM150
11/30/01 16:21:20:036 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3753] - SCP Assoc#10255: Sending Printer SOP [N-GET]
11/30/01 16:21:20:036 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3792] - SCP Assoc#10255: Sending status for 8200=>
Severity:NORMAL Status:NORMAL. (N-Get)
11/30/01 16:21:21:358 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1670] - SCP Assoc#10255: Creating Film Session (FS) [N-
CREATE]
11/30/01 16:21:21:398 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1689] - SCP Assoc#10255: FS default Contrast: 0 (from
Connection DB)
11/30/01 16:21:21:458 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1746] - SCP Assoc#10255: FS default Modality: CT (from
Dicom)
11/30/01 16:21:21:488 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1826] - SCP Assoc#10255: FS Copies: 1
11/30/01 16:21:21:488 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1817] - SCP Assoc#10255: Setting Film Session (FS) [N-SET]
11/30/01 16:21:21:498 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1944] - SCP Assoc#10255: FS Medium Type:
DONT_CARE_BASE
11/30/01 16:21:21:498 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1982] - SCP Assoc#10255: FS Using FilmBase from Connection
DB
11/30/01 16:21:21:498 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1888] - SCP Assoc#10255: FS Print Priority: MED
11/30/01 16:21:21:498 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2002] - SCP Assoc#10255: FS Value received for FilmBase was
BLUE FILM
11/30/01 16:21:22:009 5 [4041,23711491] [DICOM] [MIMPresentationLUTSCP.cpp,118] - SCP Assoc#10255: PLUT Creating Presentation
LUT (PLUT) [N-CREATE]
11/30/01 16:21:22:400 5 [4041,23711491] [DICOM] [MIMPresentationLUTSCP.cpp,274] - SCP Assoc#10255: PLUT uid:1.2.840.113564.3.5040.2001.11.30.14.22.30.3
11/30/01 16:21:22:630 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2193] - SCP Assoc#10255: Creating Film Box (FB) [N-CREATE]
11/30/01 16:21:22:680 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2234] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB get FilmSize from ConnectionDB
= 14INX17IN
11/30/01 16:21:22:690 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2302] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Using FilmSize from Dicom
11/30/01 16:21:22:690 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2317] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Checking the FilmSize value of
14INX17IN
11-48 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
11/30/01 16:21:22:690 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2265] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB get FilmSize from Dicom =
14INX17IN
11/30/01 16:21:22:740 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2426] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Using FilmType of 14INX17IN with Base of BLUE FILM
11/30/01 16:21:22:740 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2445] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Film Orientation: PORTRAIT
11/30/01 16:21:22:740 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2505] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Image Display Format:
STANDARD\2,2
11/30/01 16:21:22:740 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2560] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Contrast: 0 (from Connection DB)
11/30/01 16:21:22:740 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2576] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Set default contrast to 0
11/30/01 16:21:22:810 2 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2683] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Unsupported Annotation Display
Format: NONE
11/30/01 16:21:22:810 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2667] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Annotation Display Format:
NONE
11/30/01 16:21:22:820 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2754] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Max Density: 3.
11/30/01 16:21:22:830 2 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2796] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB all DRYVIEW use Min Density of 0.21
11/30/01 16:21:22:840 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2884] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Border Density: BLACK
11/30/01 16:21:22:870 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2981] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Trim: NO
11/30/01 16:21:22:890 3 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3356] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB set to TFT by default
11/30/01 16:21:22:890 4 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3056] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Configuration Information:
LUT=VER693C0.W87,006
11/30/01 16:21:22:890 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3380] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Magnification Type: CUBIC
11/30/01 16:21:22:890 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3392] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Smoothing Type: 5
11/30/01 16:21:22:910 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3481] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB receives PLUT uid:
1.2.840.113564.3.5040.2001.11.30.14.22.30.3
11/30/01 16:21:22:920 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3497] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Illumination: 2000
11/30/01 16:21:22:930 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3526] - SCP Assoc#10255: FB Reflected Ambient Light: 10
11/30/01 16:21:23:251 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3566] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Rows: 512
11/30/01 16:21:23:251 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3576] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Columns: 548
11/30/01 16:21:23:251 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3583] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Bits Allocated: 8
11/30/01 16:21:23:251 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,848] - SCP Assoc#10255: Setting Image Box (IB) for Position 1
[N-SET]
11/30/01 16:21:23:251 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3601] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Bits Per Pixel (stored): 8
11/30/01 16:21:23:261 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3649] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Pixel Aspect Ratio: 1:1
11/30/01 16:21:23:261 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3679] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Photometric Interpretation:
MONOCHROME2
11/30/01 16:21:23:261 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3632] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB High Bit: 7
11/30/01 16:21:23:301 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1197] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Magnification Type: CUBIC
11/30/01 16:21:23:301 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1215] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Smoothing Type: 5
11/30/01 16:21:23:301 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1166] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Polarity: NORMAL (from Dicom)
11/30/01 16:21:23:311 4 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1333] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Configuration Information:
LUT=Ver693c0.w87,006
11/30/01 16:21:23:321 3 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1452] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Set TFT: Ver693c0.w87
11/30/01 16:21:23:321 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1453] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Set Dry Contrast: 6
11/30/01 16:21:23:321 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1515] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Body Part: DEFAULT (from
Connection DB)
11/30/01 16:21:23:351 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1616] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Image Tone Adjustment: 0 (from
Connection DB)
11/30/01 16:21:23:351 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1583] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Color Profile: @DEF0 (from
Connection DB)
11/30/01 16:21:23:361 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1063] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB uses PLUT uid:
1.2.840.113564.3.5040.2001.11.30.14.22.30.3
11/30/01 16:21:23:361 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1040] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB found an Image's PLUT
11/30/01 16:21:23:771 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3566] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Rows: 512
11/30/01 16:21:23:771 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,848] - SCP Assoc#10255: Setting Image Box (IB) for Position 2
[N-SET]
11/30/01 16:21:23:771 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3576] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Columns: 548
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-49
SERVICE MANUAL
11/30/01 16:21:23:771 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3583] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Bits Allocated: 8
11/30/01 16:21:23:771 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3601] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Bits Per Pixel (stored): 8
11/30/01 16:21:23:771 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3632] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB High Bit: 7
11/30/01 16:21:23:771 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3649] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Pixel Aspect Ratio: 1:1
11/30/01 16:21:23:771 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3679] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Photometric Interpretation:
MONOCHROME2
11/30/01 16:21:23:782 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1197] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Magnification Type: CUBIC
11/30/01 16:21:23:782 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1215] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Smoothing Type: 5
11/30/01 16:21:23:782 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1166] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Polarity: NORMAL (from Dicom)
11/30/01 16:21:23:792 3 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1452] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Set TFT: Ver693c0.w87
11/30/01 16:21:23:792 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1453] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Set Dry Contrast: 6
11/30/01 16:21:23:792 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1515] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Body Part: DEFAULT (from
Connection DB)
11/30/01 16:21:23:792 4 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1333] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Configuration Information:
LUT=Ver693c0.w87,006
11/30/01 16:21:23:842 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1583] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Color Profile: @DEF0 (from
Connection DB)
11/30/01 16:21:23:852 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1040] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB found an Image's PLUT
11/30/01 16:21:23:852 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1063] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB uses PLUT uid:
1.2.840.113564.3.5040.2001.11.30.14.22.30.3
11/30/01 16:21:23:852 5 [4030,23709187] [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1616] - SCP Assoc#10255: IB Image Tone Adjustment: 0 (from
Connection DB)
11/30/01 16:21:27:507 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,350] - Reply (1) from 100.100.100.40: bytes=12 time=0 ms
11/30/01 16:21:27:507 3 [4008,00029955] [ ] [NetworkServicesFactory.cpp,322] - Pinging 100.100.100.40 with 12 bytes of data
11/30/01 16:21:29:089 2 [4042,23708931] [ ] [MIMDicomDevice.cpp,78] - SCP Assoc#10255 Down
(Log continues....)
11-50 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Using Windows 2000 EXPLORE on the MIM through pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL
SOFTWARE
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM.
[2] Start the pcAnywhere application and connect with the MIM.
[3] At the taskbar, right-click Start.
[4] Click Explore.
The Explore Window for the MIM appears.
[5] Use Windows EXPLORE to find and move files as necessary.
Transferring Files Using pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE
The pcAnywhere FILE TRANSFER FEATURE allows you to easily transfer files between your LAPTOP COMPUTER and the
MIM.
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM.
[2] Start the pcAnywhere application and connect with the MIM.
File Transfer
Icon
[3] Click the File Transfer icon.
The pcAnywhere File Manager screen appears. The left pane shows files on your LAPTOP COMPUTER. The right pane shows files on the MIM. You can copy files between panes in either direction.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-51
SERVICE MANUAL
[4] Locate the file to be transferred
[5] Locate the destination folder in the other pane. (Create one, if necessary.)
[6] Click the Transfer icon to copy the file to the destination.
11-52 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Using Windows TASK MANAGER from pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE
Task Manager is a tool within Windows 2000 that allows the user to determine what tasks are running on the computer and what tasks are not responding. It also can display CPU and memory usage either by application or for the whole system.
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM.
[2] Start the pcAnywhere application and connect with the MIM.
The MIM desktop will display.
[3] Display the Task Manager Applications window by either:
• Right-clicking the lower task bar and selecting Task Manager.
• Clicking the [C-A-D] button on the pcANYWHERE upper task bar and then selecting the [Task Manager] button.
[4] If the “Applications” window does not appear, click the [Applications] tab to display it.
Note
The Task Manager Applications window lists all active applications. If the MIM is running, at least the following tasks should display:
• Remote Network Interface (system software)
• MIMRoute (the port routing application). This application runs only on PRINT SERVERS.
[5] Click the [Processes] tab to display the “Processes” window, which monitors computer and memory usage by application:
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-53
SERVICE MANUAL
[6] Click the [Performance] tab to display the “Performance” window, which provides a graphic of COMPUTER and memory usage for the entire system:
11-54 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Using NT Event Viewer from pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE
Event Viewer is a Windows 2000 function that can be used to display information relating to COMPUTER processes. It can help to:
• Detect COMPUTER hardware problems
• Study communication processes.
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM.
[2] Start the pcAnywhere application and connect to the MIM
The MIM desktop will display.
[3] From the MIM taskbar, select Start>Programs>Administrative Tools (Common)>Event Viewer.
Note
NT Event Viewer displays a table showing system process “events.”
• A red flag indicates a possible error condition.
• A yellow flag is a warning of a possible problem.
• A blue flag indicates the information relates to a “normal” operation.
[4] Double-click on any line to display information relating to that line. For example:
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-55
SERVICE MANUAL
11-56 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Power-On Problems
The following paragraphs provide information for on problems that occur during the power-on sequence.
Beep Codes
The Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) controls the start-up configuration of the MIM. Because the MIM does not include a
KEYBOARD and MONITOR, the BIOS provides features which allow the FE to:
• Listen to a sequence of beeps that provide feedback of error conditions during Power-On Self Test (POST).
• Use the LAPTOP COMPUTER to observe error messages and Power-On Self Test (POST) information.
Note
The 25 PS does not use beep codes.
Table 11–2 MIM 100 and MIM 200, 667MHz: Beep Codes during Power-On Self Test
0
Beeps
1
2
3
4
5
Malfunction and Cause
SPEAKER malfunction: MIM boots.
Power or CPU BOARD: MIM does not boot.
Recommended Action
Check the SPEAKER.
Repair the power malfunction or install a new CPU BOARD.
None.
None.
Error Messages
No malfunction: The BIOS successfully completed initialization of all onboard and external devices.
CMOS:
• Configuration error
• Checksum error
• Battery low or malfunctioned
• System options not set
None.
The boot process automatically stops. The LAPTOP COMPUTER prompts you to do the AMIBIOS
Setup. Go to Section 4 and do the procedure “Configuring the BIOS and Interrupts.”
• “CMOS Settings
Wrong”
• “CMOS Checksum
Bad”
• “CMOS Battery Low”
• “CMOS Settings
Wrong“
None.
SIMM: Failure in first 640 KB of base memory.
The system does not have any extended memory.
CPU BOARD:
• Refresh malfunction
• Processor Exception Interrupt Error
• Timer not Operational
• FLOPPY DRIVE CONTROLLER
HARD DRIVE:
• The busy signal of the HARD DRIVE
CONTROLLER did not go low in a finite period of time.
• The read/write did not verify.
• Initialization failed
• Incorrect parameters
• Interrupt was expected or data request signal did not arrive within a finite period of time.
The boot process automatically stops. Install a new SIMM in
BANK 0, SLOT 1.
The boot process automatically stops. Install a new CPU BOARD.
The boot process automatically stops. Repair the malfunction associated with the HARD
DRIVE.
• “Refresh Error“
• “None“
• “Timer Error“
• “FDC Error”
• “Pri. Master HDD
Error“
• “Pri. Slave HDD Error“
• “Sec. Master Error“
• “Sec. Slave Error“
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-57
SERVICE MANUAL
6
Beeps
7
Malfunction and Cause
VIDEO ADAPTER BOARD: Either the system
VIDEO ADAPTER is missing or the DISPLAY
MEMORY had a malfunction associated with a read/write command.
FLOPPY DRIVE:
• Incorrect Type
• Seek failure occurred during POST.
Recommended Action
The boot process automatically stops. Repair the malfunction associated with the VIDEO
ADAPTER BOARD.
Continue to boot from the HARD
DRIVE.
None.
Error Messages
“A or B: Drive Error“
Table 11–3 MIM 200, 1 GHz, Beep Codes during Power-On Self Test
Beeps Malfunction and Cause
Repeated long beeps A memory error has occurred.
One long beep, then 2 short beeps
A video error has occurred and the BIOS code cannot initialize the video screen to display additional information.
Recommended Action
Check that all DIMMs are correctly installed.
Check that the VIDEO
ADAPTER BOARD is correctly installed.
Error Messages
None
None
11-58 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting the MIM 100
Table 11–4 MIM 100: Troubleshooting the Power-On Sequence
Malfunction
The LED does not illuminate when the MIM energizes.
The FAN does not operate when the MIM energizes.
The KEYPAD does not display the logo for “PACS
LINK” when the MIM energizes.
The SPEAKER does not make one beep tone when the
MIM energizes.
The KEYPAD does not display the “Acquisition” screen.
1. Check the AC Power:
Solution
• The POWER CORD is correctly seated in an approved wall outlet
• Check the continuity of the POWER CORD
• The AC Power outlet is correct at the wall outlet
2. Check the continuity of the FUSES in the AC POWER SWITCH.
3. Check for 2 VDC at the LED CONNECTOR. If correct, then check all outputs of the
POWER SUPPLY.
4. Install a new LED.
1. Check the POWER SUPPLY:
• 12 V DC between P2-7 and P2-5 on the POWER SUPPLY
• 12 V DC at the FAN CONNECTOR
2. Install a new FAN.
1. Check the KEYPAD CABLE for:
• Correct seating in PORT on the BULKHEAD of the MIM
• Continuity of the KEYBOARD CABLE
2. Check for the DC voltages at the POWER SUPPLY.
3. Check FUSES F2 and F4 on the RS422 SERIAL BOARD.
4. Check that the:
• KEYBOARD HARNESS is correctly seated on the RELAY BD
• RIBBON CABLE for the RS422 I/F is correctly seated
5. Check that 12 Volt CONNECTOR on DIGITAL or VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD is installed correctly.
6. Install a new KEYPAD.
7. Install a new SERIAL BOARD.
1. If the SPEAKER does not beep once or sounds more than one beep, see Page
.
2. Check that the SPEAKER is correctly connected to the CPU BOARD.
3. Check the POWER SUPPLY:
• All outputs of the POWER SUPPLY are correct
• CONNECTORS P2, P3 are correctly seated on the CPU BOARD
4. Re-seat the SIMMs. If necessary, install a new SIMM in BANK 0, SLOT 1.
5. Re-seat the BIOS. If necessary, install a new BIOS.
1. Use the LAPTOP COMPUTER to check that the “CPU Setup and Configuration” information is correct. After you exit the ROM Setup Program, the MIM automatically reboots and reloads the system.
2. Check that the settings of the SWITCH and JUMPERS are correct on the RS 422 SERIAL
BOARD.
3. Check that the configuration files are correct.
4. Install the System Software and configure the MIM.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-59
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics for the OPTICAL INTERFACE (OI) BOARDS
Important
• Executing diagnostics on either the MIM OPTICAL INTERFACE or CPOI BOARDS interrupts communication, stopping transmission of images to the LASER PRINTER. Transmission will resume when the diagnostic complete.
• Execute the diagnostic for the MIM before executing the diagnostic for the CPOI. The communication between the MIM and the CPOI must be correct before the diagnostic for the CPOI will successfully pass the test.
• Before installing a replacement CPOI, check that the following equipment operates correctly:
– FIBER OPTIC CABLE between the MIM and the DISTRIBUTION BOARD Ay
– FIBER OPTIC PASSTHROUGH CONNECTOR at the DISTRIBUTION BOARD Ay
– Internal FIBER OPTIC CABLE between the DISTRIBUTION BOARD Ay and the CPOI
• The diagnostics for the CPOI include the following tests:
– Registers and interrupts
– Transmitters and receivers
– Memory
11-60 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting the CPOI
Enter selection -->
CES PORT TEST--------PASSED
DRAM INTEGRITY TEST- PASSED
DRAM REFRESH TEST--- PASSED
ROM SUMCHECK TEST--- PASSED
VICO68 RESET TEST--- PASSED
NVSRAM BATTTERY TEST- PASSED
NVSRAM INTEGRITY TEST-PASSED
VICO69 INITIALIZATION PASSED
CPNI Environment Ver 1.0
Current Date/Time ==> 5/13/1999 10:52:00
Valid Application in FLASH <GO>..copied to RAM
CPOI Application - CkSum 003456D8 OK
CPOI NVRAM- OK
SPURIOUS INTERRUPTS DETECTED! Count=2695692801
CPOI Starting-Date and Time=>5/13/1999 9:41:34
Start CPOI command handler...Complete!
Previous CPCP node:6 entry:1..MIM issue START!
Start CPOI driver...Complete!
CPOI Ver 1.2 [Boot PROM Ver. 1.0]
- UTILITIES MENU -
1 Get Current Date & Time
3 CPCP Buffer Address
4 CPCP Buffer Tables
6 Debug Utilities (Trace: 8000)
7 Get OI Firmware Revisions
8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests
9 Set Current Date & Time
CPOI Status: IDLE
***Spurious interrupts: Total=2695692801 Current=0***
Enter selection --> 1
Current PSOS Date & Time= >5/13/1999 9:41:42
Reset PSOS to RTC Date&Time=>5/13/1999 9:41:43
Important
• The CPOI is a “Plug and Play” device. No configuration is necessary. The MIM downloads all setup information to the
CPOI.
• The LAPTOP COMPUTER connects to the CPOI at the 25 PIN SERVICE CONNECTOR of the DISTRIBUTION BOARD
AY on the back of the LASER PRINTER.
• Connection setup to the LAPTOP COMPUTER for a CP interface is a Null Serial Connection: 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and full duplex.
[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the CPOI.
Caution
Before you return operation of the MIM to the customer, de-energize and energize the LASER PRINTER. The soft boot process might result in incorrectly terminated operations in the LASER PRINTER. Use the RESET on the front of the CPOI to soft boot the CPOI without de-energizing the LASER PRINTER.
[2] Energize or reset the LASER PRINTER. See the example screen below.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-61
SERVICE MANUAL
Important
If the screen data does not match the data indicated in the example screen, Page
[3] Check that the Date /Time of the CPOI and the MIM match:
• Select item 1 from the “Utilities Menu.”
• At the DISPLAY KEYPAD of the MIM, select Menu>Service Menu>Machine Setup>
Set Date/Time.
CPOI Ver 1.2 [Boot PROM Ver. 1.0]
UTILITIES MENU
1 Get Current Date & Time
3 CPCP Buffer Address
4 CPCP Buffer Tables
6 Debug Utilities (Trace: 8000)
7 Get OI Firmware Revisions
8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests
9 Set Current Date & Time
CPOI Status: IDLE
***Spurious interrupts: Total=2695692801 Current=0***
Enter selection --> 3
CPCP Buffer Tables
-- CPCP Anchor: 0XF0000
Important
If the screen data does not match the data indicated in the example, Page
[4] To determine the interface for which the CPOI is configured, select item 3. The LAPTOP COMPUTER will display the
“CPCP Anchor.”
Note
• For Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER (1120 LASER PRINTER): CPCP Anchor 0XF0000
• For Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER (2180 LASER PRINTER): CPCP Anchor 0X00000
[5] To determine if the interface SLOTS and addresses are correctly assigned, select item 4 from the “Utilities Menu.”
Important
See the example screen below:
• The “CPCP Buffer Table” data depends on the model of LASER PRINTER. In the “ow nr” column the address “00” is assigned to the LASER PRINTER:
– 2180 LASER PRINTER: 6 addresses
– 1120 LASER PRINTER: 4 addresses
• Maximum no. of entries in the “CPCP Buffer Table”:
– 16 addresses for the 1120 LASER PRINTER
– 22 addresses for the 2180 LASER PRINTER
• All CP interfaces except the CPOI are assigned 2 addresses.
• The CPOI is assigned 1 address.
• The Network Interface is assigned 6 addresses.
11-62 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
• In the “ownr” column of the CPCP Buffer Table below:
– Node Id 00: 2180 LASER PRINTER
– Node Id 01: CPVI
– Node Id 06: CPOI
• Address ABCD1234 indicates an unassigned Node.
• The TSC might request this data to resolve node conflicts on the VMEbus.
==============================================================================================
CPCP Global Memory in 2180
==============================================================================================
==============================================================================================
CPCP Buffer Table Anchor
==============================================================================================
Addr. Buftbl * BT_Lock Valid_Anchor BT_Vers.
00000000 0003F980 CD000000 4B454350(‘KECP’) 32324220(‘22B’)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CPCP NodeAv1[]
Node 0 Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Node 5 Node 6 Node 7
EA000000 EA000000 ABCD1234 ABCD1234 ABCD1234 ABCD1234 EA000000 ABCD1234
==============================================================================================
CPCP Buffer Table Entries
==============================================================================================
ow in ow sn -----int_owner----- -----ack_sender----
Addr. nd us nr dr bufaddr bytes seq mbx_base iv ip type mxb_base iv ip type
00 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F980 01 01 00 01 0003EE80 000F 00C8 00002000 00 00 0001 00002100 00 00 0001
01 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F99C 01 01 00 06 0003EF00 000F 0003 00002000 01 00 0001 00002600 00 00 0001
02 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F9B8 01 00 00 FF 0003EF80 0000 0000 00002000 02 00 0001 4350444C 43 50 444C
03 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F9D4 01 00 00 FF 0003F000 0000 0000 00002000 03 00 0001 4350444C 43 50 444C
04 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F9F0 01 00 00 FF 0003F080 0000 0000 00002000 04 00 0001 4350444C 43 50 444C
05 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F99C 01 00 00 FF 0003F100 0000 0000 00002000 05 00 0001 4350444C 43 50 444C
06 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F99C 01 01 01 00 0003F180 000F 00CB 00002100 00 00 0001 00002000 00 00 0001
07 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F99C 01 00 01 FF 0003F200 0000 0000 00002100 01 00 0001 4350444C 43 50 444C
08 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F99C 01 01 06 00 0003F280 000F 0005 00002600 00 00 0001 00002000 00 00 0001
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-63
SERVICE MANUAL
CPOI Ver 1.2 [Boot PROM Ver. 1.0]
UTILITIES MENU
1 Get Current Date & Time
3 CPCP Buffer Address
4 CPCP Buffer Tables
6 Debug Utilities (Trace: 8000)
7 Get OI Firmware Revisions
8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests
9 Set Current Date & Time
CPOI Status: IDLE
***Spurious interrupts: Total=2695692801 Current=0***
Enter selection --> 7
CPOI Test -Get OI Revisions-4/29/1999 10:53:48
CPOI SEND_BOOTCODE_REVISION requests
CPOI Boot Code Rev: 1.0.4
MIMOI Boot Code Rev: 1.0.4
CPOI SEND_APPCODE_REVISION requests
CPOI App Code Rev: 1.0.4
MIMOI App Code Rev: 1.0.4
Important
The Debug Utilities are password protected and for use in program debugging only. To execute item 6 “Debug Utilities” you must call the TSC for the password and instructions.
[6] To determine the “MIM IO firmware version,” select item 7. The version must match the version displayed in “Checking
Service Tracking” on Page 6 – 2 .
11-64 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Troubleshooting
CPOI Ver 1.2 [Boot PROM Ver. 1.0]
UTILITIES MENU
1 Get Current Date & Time
3 CPCP Buffer Address
4 CPCP Buffer Tables
6 Debug Utilities (Trace: 8000)
7 Get OI Firmware Revisions
8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests
9 Set Current Date & Time
CPOI Status: IDLE
***Spurious interrupts: Total=2695692801 Current=0***
Enter selection --> 8
CPOI Diagnostic-Run All Tests-4/29/1999 10:53:
CPOI RUN_DIAGNOSTIC request
CPOI Diag. Result command:X10001
- Tests run: 23
- All tests passed: - 4/29/1999 10:54:11
[7] To execute the “CPOI and MIM OI onboard diagnostics,” select item 8.
Caution
Before returning operation of the MIM to the customer, de-energize and energize the LASER PRINTER. The soft boot process might result in incorrectly terminated operations in the LASER PRINTER. Use the RESET on the front of the CPOI to soft boot the CPOI without de-energizing the LASER PRINTER.
[8] After executing the diagnostics, de-energize and energize the LASER PRINTER.
[9] Return operation of the MIM to the customer.
Table 11–5 Troubleshooting the CPOI
Indication
One or more of the 8 boot-up tests fails.
“ChSum” not OK.
CPCP node does not match node configured in Page 6-
11.
“Date/Time” of the CPOI and the Print Server do not match.
Version < “CPOI Ver 1.2”
“Spurious interrupts” counts are display for your information
Incorrect “Anchor”
The data in the “CPCP Buffer Table” does not match the hardware installed.
The MIM OI firmware version does not match the version displayed in “Service Tracking Information.”
Action
Reseat the DAUGHTER BOARD of the CPOI and reboot. If necessary, install a new CPOI.
Execute item 3 in the “Utilities Menu.” If the “Anchor” is incorrect,
see the indication below.
Execute item 8 in the “Utilities Menu.” Do not execute item 9 unless the TSC instructs you.
The version must be Š 1.2. Install Mod 1.
Mod 49 must be installed for the 2180 LASER PRINTER. To reset to zero execute [Ctrl] kill.
Configure the Destination: See Page 6 – 12 . If the “Anchor” remains incorrect, execute item 8 in the “Utilities Menu.” If the diagnostic does not indicate a malfunction of the MIM OI and the FIBER
OPTIC CABLE, then check that the other CP interfaces on the
VMEbus operate correctly. If necessary, install a new CPOI.
Select item 8 in the “Utilities Menu” to execute the “CPOI and MIM onboard diagnostics.” See Page
configuration of all interfaces is correct, including Node ID.
Troubleshoot hardware on the VMEbus of the LASER PRINTER.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-65
SERVICE MANUAL
Calling for Support
Be prepared to provide the following information when calling for support to solve a service problem:
• Model Number: MIM 200, MIM 100 or 25 PS
• K- Number:
– For MIM 200 and MIM 100: Located on decal on right side of MIM.
– For 25 PS: Located on decal on left front of machine.
• Serial Number:
– For MIM 200 and MIM 100: Located on decal on back of MIM
– For 25 PS: Located on decal on bottom of machine.
11-66 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Section 12: Illustrated Parts List
Introduction
This section includes illustrated parts lists of the hardware components for the following MIMs:
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGING MANAGER 200 (MIM 200) - 1 GHz
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGING MANAGER 200 (MIM 200) - 1.2 GHz
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGING MANAGER 200 (MIM 200) - 2.4 GHz
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGING MANAGER 100 (MIM 100) - 1.2 GHz
• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)
The parts lists include all new BOARDS and CABLES necessary for use of V_6.1 and higher.
For parts information for the following MIM versions, see the ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST 8B8186.
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGING MANAGER 200 (MIM 200) - 667 MHz.
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGING MANAGER 100 (MIM 100) - 433 MHz
Illustrated Parts Breakdown
• Figure 12-1. MIM 200, 1 GHz - FRAME AY - External
• Figure 12-2. MIM 200, 2.4 GHz - BOARDS
• Figure 12-3. MIM 200, 1 GHz - BOARDS
• Figure 12-4. 25 PS - FRAME AY - External
• Figure 12-5. 25 PS - BOARDS and CABLES
• Figure 12-6. MODEM BOARD - MIM 200 and 25 PS
• Figure 12-7. SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD - MIM 200
• Figure 12-8. DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD - MIM 200
• Figure 12-9. VIDEO 150LC INTERFACE BOARD and CABLES - MIM 200
• Figure 12-10. NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD - MIM 200
• Figure 12-11. Ethernet BOARDS and CABLES - MIM 200 and 25 PS
• Figure 12-12. COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL) BOARD and CABLES - MIM 200 and 25 PS
• Figure 12-13. FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT (FOPCIL) BOARD and CABLES - MIM 200 and 25 PS
• Figure 12-14. OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD and CABLES - MIM 200
• Figure 12-15. KEYPAD INTERFACE BOARD - 25 PS
• Figure 12-16. Ethernet ADAPTERS and CROSSOVER CABLES
Illustrated Parts List
8E8820 – NOV 2003 12-1
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 12–1 MIM 200, 1 GHz, 1.2 GHz, and 2.4 GHz- FRAME AY - External
2
1
3
FOR
MA
T=
COPIE
S=
24
1
EN
D
M
MA
MEN IN
U
4
5
7
6
H180_3032DCA
H180_3032DC
3
4
1
2
2
Item Part No.
4E8506
SP8E7078
3E0840
Description
PC AUR/ENCLOSURE AY 1
GHz
PC AUR/ENCLOSURE AY 2.4
GHz
Notes
Includes HARD DRIVE, CD-ROM DRIVE, CPU BOARD, and VGA BOARD. For BOARDS added to PC CHASSIS, see
Figure
Includes HARD DRIVE, CD-ROM DRIVE, CPU BOARD, and VGA BOARD. For BOARDS added to PC CHASSIS, see
Figure
PC AUR/ENCLOSURE AY 1.2
GHz
KEYPAD - touchscreen Shipped with the latest FIRMWARE. For proper operation, must be loaded with correct level of firmware. See Section 2 for procedure.
SP3E1621 KEYPAD - print
SP3E1622 KEYPAD - display
12-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
6
7
5
Item Part No.
SP7E8011
Description
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER
SUPPLY (UPS) - 120 V
4E8357 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER
SUPPLY (UPS) - 230 V
SP4E9772 BAR CODE READER
4E8061 External Modem
For U.S. and Canada.
For international use.
Notes
Includes:
• POWER ADAPTER - not illustrated
• TELEPHONE CORD - not illustrated
• SERIAL CABLE - not illustrated
Illustrated Parts List
8E8820 – NOV 2003 12-3
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 12–2 MIM 200, 2.4 GHz - BOARDS
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
Slot
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
H180_0115HCA
H180_0115HC
3
4
1
2
Item Part No.
SP3H9609
6E7866
SP6E5193
5E2762
5
5E2119
SP4E9916
4E5524
3E2429
Description
CABLE - COM 10, COM 11 Internal
BOARD - MODEM, 3 com, 56K, PCI
BOARD - network isolation
BOARD - RS422 serial interface, 8 channel,
V_1
BOARD - digital interface, 8 mb, V_2.2
BOARD - video 150LC interface
BOARD - single channel video 60 interface
BOARD - Ethernet, 10/100baseT, Secondary
SP6E7386 BOARD - COPCIL
SP74040182136 BOARD - FOPCIL
2E4017 BOARD - optical interface, CPOI
Notes
Used in all MIM 200s.
Used in MIM 200s manufactured with software earlier than V_6.0. See Figure
See Figure
12–12 . Required in EEC countries.
Used in all MIM 200s. See Figure
MODALITY SERVERS only. See Figures
. The BOARDS can be used in any combination, installed in slots 4 and 5.
PRINT SERVERS only. See Figure
.
3E2429 replaces 3H8075.
PRINT SERVERS only. See Figure
.
PRINT SERVERS only. See Figure
.
PRINT SERVERS only. See Figure
.
12-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Illustrated Parts List
Figure 12–3 MIM 200, 1 GHz - BOARDS
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
2
3
Slot
1
4
H180_0098HCA
H180_0098HC
3
4
1
Item Part No.
No Number
2 6E7866
SP6E5193
5E2762
5
5E2119
SP4E9916
4E5524
3E2429
Description
BOARD - video adapter
BOARD - MODEM, 3 com, 56K, PCI
BOARD - network isolation
BOARD - RS422 serial interface, 8 channel,
V_1
BOARD - digital interface, 8 mb, V_2.2
BOARD - video 150LC interface
BOARD - single channel video 60 interface
BOARD - Ethernet, 10/100baseT, Secondary
SP6E7386 BOARD - COPCIL
SP74040182136 BOARD - FOPCIL
2E4017 BOARD - optical interface, CPOI
Notes
Covered by plate. Used in all MIM 200s. Not stocked.
Used in MIM 200s manufactured with software
earlier than V_6.0. See Figure 12–8 .
See Figure
12–12 . Required in EEC countries.
Used in all MIM 200s. See Figure
MODALITY SERVERS only. See Figures
. The BOARDS can be used in any combination, installed in slots 4 and 5.
PRINT SERVERS only. See Figure
.
3E2429 replaces 3H8075.
PRINT SERVERS only. See Figure
.
PRINT SERVERS only. See Figure
.
PRINT SERVERS only. See Figure
.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 12-5
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 12–4 MIM 200, 1.2 GHz - BOARDS
1
4
2
3
H180_3033HCA
H180_3033HC
1
2
Item Part No.
5E2762
3
4
5E2119
SP4E9916
4E5524
3E2429
Description
BRACKET - 422
BOARD - RS422 serial interface, 8 channel,
V_1
BOARD - digital interface, 8 mb, V_2.2
BOARD - video 150LC interface
BOARD - single channel video 60 interface
BOARD - Ethernet, 10/100baseT, Secondary
SP6E7386 BOARD - COPCIL
SP74040182136 BOARD - FOPCIL
2E4017 BOARD - optical interface, CPOI
Notes
???
Used in all MIM 200s. See Figure
MODALITY SERVERS only. See Figures
. The BOARDS can be used in any combination, installed in slots 3 and 4.
PRINT SERVERS only. See Figure
.
3E2429 replaces 3H8075.
PRINT SERVERS only. See Figure
.
PRINT SERVERS only. See Figure
.
PRINT SERVERS only. See Figure
.
12-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Illustrated Parts List
Figure 12–5 MIM 100, 1.2 GHz - BOARDS
1
2
3
4
H180_3046HC
1
2
Item Part No.
SP6E5193
5E2762
3 or 4 5E2119
SP4E9916
4E5524
Description
BOARD - network isolation
BOARD - RS422 serial interface, 8 channel,
V_1
BOARD - digital interface, 8 mb, V_2.2
BOARD - video 150LC interface
BOARD - single channel video 60 interface
Notes
See Figure
12–12 . Required in EEC countries.
Used in all MIM 200s. See Figure
MODALITY SERVERS only. See Figures
. The BOARDS can be used in any combination, installed in slots 3 and 4.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 12-7
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 12–6 25 PS - FRAME AY - External
3
4
1
2
H180_0091HCA
H180_0091HC
8
2
3
7
8
4
5
6
1
Item Part No.
SP8E2908
Description
Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER,
FRU for U.S. and International
Notes
Includes HARD DRIVE with pre-loaded software.
Does not include INTERNAL MODEM or OUTPUT
BOARD. See Figure
.
SP3E1622
5E5800
KEYPAD - display
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
(UPS) - 120 V
7E7814 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
(UPS) - 230 V
POWER STRIP KIT 7E2998
6E7293 UPS HOLDOWN KIT
26-1011-5783-7 FASTENERS - Anchor, self-tapping
42-0007-5371-7
4E8061
CABLE - Ethernet, 7 ft
External Modem
For U.S. and Canada.
For international use.
For mobile applications.
Not illustrated. For mobile applications.
Not illustrated. Used to fasten MIM to wall. (Supplied in bag.)
Not illustrated.
Includes:
• POWER ADAPTER - not illustrated
• TELEPHONE CORD - not illustrated
• SERIAL CABLE - not illustrated
12-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Figure 12–7 25 PS - BOARDS and CABLES
Illustrated Parts List
5 4
3
1
1
Item Part No.
6E7866
Description
BOARD - MODEM
2
5
6
3
4
3E2429 BOARD - Ethernet, 10/100baseT
SP6E7386 BOARD - COPCIL
SP74040182136 BOARD - FOPCIL
8E2262
7E7760
7E7759
5E5554
BOARD - KEYPAD interface
CABLE - ribbon
CABLE - power, split
MEMORY STICK - 128 MB PKD
2
H180_0096DCA
H180_0096DC
Notes
See Figure
manufactured with MIM software earlier than
V_6.0.
See Figure
See Figure
See Figure
See Figure
Not illustrated.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 12-9
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 12–8 MODEM BOARD - MIM 200 and 25 PS
PHONE
TELCO
J5
J1
H180_0044BCA
H180_0044BC
1
Item Part No.
6E7866
Description
BOARD - MODEM, 3 Com, 56K, PCI
Notes
1
12-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Figure 12–9 SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD - MIM 200
J4 J2
J1 J3
1
Illustrated Parts List
3
Com 7
Com 8
Com 9
H180_0105GC
2
Com 4
Com 5
Com 6
Com 7
Com 8
Com 9
H180_0112DCA
H180_0112DC
4
5
2
3
1
Item Part No.
5E2762
5E2726
Description
BOARD - RS422 serial interface, 8 channel, V1_1
CABLE - RS422, 6 PORT, external
SP1F5038 CABLE - RS422, 3 PORT, external
SP3H9609 CABLE - COM 10, COM 11, internal
7E6267 FUSE
Notes
Used in MIM 200, 2.4 GHz
Used in MIM 200, 2.4 GHz
Not illustrated.
4
8E8820 – NOV 2003 12-11
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 12–10 DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD and CABLES - MIM 200
J1
P4
P3
1
U1 U2 U3 U4
1
J2
2
COBRA BOARD
USED FOR
EXPANSION
AREA
DO NOT
BREAK OFF
2
1
Item Part No.
5E2199
Description
BOARD - digital interface, 8 MB, V_2.2
2 3E0675 CABLE ADAPTER- RS485, 6 port, 1 m (39.4 in.)
Notes
12-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Illustrated Parts List
Figure 12–11 VIDEO 150LC INTERFACE BOARD - MIM 200
P1
P2
1
A8
J1
A1
P3
P6
2
J1 Video1 In
J2 Video1 Out
J3 Video2 In
J4 Video2 Out
J5 Video3 In
J6 Video3 Out
J7 Csync In
J8 Csync Out
3
H180_0034DCA
H180_0034DC
J1 Red In
J2 Green In
J3 Blue In
J4 Sync In
J5 Red Out
J6 Green Out
J7 Blue Out
J8 Sync Out
4
3
4
1
2
Item Part No.
4E9916
3H8796
Description
BOARD - video 150LC interface
CABLE - s60, 3 channel, B/W video
3E0685 CABLE - color video, 20 ft
3H8797 CABLE - B/W video adapter, 8 in.
Notes
Video In
Video Out
CSync In
Csync Out
8E8820 – NOV 2003 12-13
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 12–12 NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD - MIM 200
J4 J2 J1 J3
H180_0105GC
1
2
Item Part No.
SP6E5193
SP5E2914
Description
BOARD - network isolation
CABLE - network isolation Not illustrated.
Notes
12-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Figure 12–13 Ethernet BOARDS and CABLES - MIM 200 and 25 PS
1
Illustrated Parts List
2
3
CROSSOVER
H180_0092DCA
H180_0092DC
1
2
3
Item Part No.
3H8075
3E2429
8E2249
3E1581
Description
BOARD - Ethernet 10/100baseT
BOARD - Ethernet 10/100baseT
CABLE - Ethernet Crossover, 3 m
CABLE - Ethernet Crossover, 10 m
CABLE - Ethernet Crossover
Notes
For MIM 200. Being replaced by Item 2.
For PACS LINK 25 and MIM 200.
Furnished with PACS LINK 25.
Not furnished with MIM. Available for order.
For MIM 200 (to KELI 160).
8E8820 – NOV 2003 12-15
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 12–14 COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL) BOARD and CABLES - MIM 200 and 25 PS
1
PWA-COPC
J7
R7
U13
U14
U8
U10
J2
J6
U4
F1
J5
D1
D3
D2
J4
1
Item
2
Part No.
SP6E7386
Description
BOARD - COPCIL
Notes
74-0500-5864-8 CABLE - COPCIL, Long Not illustrated. For connection to 8500/8700 IMAGERS.
74-0401-9054-3 CABLE - COPCIL, Short Not illustrated. For connection to 8100 IMAGER.
H180_0094HCA
H180_0094HC
12-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Figure 12–15 FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT (FOPCIL) BOARD and CABLES - MIM 200 and 25 PS
Illustrated Parts List
1
3
4
5
1
2
Item Part No.
Description
74-0401-8213-6 BOARD - FOPCIL
78-8075-2605-3 CABLE - fiber optic, 3 m
78-8063-3684-4 CABLE - fiber optic, 10 m
78-8063-3685-1 CABLE - fiber optic, 30 m
78-8063-3686-9 CABLE - fiber optic, 60 m
H180_0095HCA
H180_0095HC
Notes
Not illustrated. Furnished with system.
Not illustrated. Available for order.
Not illustrated. Available for order.
Not illustrated. Available for order.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 12-17
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 12–16 OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD and CABLES - MIM 200
U31
U1
U2
U3 U4
1
P1
P2
2
3
H180_0036DCA
H180_0036DC
1
2
3
Item Part No.
2E4017
3E0628
2E4018
Description
BOARD - optical interface
CABLE - fiber optic, 2 m
CABLE - fiber optic, 8 m
Notes
12-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Figure 12–17 KEYPAD INTERFACE BOARD - 25 PS
1
Illustrated Parts List
1
Item Part No.
8E2262
Description
BOARD - KEYPAD, interface
Notes
H180_0097HCA
H180_0097HC
8E8820 – NOV 2003 12-19
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 12–18 Ethernet ADAPTERS and CROSSOVER CABLES
P3
(ETHERNET-J70)
H180_0032BCA
H180_0032BC
7
1
J3
(BASE T)
5,6
2,3,4
10 BASE 2
5
6
3
4
1
2
Item Part No.
6C6068
1C9382
968381
4B8646
6C6006
6C6007
Description
CABLE - TP, crossover, 2ft
TRANSCEIVER - AUI/Thicknet
TRANSCEIVER - AUI/Thinnet
TRANSCEIVER - AUI/Fiber
CONVERTER - TP
CONVERTER - TP
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Notes
MIM 100 and MIM 200 1.2 GHz Field Replaceable Parts
The MIM 100 and MIM 200 1.2 GHz enclosures with software V_6.1 and higher include some field replaceable parts. The
Table 11–1 Field Replaceable Parts, MIM 100 and MIM 200 1.2 GHz
Part Number
7E9757
7E9764
7E9759
7E9758
7E9763
7E9761
7E9756
7E9781
7E9760
7E9783
Item
POWER SUPPLY 100
POWER SUPPLY 200
MOTHERBOARD
CPU
CPU FAN
RAM
CD ROM DRIVE
HARD DISK DRIVE
FLOPPY DRIVE
EXHAUST FAN MIM 200
12-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Part Number
7E9782
1F8688
7E9784
Item
EXHAUST FAN MIM 100
POWER SWITCH
RUBBER FEET (not shown)
Figure 12–19 Location of Field Serviceable Parts, MIM 100 1.2 GHz
POWER SUPPLY
FLOPPY DRIVE
CPU FAN
POWER SWITCH
HARD DISK DRIVE
Illustrated Parts List
EXHAUST FAN
MIM 100 1.2 GHz
H180_3034DCA
H180_3034DC
CPU
CD ROM DRIVE
MOTHER BOARD
8E8820 – NOV 2003 12-21
SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 12–20 Location of Field Serviceable Parts, MIM 200 1.2 GHz
POWER SUPPLY
CPU FAN
POWER SWITCH
HARD DISK DRIVE
FLOPPY DRIVE
EXHAUST FANS
MIM 100 1.2 GHz
H180_3035DCA
H180_3035DC
CPU
CD ROM DRIVE
MOTHER BOARD
12-22 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Additional Information
Section 13: Additional Information
Setting Up the Mitra PACS BROKER to Send Event Notifications to the MIM
Starting with Version 5.0, the MIM uses the DICOM N-Event reporting capability of the Mitra PACS BROKER MODALITY
Worklist “push” model. To have automatic notifications sent to it, the MIM must be registered in the Mitra PACS BROKER. If the MIM is not registered, or until the first “push” notification is received, the MIM will use the normal “pull” mode for obtaining
MODALITY worklists.
Note
V_1.5.2 of the Mitra PACS BROKER does not allow Study description, which also will cause the MIM software to revert to the
“pull” mode.
[1] Open the “BROKER Toolbar.” You might need the password.
[2] Click [Device Manager] (second button from the left).
[3] From the Device Manager window, click [Add].
8E8820 – NOV 2003 13-1
SERVICE MANUAL
[4] From the list of Device Types, select [PACS].
[5] From the “Vendors” list, select [Mitra].
[6] From the “Products” list, select [Standard PACS Device].
[7] Click [X] to close the window.
13-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Additional Information
[8] Enter the AE Title and Host Name for the MIM/MWLPMC.
[9] Click [Save] (middle button in upper right corner).
[10] Check that the AE Title and Host name are correct.
[11] Enter the PORT Number for which the MIM / MWLPMC is set up. This is normally 5405 for MIM and 5401 for
MWLPMC.
[12] Click the middle button (Events).
8E8820 – NOV 2003 13-3
SERVICE MANUAL
[13] Double-click the 4 STUDY events from the “Event Types Available...” to move them to “Added Event Types”:
• STUDY_CREATED
• STUDY_DELETED
• STUDY_SCHEDULED
• STUDY_UPDATED
[14] Close the window.
13-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Additional Information
[15] From the “STANDARD PACS DEVICE” window, click [Save]. The BROKER is now configured to send N-EVENTS-
REPORTS to the MIM/MWLPMC.
Important
To enter new data, you can also change the settings by clicking [Modify] on the “Device Manager” window to see the
“STANDARD PACS DEVICE” window.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 13-5
SERVICE MANUAL
13-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Section 14: Warnings and Cautions
Safety Instructions
Read and understand all instructions in this section before using the:
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200
• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100
• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER
Important
The following safety information applies to all systems covered in this manual, except where indicated.
Warnings and Cautions
Warning
This equipment is operated with hazardous voltage which can shock, burn or cause death.
• Use only the power cord supplied with this equipment.
• Remove wall plug before servicing equipment. Never pull on cord to remove from outlet. Grasp plug and pull to disconnect.
• Do not operate equipment with a damaged power cord.
• Do not use an extension cord to power this equipment.
• Position the power cord so it will not be tripped over or pulled.
• Connect this equipment to a grounded outlet.
• Do not place a portable-multiple-socket outlet (power strip) on the floor. Mount the power strip on a wall or on the underside of a table.
Warning
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
• Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Warning
This equipment is not contained in a sealed cabinet. Do not use this equipment in locations where it can come in contact with liquids, including body fluids.
Warning
This equipment contains a lithium battery. There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Warning
Do not substitute or modify any part of this equipment without approval of Eastman Kodak Company.
Warning
Do not use in the presence of flammable anesthetics, oxygen or nitrous oxide. This equipment does not have a gas-sealed electronics enclosure and could ignite any flammable or explosive gases present in its environment.
8E8820 – NOV 2003 14-1
SERVICE MANUAL
Warning
The device is not intended to be installed within patient vicinity. The equipment must be installed no closer than
1.83 meters from a patient bed or chair. This Caution does not apply to the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER
100.
Laser Warning
Avoid Laser Beam. The CD-ROM drive in this product uses an invisible 5-milliwatt laser beam. Laser radiation may be
present when the machine operates without panels or covers installed.
Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those described in this document may result in eye damage. This Warning does not apply to the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100.
Caution
Only trained service personnel are authorized to remove covers. There are no “user” serviceable parts in this machine.
Caution
This equipment is intended to connect to other medical devices. Only qualified service personnel may perform installation and service maintenance.
Caution
The Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. Those limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Caution
The Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGERS 100 and 200 have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. Those limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Caution
General External Cleaning: This equipment may be cleaned with a damp cloth using water with mild detergent or commercial electronic equipment cleaner.
Important
U.S. Federal law restricts this device to sale to, by, or on the order of a licensed health care practitioner.
14-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Warnings and Cautions
For the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 only:
Classifications
UL Classified
File Number E183646
Control Number 9R46
Medical Equipment
UL2601-1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1
Classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. with respect to Electric shock, Fire, Casualty and
Medical Hazards only in Accordance with UL2601-1, CAN/CSA C22.2 No.601.1 and IEC 601.1.
Safety, Regulatory, EMC and CE Marking Compliance
All safety, regulatory, EMC and CE marking information is located in the User’s Guides.
Labels
The following label is located either on the CD-ROM drive or on the enclosure for the drive. The label does not apply to the
Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100:
8E8820 – NOV 2003 14-3
SERVICE MANUAL
Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200
(MIM 200) Safety Requirements Change
Note
Note: Only MIM 100 1.2 GHz platforms, are marketed in EEC countries for patient environment. Isolation transformer and UPS are not required
Due to recent hardware changes, there is new information about MIM 200 compliance with the Medical Device Directive (MDD) for product placement in the European Economic Community (EEC).
Compliancy with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 Requirements
Under some circumstances in the EEC, the MIM 200 complies with IEC 60601-1-1/
EN 60601-1-1 general requirements for safety - Collateral Standard: Safety requirements for Medical Electrical Systems.
Depending on the MIM 200 configuration, the following requirements must be met to comply with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-
1-1:
• Print Server (only): The MIM 200 must be connected to the imager by fiber optic cable.
• Modality Server (only): Each image source must comply with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1. If there are multiple image sources, each must comply with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1, or meet approval for the patient contact environment.
• Combination Modality/Print Server:
Each image source must comply with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1. If there are multiple image sources, each must comply with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1, or meet approval for the patient contact environment.
and
The MIM 200 must be connected to the imager by fiber optic cable or by ethernet cable through the network isolation board.
In addition, in the EEC for all configurations, the MIM 200 must be connected to the building power source and the network
according to the Setup Diagram. See “Setup Diagram” on Page 14 – 5.
Where each of the requirements is met, the MIM 200 meets the following MDD standard:
English
EUROPEAN MARKET ONLY:
This processor is Class 1, Type B medical equipment as defined by EN 60601-1.
AUTHORIZED AGENT: Manager, Product Safety; Kodak GmbH; Hedelfingerstr. 54-56; 70327 Stuttgart, GERMANY.
14-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Warnings and Cautions
Setup Diagram
This setup diagram applies only to the MIM 200 when installed in the EEC.
Caution
Connections other than those in the Setup Diagram violate IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 requirements and therefore cannot be placed within a patient environment (1.83 meters from a patient bed or chair).
Building Power
220 VAC
ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
Toroid
Corporation
Model ISB-030W
COM 1 and COM 2 Port Fillers
Part Number 1F1539
UNINTERRUPTIBLE
POWER SUPPLY
Delta Electronics
Model
GES102N220032
Network Isolation Board
Catalog No. 1898030
(Typical Placement is slot 2)
MIM 200
Building Data
Network input 2 (Optional Input Used for LASER IMAGER) input 1 (Connect to MIM 200 Network Port)
Output 1 (Connect to Building Network Port)
Output 2 (Optional Output Used for LASER IMAGER)
J3
J1
J2
J4
H180_0113DC
8E8820 – NOV 2003 14-5
SERVICE MANUAL
Non-Compliancy with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 Requirements
Caution
Connections described below violate IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 requirements and therefore cannot be placed within a patient environment (1.83 meters from a patient bed or chair).
In the following circumstances, the MIM 200 does not comply with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1:
• If the MIM 200 connects to an imager by an RS-422 copper cable, the MIM 200 and the imager do not comply with IEC
60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 and are not approved for the patient contact environment.
• If the MIM 200 receives images from an image source that does not comply with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1, the MIM
200 and all connected imagers are not approved for the patient contact environment. Any device in the chain that is not approved for patient contact invalidates approval for each device.
• Any setup other than that shown in the Setup Diagram on page
does not comply with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1.
For any of the scenarios described above, the following MDD statement applies:
1.83 m
(6 ft)
2.5 m
(8 ft)
English
EUROPEAN MARKET ONLY:
This device is not medical equipment according to EN 60601-1 and must therefore not enter the Patient Environment as defined in EN 60601-1-1. The following requirements have to be met:
1. Distance from device to Patient Contact Equipment (see illustration). Horizontal = 1,83 metres;
Vertical = 2,5 metres above the floor under the patient.
2. Contact of patient and device simultaneously by caregiver not allowed.
3. NO direct electrical connection between device and Patient Contact Environment is allowed.
AUTHORISED AGENT:
Manager, Product Safety; Kodak GmbH; Hedelfingerstr. 54-56; 70327 Stuttgart, GERMANY.
14-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820
Publication History
Publication
Date
03NOV03
Publication No.
8E8820
ECO No.
–
Warnings and Cautions
Changed
Pages
–
File Name
8E8820.fm
Notes
• Added information for MIM embedded enclosures.
• Rev D
8E8820 – NOV 2003 14-7
Kodak, Digital Science, DryView, and Ektascan are trademarks.
Printed in U.S.A. • 8E8820_safety.fm
EASTMAN KODAK COMPANY
Rochester, NY 14650
Laadi alla
Avalik link on uuendatud
Teie vestluse avalik link on uuendatud. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Dokumendi avalik link
Reklaam
